MA2100cwx MA2100cwfxENSMR2 ASSC

CONFIDENTIAL
Published in December 2021

Version 2.0
Service Manual
ECOSYS MA2100cwfx / ECOSYS MA2100cfx / ECOSYS MA2100cx
PF-5110
[CONFIDENTIAL]
CONFIDENTIAL
FOR AUTHORIZED KYOCERA ENGINEERS ONLY. DO NOT DISTRIBUTE TO NON-AUTHORIZED PARTIES.
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES

ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.
It may be illegal to dispose of this battery into the municipal waste stream. Check with your local solid waste officials for
details in your area for proper disposal.
ATTENTION
IL Y A UN RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE DE TYPE INCORRECT.

METTRE AU REBUT LES BATTERIES UTILISEES SELON LES INSTRUCTIONS DONNEES.
Il peut être illégal de jeter les batteries dans des eaux d’égout municipales. Vérifiez avec les fonctionnaires municipaux
de votre région pour les détails concernant des déchets solides et une mise au rebut appropriée.
Notation of products in the manual

For the purpose of this service manual, products are identified by print speed at A4.
Product name Print speed 100 V 120 V 220-240 V Australia China

(Mono/ Color)
ECOSYS MA2100cwfx 21/ 21 sheets/min - x x x -
ECOSYS MA2100cfx 21/ 21 sheets/min - x x x -
ECOSYS MA2100cx 21/ 21 sheets/min - - - - x
1-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Revision history
Revision Date Pages Revised contents
1.0 2021/10/1 New edition
2.0 2021/11/8 Page 10-1 Correction: PF-5110 Installation procedure
2021/11/17 Page 6-28 Correction: U067 (Increase: right --> left, decrease: left --> right)
Page 6-28 Addition: U067 (Add the note)
Page 6-32 Addition: U072 (Add the note)
2021/11/26 Page 4-5 Addition: Add URL and code for the maintenance video
Page 4-16
Page 4-17
Page 4-22
Page 4-28
Page 4-31
Page 4-51
Page 4-56
Page 4-59
Page 4-121
Page 4-133
Page 4-140
1-3
Safety precautions
This booklet provides safety warnings and precautions for our service personnel to ensure the safety of their
customers, their machines as well as themselves during maintenance activities. Service personnel are advised to
read this booklet carefully to familiarize themselves with the warnings and precautions described here before
engaging in maintenance activities.
Safety warnings and precautions
Various symbols are used to protect our service personnel and customers from physical danger and to prevent
damage to their property. These symbols are described below:
DANGER: High risk of serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with warning messages using this symbol.
WARNING: Serious bodily injury or death may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with
warning messages using this symbol.
CAUTION: Bodily injury or damage to property may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with
warning messages using this symbol.
Symbols
The triangle ( ) symbol indicates a warning including danger and caution. The specific point of attention is shown
inside the symbol.
General warning. Warning of risk of electric shock. Warning of high temperature.
indicates a prohibited action. The specific prohibition is shown inside the symbol.
General prohibited action. Disassembly prohibited.
indicates that action is required. The specific action required is shown inside the symbol.
General action required. Remove the power plug from the wall outlet. Always ground the copier.
1. Installation Precautions
WARNING
• Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections to one outlet:
they may cause fire or electric shock. When using an extension cable, always check that it is adequate for
the rated current.
• Connect the ground wire to a suitable grounding point. Not grounding the copier may cause fire or electric
shock. Connecting the earth wire to an object not approved for the purpose may cause explosion or electric
shock. Never connect the ground cable to any of the following: gas pipes, lightning rods, ground cables for
telephone lines and water pipes or faucets not approved by the proper authorities.
CAUTION
• Do not place the copier on an infirm or angled surface: the copier may tip over, causing injury.
• Do not install the copier in a humid or dusty place. This may cause fire or electric shock.
• Do not install the copier near a radiator, heater, other heat source or near flammable material. This may
cause fire.
• Allow sufficient space around the copier to allow the ventilation grills to keep the machine as cool as
possible. Insufficient ventilation may cause heat buildup and poor copying performance.
• Always handle the machine by the correct locations when moving it.
• Always use anti-toppling and locking devices on copiers so equipped. Failure to do this may cause the copier
to move unexpectedly or topple, leading to injury.
• Avoid inhaling toner or developer excessively. Protect the eyes. If toner or developer is accidentally ingested,
drink a lot of water to dilute it in the stomach and obtain medical attention immediately.
If it gets into the eyes, rinse immediately with copious amounts of water and obtain medical attention.
• Advice customers that they must always follow the safety warnings and precautions in the copier’s
instruction handbook.
2. Precautions for Maintenance

WARNING
• Always remove the power plug from the wall outlet before starting machine disassembly.
• Always follow the procedures for maintenance described in the service manual and other related brochures.
• Under no circumstances attempt to bypass or disable safety features including safety mechanisms and
protective circuits.
• Always use parts having the correct specifications.
• Always use the thermostat or thermal fuse specified in the service manual or other related brochure when
replacing them. Using a piece of wire, for example, could lead to fire or other serious accident.
• When the service manual or other serious brochure specifies a distance or gap for installation of a part,
always use the correct scale and measure carefully.
• Always check that the copier is correctly connected to an outlet with a ground connection.
• Check that the power cable covering is free of damage. Check that the power plug is dust-free. If it is dirty,
clean it to remove the risk of fire or electric shock.
• Never attempt to disassemble the optical unit in machines using lasers. Leaking laser light may damage
eyesight.
• Handle the charger sections with care. They are charged to high potentials and may cause electric shock if
handled improperly.
CAUTION
• Wear safe clothing. If wearing loose clothing or accessories such as ties, make sure they are safely secured
so they will not be caught in rotating sections.
• Use utmost caution when working on a powered machine. Keep away from chains and belts.
• Handle the fixing section with care to avoid burns as it can be extremely hot.
• Check that the fixing unit thermistor, heat and press rollers are clean. Dirt on them can cause abnormally
high temperatures.
• Do not remove the ozone filter, if any, from the copier except for routine replacement.
• Do not pull on the AC power cord or connector wires on high-voltage components when removing them;
always hold the plug itself.
• Do not route the power cable where it may be stood on or trapped. If necessary, protect it with a cable cover
or other appropriate item.
• Treat the ends of the wire carefully when installing a new charger wire to avoid electric leaks.
• Remove toner completely from electronic components.
• Run wire harnesses carefully so that wires will not be trapped or damaged.
• After maintenance, always check that all the parts, screws, connectors and wires that were removed, have
been refitted correctly. Special attention should be paid to any forgotten connector, trapped wire and missing
screws.
• Check that all the caution labels that should be present on the machine according to the instruction
handbook are clean and not peeling. Replace with new ones if necessary.
• Handle greases and solvents with care by following the instructions below:
• Use only a small amount of solvent at a time, being careful not to spill. Wipe spills off completely.
• Ventilate the room well while using grease or solvents.
• Allow applied solvents to evaporate completely before refitting the covers or turning the power switch on.
• Always wash hands afterwards.
• Never dispose of toner or toner bottles in fire. Toner may cause sparks when exposed directly to fire in a
furnace, etc.
• Should smoke be seen coming from the copier, remove the power plug from the wall outlet immediately.
3. Miscellaneous
WARNING
• Never attempt to heat the drum or expose it to any organic solvents such as alcohol, other than the specified
refiner; it may generate toxic gas.
• Keep the machine away from flammable liquids, gases, and aerosols. A fire or an electric shock might occur.
2R7/2R8/2R9/2RA/3R6
1 Specifications
1-1 Specifications ........................................................................................................................... 1-1
(1) Common functionCopy Functions ....................................................................................... 1-1
(2) Printer Functions ................................................................................................................. 1-4
(3) Scanner Functions............................................................................................................... 1-4
(4) FAX Functions ..................................................................................................................... 1-5
(5) Document Processor ........................................................................................................... 1-6
(6) Paper Feeder (PF-5110)(Option) ........................................................................................ 1-7
1-2 Part Names............................................................................................................................... 1-7
(1) Machine Exterior.................................................................................................................. 1-7
(2) Connectors/Interior .............................................................................................................. 1-9
(3) With Optional Equipments Attached.................................................................................. 1-10
(4) Operation Pane ................................................................................................................. 1-11
2 Installation
2-1 Environment ............................................................................................................................. 2-1
2-2 Installing the main unit .............................................................................................................. 2-2
(1) Unpacking and checking bundled items .............................................................................. 2-3
(1-1) Main unit..................................................................................................................... 2-3
(1-2) Paper Feeder (Option) ............................................................................................... 2-3
(2) Installing of the optional equipment ..................................................................................... 2-5
(3) Setting up the Toner Container ........................................................................................... 2-6
(4) Connecting to the other device............................................................................................ 2-7
(5) Connecting to the Interface Cable ....................................................................................... 2-7
(5-1) Connecting to LAN Cable........................................................................................... 2-7
(0-1) Connecting USB Cable .............................................................................................. 2-8
3 Machine Design
3-1 Cross-section view ................................................................................................................... 3-1
(1) Main unit + Document processor + Paper feeder (option)................................................... 3-1
3-2 Paper conveying and Paper detection...................................................................................... 3-3
(1) Main unit + Document processor + Paper feeder (option)................................................... 3-3
3-3 Electric parts ............................................................................................................................. 3-4
(1) Wire connection................................................................................................................... 3-4
(1-1) Machine left side ........................................................................................................ 3-4
(1-2) Machine right side ...................................................................................................... 3-5
(1-3) Document processor .................................................................................................. 3-6
(2) Wire connection (option)...................................................................................................... 3-6
(2-1) Paper feeder............................................................................................................... 3-6
(3) Descriptions about the major PWBs.................................................................................... 3-7
(3-1) Main/Engine PWB ...................................................................................................... 3-7
(3-2) High-voltage PWB ...................................................................................................... 3-7
(3-3) Container relay PWB.................................................................................................. 3-8
(3-4) Unit relay PWB ........................................................................................................... 3-8
(3-5) Power source PWB .................................................................................................... 3-8
(3-6) Operation panel PWB................................................................................................. 3-8
(3-7) It consists of the LED indicators, the key switches and buzzer.................................. 3-8
(4) Electric parts layout (standard)............................................................................................ 3-9
(4-1) PWBs ......................................................................................................................... 3-9
(4-2) Sensors and Switches.............................................................................................. 3-12
(4-3) Motors ...................................................................................................................... 3-15
(4-4) Others....................................................................................................................... 3-17
(5) Electric parts layout (option) .............................................................................................. 3-19
2R7/2R8/2R9/2RA/3R6
(5-1) Paper feeder............................................................................................................. 3-19

3-4 Drive system ........................................................................................................................... 3-20
(1) Drive system for the unit.................................................................................................... 3-20
(2) Each section drive ............................................................................................................. 3-21
(2-1) Drum drive................................................................................................................ 3-21
(2-2) Developer drive ........................................................................................................ 3-21
(2-3) Paper feed roller drive .............................................................................................. 3-22
(2-4) Primary transfer drive ............................................................................................... 3-22
(2-5) Fuser roller drive ...................................................................................................... 3-23
(2-6) Eject/Fuser pressure release unit............................................................................. 3-23
(3) Drive location..................................................................................................................... 3-24
(4) Drive unit ........................................................................................................................... 3-25
(4-1) Main drive unit .......................................................................................................... 3-25
(4-2) Eject/Fuser pressure release unit............................................................................. 3-25
3-5 Mechanical construction ......................................................................................................... 3-26
(1) Paper feed and conveying section .................................................................................... 3-26
(1-1) Cassette paper feed and Conveying section............................................................ 3-26
(1-2) MP tray paper feed/ paper conveying section .......................................................... 3-28
(2) Optical section ................................................................................................................... 3-30
(2-1) Image scanner unit................................................................................................... 3-30
(2-2) Laser scanner unit.................................................................................................... 3-33
(3) Developer section.............................................................................................................. 3-35
(3-1) Developer unit .......................................................................................................... 3-35
(4) Drum section ..................................................................................................................... 3-37
(4-1) Charger roller ........................................................................................................... 3-37
(4-2) Cleaning ................................................................................................................... 3-37
(5) Transfer and separation section ........................................................................................ 3-39
(5-1) Primary transfer unit ................................................................................................. 3-39
(5-2) Secondary transfer unit ............................................................................................ 3-41
(6) Fuser section ..................................................................................................................... 3-43
(7) Eject and feedshift section................................................................................................. 3-45
(8) Duplex conveying section.................................................................................................. 3-47
(9) Document processor ......................................................................................................... 3-50
(10) Paper feeder (option)......................................................................................................... 3-52
(10-1) Cassette paper feed section..................................................................................... 3-52
4 Maintenance
4-1 Precautions for the maintenance .............................................................................................. 4-1
(1) Precautions.......................................................................................................................... 4-1
(2) Storage and handling of the drum ....................................................................................... 4-1
(3) Storage of the toner container ............................................................................................. 4-1
(4) Screening of the toner container ......................................................................................... 4-1
4-2 Maintenance parts replacement procedures ............................................................................ 4-3
(1) Cassette paper feed section................................................................................................ 4-3
(1-1) Reattaching and detaching the retard pulley, the pickup pulley
and paper feed roller .................................................................................................. 4-3
(2) MP paper feed portion ......................................................................................................... 4-6
(2-1) Reattaching and detaching the MP paper feeding roller and MP separation pad ...... 4-6
(3) Transfer portion ................................................................................................................. 4-13
(3-1) Reattaching and detaching the primary transfer unit................................................ 4-13
(3-2) Reattaching and detaching the secondary transfer roller unit .................................. 4-17
(4) Drum section ..................................................................................................................... 4-18
(4-1) Reattaching and detaching the drum unit................................................................. 4-18
2R7/2R8/2R9/2RA/3R6
(5) Developer portion .............................................................................................................. 4-22

(5-1) Reattaching and detaching the developer unit ......................................................... 4-22
(6) Fuser section ..................................................................................................................... 4-29
(6-1) Detaching and reattaching the fuser unit.................................................................. 4-29
4-3 Disassembly and Reassembly ............................................................................................... 4-31
(1) Detaching and reattaching the toner container.................................................................. 4-31
(2) Outer covers ...................................................................................................................... 4-32
(2-1) Detaching and reattaching the rear right cover ........................................................ 4-32
(2-2) Detaching and reattaching the right cover/ the right cover lower ............................. 4-32
(2-3) Detaching and reattaching the rear cover left .......................................................... 4-33
(2-4) Detaching and reattaching the fuser wire cover ....................................................... 4-34
(2-5) Detaching and reattaching the front cover left.......................................................... 4-34
(2-6) Detaching and reattaching the rear inner cover left ................................................. 4-35
(2-7) Detaching and reattaching the rear cover ................................................................ 4-36
(2-8) Detaching and reattaching the rear cover bottom .................................................... 4-37
(2-9) Detaching and reattaching the front cover ............................................................... 4-38
(2-10) Detaching and reattaching ISU rear cover/ISU left cover/ISU right cover................ 4-40
(2-11) Detaching and reattaching the top cover.................................................................. 4-41
(3) Optical section ................................................................................................................... 4-45
(3-1) Detaching and reattaching the laser scanner unit (LSU).......................................... 4-45
(3-2) Detaching and reattaching the image scanner unit (ISU)......................................... 4-52
(3-3) Detaching and reattaching the operation panel........................................................ 4-57
(3-4) Detaching and reattaching the ISU top frame .......................................................... 4-59
(3-5) Detaching and reattaching the scanner carriage...................................................... 4-60
(4) Drive section...................................................................................................................... 4-60
(4-1) Detaching and reattaching the main drive unit ......................................................... 4-60
(4-2) Detaching and reattaching the eject/the pressure release unit ................................ 4-71
(4-3) Detaching and reattaching the eject drive unit ......................................................... 4-77
(4-4) Detaching and reattaching the conveying motor ...................................................... 4-92
(4-5) Detaching and reattaching the paper feeder/resist clutch assembly........................ 4-96
(5) Others................................................................................................................................ 4-99
(5-1) Detaching and reattaching the conveying unit ......................................................... 4-99
(5-2) Detaching and reattaching the eject unit ................................................................ 4-101
(5-3) Replacing the language sheet................................................................................ 4-111
(5-4) Fan motor attachment direction.............................................................................. 4-112
(6) PWBs............................................................................................................................... 4-114
(6-1) Detaching and reattaching the main PWB ............................................................. 4-114
(6-2) Detaching and reattaching the high voltage PWB.................................................. 4-122
(6-3) Detaching and reattaching the power supply PWB ................................................ 4-134
(6-4) Detaching and reattaching the container relay PWB.............................................. 4-140
(6-5) Detaching and reattaching the unit relay PWB....................................................... 4-153
(6-6) Detaching and reattaching the operation panel PWB ............................................ 4-159
(6-7) Detaching and reattaching the FAX PWB (FAX model only.) ................................ 4-162
(7) Detaching and reattaching the document processor ....................................................... 4-168
(7-1) Detaching and reattaching the DP pickup pulley,
DP paper feed roller and DP separate pad ............................................................ 4-168
(7-2) Detaching and reattaching the DP front cover ....................................................... 4-171
(7-3) Detaching and reattaching the DP rear cover ........................................................ 4-171
(7-4) Detaching and reattaching the DP main motor ...................................................... 4-172
4-4 Maintenance parts replacement procedures (Option) .......................................................... 4-173
(1) Paper feeder (PF-5110)................................................................................................... 4-173
2R7/2R8/2R9/2RA/3R6
(1-1) Detaching and reattaching the retard pulley, the pickup pulley
and paper feed roller .............................................................................................. 4-173
(1-2) Detaching and reattaching the PF PWB................................................................. 4-175
5 Firmware
5-1 Firmware update....................................................................................................................... 5-1
6 Maintenance mode
6-1 Maintenance mode ................................................................................................................... 6-1
(1) Executing the maintenance mode ....................................................................................... 6-1
(2) Maintenance modes list ...................................................................................................... 6-2
(2-1) Content of the maintenance mode ............................................................................. 6-5
6-2 Service modes ........................................................................................................................ 6-90
(1) Executing the service mode .............................................................................................. 6-91
(1-1) Descriptions of service modes ................................................................................. 6-92
(4) System Error (Fxxxx) Outline .......................................................................................... 7-156
7-1 FAX Related Errors ............................................................................................................. 7-162
(1) FAX Related Errors ........................................................................................................ 7-162
(1-1) C0030: FAX PWB system error.............................................................................. 7-162
(1-2) C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error ..................................................... 7-162
(1-3) C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error.......................................... 7-162
(1-4) C0870: Image data transmission error (FAX PWB - Main/engine PWB) ............... 7-163
(1-5) C0920: FAX file system error ................................................................................. 7-163
(1-6) When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted,
all of it is transmitted as the A4 size data. .............................................................. 7-164
(1-7) FAX cannot be sent................................................................................................ 7-164
(2) Communication Errors..................................................................................................... 7-165
7-2 Send Related Errors ............................................................................................................. 7-188
(1) Send Related Errors ........................................................................................................ 7-188
(1-1) The sending error 2101 does not disappear
even if changing the host name or the security software settings.......................... 7-189
(1-2) Sending error 2203 does not disappear. ................................................................ 7-189
(1-3) Scanned data from the contact glass is automatically sent.................................... 7-189
(2) Sending Errors (Error Codes).......................................................................................... 7-190
(2-1) Scan to E-mail Error Codes.................................................................................... 7-190
(2-2) Scan to FTP Error Codes ....................................................................................... 7-194
(2-3) Scan to SMB Error Codes ...................................................................................... 7-198
7-3 Print Errors ........................................................................................................................... 7-201
(1) The paper loading message appears .............................................................................. 7-202
(2) The data is output with color from Excel, etc. even if the monochrome mode is set....... 7-203
(3) Color tone of the printed photo is different ...................................................................... 7-203
(4) The paper direction is incorrect ....................................................................................... 7-204
(5) Paper is fed from the MP tray.......................................................................................... 7-204
(6) Garbled characters .......................................................................................................... 7-205
(7) Data is output in monochrome......................................................................................... 7-205
(8) Paper is not fed from the MP tray.................................................................................... 7-206
(9) The same data is printed out endlessly ........................................................................... 7-206
(10) PC window shows [Print job error], [Standby] or
[Printer unavailable] is displayed on the printer properties.............................................. 7-206
(11) [Processing] lamp and [Memory] lamp are lit
while the printer standby message is displayed .............................................................. 7-206
(12) Data is not printed out in Sleep mode due to the main unit startup error ........................ 7-207
(13) Print stops after printing several pages (machine lock-up).............................................. 7-207
(14) Print out is not available from the network factor (1) ....................................................... 7-208
2R7/2R8/2R9/2RA/3R6
(21) Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (1) .................................... 7-212
(28) A part of the image is missing ......................................................................................... 7-214
(29) 'Paper Mismatch Error' appears ...................................................................................... 7-214
7-4 Error Messages .................................................................................................................... 7-215
(1) The [Add Paper] message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray................ 7-215
7-5 Abnormal Noise .................................................................................................................... 7-216
(1) Abnormal noise (Basic measures)................................................................................... 7-217
(2) Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying section....................................................... 7-217
(3) Abnormal sound from the developer section ................................................................... 7-217
(4) Abnormal sound from the document processor............................................................... 7-218
(5) Abnormal sound from the eject section ........................................................................... 7-218
(6) The rotation sound of the fan is noisy.............................................................................. 7-218
(7) Abnormal sound from the primary paper feed section..................................................... 7-218
(8) Abnormal sound from the machine front side.................................................................. 7-219
(9) Abnormal sound from the lower side than the fuser eject section ................................... 7-219
(10) Abnormal sound from the upper side of the fuser eject section ...................................... 7-219
(11) Abnormal sound from the fuser section........................................................................... 7-220
(12) Abnormal sound from inside the machine ....................................................................... 7-220
(15) Abnormal sound from inside the machine (jumping sounds)........................................... 7-221
(16) The driving sound is noisy during printing ....................................................................... 7-222
(17) FAX power-up sounds regularly rings from the FAX speaker during the sleep mode.... 7-222
7-6 Malfunction ........................................................................................................................... 7-222
(1) The login fails with other than the ID card ....................................................................... 7-222
(2) The main unit does not operate at all even if the power switch is turned on ................... 7-223
(3) Toner drops over the paper conveying section. .............................................................. 7-223
8 PWBs
8-1 Description for PWB ................................................................................................................. 8-1
(1) Main/Engine PWB ............................................................................................................... 8-1
(2) Container relay PWB ......................................................................................................... 8-10
(3) Unit relay PWB .................................................................................................................. 8-14
(4) High voltage PWB ............................................................................................................. 8-16
(5) Low voltage power supply PWB ........................................................................................ 8-18
(6) Operation panel main PWB ............................................................................................... 8-20
8-2 Description for PWB (OPTION) .............................................................................................. 8-21
(1) PF PWB (PF-5110)............................................................................................................ 8-21
9 Appendixes
9-1 Appendixes ............................................................................................................................... 9-1
(1) Repetitive defects gauge ..................................................................................................... 9-1
(2) Firmware environment commands ...................................................................................... 9-1
2R7/2R8/2R9/2RA/3R6
(3) Chart of image adjustment procedures ............................................................................. 9-10

(4) Wiring diagram .................................................................................................................. 9-13
10-1 Installation Guide .................................................................................................................... 10-1
(1) PF-5110............................................................................................................................. 10-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
1 Specifications
1-1 Specifications
(1) Common functionCopy Functions
Item Description
21 ppm model
Product name ECOSYS MA2100cwfx
ECOSYS MA2100cfx
ECOSYS MA2100cx
Type Desktop
Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser
Paper Weight Cassette 60 to 163 g/m²
Multi Purpose 60 to 220 g/m²

Tray
Paper Type Cassette Plain, Rough, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead,
Thick, High Quality,
Custom 1 to 8 (Duplex: Same as Simplex)
Multi Purpose Plain, Transparency (OHP film), Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled,
Tray Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Coated, Color, Prepunched, Letterhead,
Envelope, Thick, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8
Paper Size Cassette A4, A5-R, A5, B5, A6, B6, Letter, Legal, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Statement-R,
Executive, Oficio II, 16K, B5(ISO),
Custom (105 x 148 to 216 x 356 mm)
Multi Purpose A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5, B6, Letter, Legal, Folio, 216 × 340 mm, Statement-
Tray R, Statement, Executive, Oficio II, 16K, B5(ISO), Envelope #10,
Envelope #9, Envelope #6 3/4, Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL,
Envelope C5, Hagaki (Cardstock), Oufuku Hagaki (Return postcard),
Youkei 4, Youkei 2, Custom (70 × 148 mm to 216 × 356 mm)
Printable Area Print margin for top, bottom and both sides is 4.2 mm.
Warm-up Time Power on 32 seconds or less

(23°C/ 73.4°F,
Sleep 12 seconds or less
60%)
Paper Capac- Cassette 300 sheets (64 g/m²)/250 sheets (80 g/m²)*1
ity
Multi Purpose 55 sheets (64 g/m²)/50 sheets (80 g/m²) :A4/Letter or smaller
Tray
Output Tray Inner tray 150 sheets (80 g/m²)
Capacity
Image Write System Semiconductor laser and electrophotography (a single beam)
Light source 3-color LED light source
Scanning method Flat-face scanning method with the CIS contact image sensor
Photoconductor OPC drum (diameter 24mm)
Charging system Contact charger roller method
1-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Item Description
21 ppm model
Developer system Non-magnetic dual-component developing system
Toner replenishing: Automatic from the toner container
Transfer system Primary: Transfer belt method

Secondary: Transfer roller method
Separation system Diameter separation, separation needle
Cleaning Drum Counter blade

system
Primary trans- Counter blade
fer
Charge erasing system Exposure by cleaning lamp (LED)
Fusing system Heat and pressure fusing with the heat roller and the press roller
Heat source: halogen heater
Abnormally high temperature protection devices: thermostat
Memory 512 MB
Interface USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)

Network interface: 1
(10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
USB Port: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)
Fax: 1
Wireless LAN support
Operating Temperature 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F

Environment
Humidity 10 to 80%
Altitude 3,500 m/11,482 ft maximum
Brightness 1,500 lux maximum
Dimension (W × D × H) 16.42" × 16.89" × 19.49" /417 × 429 × 495 mm
Weight (without toner container) Approx. 57.33 lb/Approx. 26 kg
Space Required (W × D) (Using multi purpose tray) 16.42" × 24.14" /417 × 613 mm
Power Source 230 V Specification Model: 220 to 240 V 50/ 60 Hz 4.5 A
*1 Up to upper limit height line in the cassette.
1-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Item Description
21ppm model
Copy Speed Black and White Copying Full Color Copying
A4 21 sheets/min 21 sheets/min
Letter 22 sheets/min 22 sheets/min
Legal 18 sheets/min 18 sheets/min
B5 22 sheets/min 22 sheets/min
A5-R 22 sheets/min 22 sheets/min
A6 22 sheets/min 22 sheets/min
16K 22 sheets/min 22 sheets/min
First B/W 10 seconds or less

Print Time
Color 12 seconds or less
(A4, place on
the platen,
feed from Cas-
sette)
Zoom Level Manual mode: 25 to 400%,
1% increments
Auto mode: Preset Zoom
Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets
Resolution 600 × 600 dpi, 9600 dpi equivalent × 600 dpi
Supported Original Types Sheet (maximum original

size: Folio/Legal)
Book, 3-dimensional objects
(maximum original size: Folio/
Legal)
Original Feed System Fixed
1-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(2) Printer Functions

Item Description
21 ppm model
Printing Speed Same as Copying Speed.
First Black and 11.0 seconds or less

First Print White
Time
Color 12.5 seconds or less
(A4)
Resolution 9600 dpi equivalent × 600 dpi
1200 dpi × 1200 dpi (Data resolution is 600 dpi.)*1
Operating System Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2012/R2, Windows Server
2016, Windows server 2019, Mac OS 10.9 or later
Interface USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)

Network interface: 1
(10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T)
Wireless LAN support
Page Description Language PRESCRIBE
Emulations PCL6(PCL-XL, PCL5c), KPDL3,PostScript3 compatible, PDF, XPS,

OpenXPS
*1 The processing speed will be slower than normal.
(3) Scanner Functions

Item Description
Resolution 300 × 300 dpi, 200 × 200 dpi, 200 × 100 dpi, 600 × 600 dpi*1, 400 × 400
dpi*1, 200 × 400 dpi*1
File Format TIFF (MMR/JPEG compression), JPEG, PDF (MMR/JPEG compression),

High compressive PDF, XPS, OPEN XPS, Encrypted PDF, PDF/A-1
Scanning Speed*2 (A4, 600 dpi × 600 dpi, Image quality: Text/Photo original)
1-sided B/W 18 Images/min Color 6 Images/min
Interface Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T), USB
Transmission System SMBv3, SMTP, FTP, FTP over SSL, USB, TWAIN*3, WIA*4, WSD
*1 1-side scan and BW binary image duplex scan support

*2 When using the document processor (except TWAIN and WIA scanning)
*3 Available Operating System: Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7/Windows 8/Win-
dows 8.1/Windows 10/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2
*4 Available Operating System: Windows Server 2008/Windows Server 2008 R2/Windows 7/Windows 8/Win-
dows 8.1/Windows Server 2012/Windows Server 2012 R2/Windows 10
1-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(4) FAX Functions

FAX Function
Item Description
Compatibility G3
Communication Line Subscriber telephone line
Transmission Time Less than 3 seconds (33600 bps, JBIG, ITU-T A4-R #1 chart)
Transmission Speed 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200/16800/14400/12000/

9600/7200/4800/2400 bps
Coding Scheme JBIG/MMR/MR/MH
Error Correction ECM
Original Size Max. width: 8 1/2"/216 mm, Max. length: 14 1/32"/356 mm
Automatic Document Feed Max. 50 sheets (with document processor)
Resolution Scan:
200 × 100 dpi Normal (8 dot/mm × 3.85 line/mm)
200 × 200 dpi Fine (8 dot/mm × 7.7 line/mm)
200 × 400 dpi Super (Super Fine) (8 dot/mm × 15.4 line/mm)
400 × 400 dpi Ultra (Ultra Fine) (16 dot/mm × 15.4 line/mm)
Print: 600 dpi
Gradations 256 shades (Error diffusion)
One Touch Key 22 keys
Multi-Station Transmission Max. 100 destinations
Substitute Memory Reception 256 sheets or more (when using ITU-T A4 #1)
Image Memory Capacity 3.5 MB (standard) (For fax transmission and reception)
Report Output Send result report, FAX RX result report, Activity report, Status page
Network FAX Function

Item Description
Hardware IBM PC-AT compatible computer
Interface 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T, Wireless LAN support*1
Operating system Windows XP, Windows Server 2003, Windows Vista, Windows 7,
Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Windows 10, Windows Server 2008/
R2,Windows Server 2012/R2
Transmission Resolution Ultra fine (400 × 400dpi), Fine (200 × 200dpi), Normal (100 × 200dpi)
Document Size Letter, Legal, Statement, A4, A5, Folio, B5(JIS)
FAX Delayed Transmit Based on settings in the Network FAX Driver (setting is possible to any 1
minute increment within the subsequent 24 hour period)
Transmit and Print Fax transmission and print out at the machine is available
Broadcast Transmission Max. 100 destinations
1-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Item Description
Job Accounting Requires the input of a Login User Name and Password in the Network
FAX Driver when User Login, is turn ON in the fax machine.
Requires the input of an Account ID in the Network FAX Driver when Job
Accounting, is turned ON in the fax machine.
Cover Page A format can be selected using the Network FAX Driver or a template can
be created.
*1 Wi-Fi model only

*: FAX Functions: FAX model only
(5) Document Processor

Item Description
Supported Original Types Sheet originals
Paper Size Maximum: Folio/Legal
Minimum: Statement/A6
Paper Weight 50 to 160 g/m²
Loading Capacity 50 sheets (50 to 80 g/m²) maximum*1
*1 Up to upper limit height line in the document processor
1-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(6) Paper Feeder (PF-5110)(Option)

Item Description
Paper Supply Method Friction retard feeder
(No. Sheets: 300, 64 g/m², 1 cassette)
(No. Sheets: 250, 80 g/m², 1 cassette)
Paper Size A4, A5-R, A5, A6, B5, B6, Letter, Legal, Folio, 216 × 340 mm,
Statement-R, Executive, Oficio II, 16K, B5(ISO),
Custom (105 x 148 to 216 x 356 mm)
Supported Paper Paper weight: 60 to 163 g/m²

Media types: Plain, Recycled, Material
Dimensions (W) × (D) × (H) 16.42" × 16.89" × 5.79" 410 × 447.5 × 147 mm
Weight Approx. 8.16 lb/Approx. 3.7 kg
1-2 Part Names

(1) Machine Exterior
12 11 10 13 17
9 16
2
15
3
8
4 7
6 14
1-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
1. Document Processor 10. Original Eject Table

2. Inner Tray 11. Original Tray
3. Eject Stopper
12. Original Width Guides
4. Cassette 1
13. Slit Glass
5. Power Switch
6. Button (Right cover open) 14. Handles
7. USB drive Slot 15. Operation Panel
8. Right Cover 16. Contact glass
9. Original Stopper 17. Original Size Indicator Plates
20
18
19
18. Handles
19. Anti-theft Lock Slot
20. Rear cover 1
1-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(2) Connectors/Interior
1 2
11
10
5
7 8 9
6
1. TEL Connector 7. Paper Width Guides

2. LINE Connector 8. Multi Purpose Tray
3. USB Interface Connector 9. Sub Tray
4. Network Interface Connector 10. MP Paper Width Guides
5. MP Conveying guide 11. Fuser Unit
6. Paper Length Guide
1-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
16
1213 1415
12. Toner Container (Yellow) 15. Toner Container (Black)

13. Toner Container (Cyan) 16. Toner Container Lock Lever
14. Toner Container (Magenta)
(3) With Optional Equipments Attached
1 2
1. Cassette 2
2. Rear cover 2
1-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(4) Operation Pane

Operation Panel Keys
1 19 18 17 16 15 14 13
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
1. [Status/Job Cancel] key: Displays the Status/Job Cancel screen.

2. [Document Box/USB] key: Displays the Document Box/USB screen.
3. [System Menu/Counter] key: Displays the System Menu/Counter screen.
4. [FAX] key*1: Displays the FAX screen.
5. [Send] key: Displays the screen for sending. You can change it to display the Address Book screen.
6. One Touch keys: Recalls the destination registered for One Touch Keys.
7. [Wi-Fi] indicator*2: Blinks during Wi-Fi connection.
8. [Black&White] key: Selects black and white mode.
9. [Full Color] key: Selects full color mode.
10. Select keys: Selects the menu displayed at the bottom of the message display.
11. [Processing] indicator: Blinks while printing or sending/receiving.
12. [Memory] indicator: Blinks while the machine is accessing the machine memory or fax memory.
13. Message display: Displays the setting menu, machine status, and error messages.
14. [Wi-Fi Direct] key*2: Set Wi-Fi Direct, and show information necessary for connection and the connection status.
15. [On Hook] key*1: Switches between on-hook and off-hook when manually sending a FAX.
16. [Confirm/Add Destination] key: Confirms the destination or adds a destination.
17. [Address Recall/Pause] key*3: Calls the previous destination. Also used to enter a pause when entering a FAX num-
ber.
18. [Address Book] key: Displays the Address Book screen.
19. [Copy] key: Displays the Copy screen.
*1: FAX model only.

*2: Only for models with Wi-Fi
*3: The products without the fax function have the [Address Recall] key instead of the [Address Recall/Pause] key.
1-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
20 33 32 31 30
21 22 23, 24 25 26 27 28 29
20. [Function Menu] key: Displays the function menu screen.

21. [Back] key: Returns to the previous display.
22. [Attention] indicator: Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped.
23. Arrow keys: Increments or decrements numbers, or selects menu in the message display. In addition, moves the
cursor when entering the characters.
24. [OK] key: Finalizes a function or menu, and numbers that have been entered.
25. Numeric keys: Enter numbers and symbols.
26. [Stop] key: Cancels or pauses the job in progress.
27. [Start] key: Starts copying and scanning operations and processing for setting operations.
28. [Quiet Mode] key: Lower print and scan speed for quiet processing.
29. [Authentication/Logout] key: Authenticates user switching, and exits the operation for the current user (i.e. log out).
30. [Energy Saver] key: Puts the machine into Sleep Mode. Recovers from Sleep if in Sleep Mode.
31. Program keys: Used to register or recall programs.
32. [Reset] key: Returns settings to their default states.
33. [Clear] key: Clears entered numbers and characters.
1-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
> Overview of Optional Equipment
1 - 3 Overview of Optional Equipment

The following optional equipment is available for the machine.
(1) Expansion Memory
(3) Card Authentica-

tion
(2) PF-5110
Software option
(4) UG-33
(5) SD/SDHC Memory Card
(1)Expansion Memory
The machine can perform the more multiple jobs simultaneously by adding more memories. You can increase the
machine's memory up to 1,536 MB by plugging in the optional memory modules.
Precautions for Handling the Memory Modules
To protect electronic parts, discharge static electricity from your body by touching a water pipe (faucet) or other
largemetal object before handling the memory modules. Or, wear an antistatic wrist strap, if possible, when you install
the memory modules.
Installing the Memory Modules
1 Turn off the machine and disconnect the power cord and interface cable.
1-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
> Overview of Optional Equipment
2 Remove the cover.
3 Remove the memory module from its package.
4 With the memory connection terminal pointing toward the socket, align the cut-out part with
the socket terminal and insert directly in at an angle.
5 Carefully press the inserted memory down and into the machine.
6 Reinstall the covers.

(1)PF-5110 "Paper Feeder"
The paper feeder can be installed in the printer.
(2)Card Authentication Kit(B) "Card Authentication Kit"

User login administration can be performed using ID cards. To do so, it is necessary to register ID card information on
the previously registered local user list.
(3)UG-33 "ThinPrint Option"

This application allows print data to be printed directly without a print driver.
(4)SD/SDHC Memory Card

SD/SDHC memory card is a micro chip card that can save optional fonts, macros, forms.
1-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
2 Installation
2-1 Environment
Installation environment
1. Temperature: 50 to 90.5°F (10 to 32.5°C) (But humidity should be 70% or less when the temperature is 90.5°F
(32.5°C).)
2. Humidity: 10 to 80%(But the temperature should be 86°F (30°C) or less when humidity is 80%.)
3. Power AC220 to 240V 50/60Hz More than 4.5A
4. Frequency fluctuation: 50Hz+/-2% or 60Hz+/-2%
Installation location
The operative environmental conditions are as follows:
Adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality. It is recommended to use the machine as follows:
Humidity: 36 to 65% Temperature: 60.8 to 80.6°F or less (16 to 27°C).
Avoid the following locations when selecting a site for the machine.
Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight
Avoid locations with vibrations
Avoid locations with rapid temperature fluctuations
Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air
Avoid poorly ventilated locations
If the floor is delicate, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be damaged by the casters.
During operation, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one's health.
If, however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an extremely
large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment for copy work, it is
suggested that the room be properly ventilated.
Installation space
400mm
100mm 300mm 500mm 300mm
Figure 2-1
2-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
2-2 Installing the main unit

Installation procedures
START
Unpacking and checking bundled items
Optional unit installation
Setting up the Toner Container
Connecting the Other Dvices Default Setting
Connecting the Interface Cable Installing Software
Loading Paper Output a Maintenance report

(Maintenance mode U000)
Turn the power on

Clearing the counts
(maintenance mode U927)
Exiting from the Maintenance mode
Output a Status report
Completion of installing the main unit
2-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(1) Unpacking and checking bundled items

(1-1) Main unit
Take out the main unit and accessories from the packing case.
Remove the tape and cushioning materials for packing from the main unit.
2 1
7 10
5
3
11
12
4
15
14 13
Figure 2-2
1. Right Upper pad 9. Main unit
2. Left Upper pad 10. Deaeration bag
3. Front pad 11. Buffer sheet
4. Power cord 12. Main pad
5. Accessories box 13. Right bottom pad
6. Modular cable *1 14. Left bottom pad
7. Plastic bag 15. Outer box
8. Drying agent
*1:100V/120V model only

Note: Make sure to install the main unit on a level surface.
(1-2) Paper Feeder (Option)

Take the paper feeder out of the packing case.
2-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Remove the tape for packing from the paper feeder.
1
2
Figure 2-3
1. Paper Feeder 3. Main unit cover 5. Left pad

2. Fixed tape 4. Right pad 6. Outer case
2-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(2) Installing of the optional equipment

Install the necessary optional equipment in the main unit by referring to the installation procedures.
2-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(3) Setting up the Toner Container
1 Remove the right cover (a).
2 Remove the toner set up label.
3 Close the right cover.
2-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(4) Connecting to the other device

Prepare the necessary cable in accordance with the purpose and the environment using the machine unit.
When Connecting to the Machine and PC via USB
MFP
USB
When Connecting to the Machine and PC on the Network
MFP
Network
Network
When using wireless LAN in the model equipping with Wi-Fi function, it is not necessary to connect to the network
cable. It is necessary to change the initial setting of the machine unit in the system menu to use the wireless LAN.
Available cable
Connection Environ- Available Function Necessary Cable

ment
Connect the machine Printer/Scanner/Network FAX*1 LAN cable (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 1000BASE-T)
unit to a network cable.
Connect the machine Printer/Scanner (TWAIN/WIA) USB2.0 compatible cable (Hi-Speed USB compliant,
unit to a USB cable. Max. 5.0 m)
*1 Only on products with the fax function installed.
(5) Connecting to the Interface Cable

(5-1) Connecting to LAN Cable
2-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
1 Connect
1 Connect the LAN cable to the network interface connector.
2 Connect the other end of the cable to the hub.
(0-1) Connecting USB Cable
1 Connect the cable to the machine.

3 Connect the USB cable to the USB interface connector in the left side of the main unit.
4 Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.
(0-1)Connecting the Power Cable
1 Connect the cable

Connect the accessory power code to the main unit, connect the other end of the supplied
power cable to a power outlet.
IMPORTANT
Only use the power cable that comes with the machine.
2-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(1) Paper setting

(1-1)Set the paper in the cassette 1
1 Pull the cassette out of the main unit
2 Adjust the Paper Length Guide of the cassette
In case of using Folio, Oficio, Legal
2-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
1 Adjust the Paper Width Guide of the cassette
2 Set the paper.
IMPORTANT
• Set to face up the printing side.
• Separate the paper taking out of the wrapping paper before setting in the cassette.
• Set not to fold in the paper. Such paper may cause paper jams.
• Set the quantity of the paper less than the maximum paper display,
• If the paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and the paper width guides,
it is caused the skew paper feeding and the paper jam.
3 Insert the cassette slowly and deeply into the main unit.
4 Display the screen.

[System menu / Counter] key > [ ▲ ] [ ▼ ] key > [ common setting ] > [OK] key > [ ▲ ] [ ▼ ]
key > [ original / paper setting ] > [OK] key > [ ▲ ] [ ▼ ] key > Cassette 1 > [OK] key
2-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
5 Set
Select paper size and paper type.
(0-1)Set paper in the cassette 2.
1 Pull the cassette out of the main unit
2 Adjust the Paper Length Guide of the cassette
3 Adjust the Paper Width Guide of the cassette
2-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
4 Set the paper.
IMPORTANT
• Set to face up the printing side.
• Separate the paper taking out of the wrapping paper before setting in the cassette.
• Set not to fold in the paper. Such paper may cause paper jams.
• Set the quantity of the paper less than the maximum paper display,
• If the paper is loaded without adjusting the paper length guide and the paper width guides,
it is caused the skew paper feeding and the paper jam.
5 Insert the cassette slowly and deeply into the main unit.

[System menu / Counter] key > [ ▲ ] [ ▼ ] key > [ common setting ] > [OK] key > [ ▲ ] [ ▼ ]
key > [ original / paper setting ] > [OK] key > [ ▲ ] [ ▼ ] key > Cassette 2 > [OK] key
7 Set
Select paper size and paper type.
2-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(1)Precaution for Handling Paper

Separate in the following procedures the paper taking out of the wrapping paper before setting in the paper feeder
cassette.
Separate the paper, true up the edge of the paper in a flat place.
In addition, note the following.
• In case of the fold or the curl of the paper, stretch in a straight line. If the paper is folded or
curled, they caused the paper jam.
• If paper is left the environment under high humidity after taking the paper out of the
package. Keep sealing the remaining paper in the cassette into the paper storage bag.
Also, keep sealing the remaining paper on the MP tray into the paper storage bag.
• If the machine will not be used for a prolonged period, keep sealing the paper in the paper
storage bag to take it out of the cassette in order to protect it from the humidity.
IMPORTANT
If you use the recycled paper (the printed paper once), make sure to remove a staple needle
and a clip. If a staple and a clip are left, this may cause poor image quality or malfunctions.
NOTE
Refer the following in case of using the paper (preprint) which is printed the punched paper,
the logo, the company name, and the special paper such as the letterhead.
(2)Power-up
1 Turn on the power switch.
2-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(3)Default
Before using this machine, configure such settings as date and time, network configuration, and energy saving functions
as needed.
The default settings of the machine can be changed in System Menu.

With regard to the items which can set in the system menu, refer to the user manual of the machine unit
If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with administrator privileges.
If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user name and login
password, and select [Login].
The factory default login user name and login password are set as shown below.
Login User Name: 2100
Login Password: 2100
(3-1)Setting Date and Time

Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation.
When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the header of
the E-mail message. Set the time difference from date, time and GMT of the region where the machine is used.
Before set date/time, make sure to set the time difference.

The correct time can be periodically set by obtaining the time from the network time server.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲] [▼] key > [common setting] > [OK] key > [▲][▼] key > [Day
and time settings] > [OK] key
2-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
2 Set
[▲] [▼] key > [Time difference] > [OK] key > Select the time difference > [OK] key > [▲] [▼]
key > [Date/Time] > [OK] key > Set day and time > [OK] key > [▲][▼] key > [Date format] >
[OK] key > Select the date format > [OK] key
Item Descriptions
Time Zone Set the time difference from GMT. Choose the nearest region
where you use. If you select a region that utilizes summer time,
configure settings for summer time.
Date/Time Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine.
If you perform Send as E-mail, the date and time set here will be
displayed on the header.
Set Value: Year (2000 to 2037), Month (1 to 12), Day (1 to 31),
Hour (00 to 23), Minute (00 to 59), Second (00 to 59)
Date Format Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is
displayed in Western notation.
Set Value: Month/Day/Year, Day/Month/Year, Year/Month/Day
NOTE
Select [▲] or [▼], and enter the numerical values.?

If you select [◄] or [►] key, the entering position moves left and right and the highlight is
displayed.
(3-2)Network Settings
Set network in the wire

The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP (IPv4),
TCP/IP (IPv6), NetBEUI, and IPSec. It enables network printing on the Windows, Macintosh, UNIX and other platforms.
Set up when you connect to the network via TCP/IP (IPv4).
Make sure to connect the network cable before setting.
With regard to other network settings, refer to the following:
Set TCP/IP(IPv4)

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲][▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲][▼] >
[Networking setting] > [OK] key > [▲][▼] key > [The wired network setting] > [▲][▼] key >
[TCP/IP setting] > [OK] key > [▲][▼] > [IPv4 setting] > [OK] key
2 Set
In case of setting the fixed IP
1 [▲][▼] key > [DHCP] > [OK] key > [▲][▼] key > [Not set] > [OK] key
2 [▲][▼] key > [IP address] > [OK] key
2-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
3 Enter the IP address.
IP address which can be entered is the following,

IP Address: 000 to 255.
Use the numeric keypad, or select [▲] or [▼] key and enter the numerical values.
If you select [◄] or [►] key the entering position moves left and right and the highlight is
displayed.
4 Select [OK] key.
5 [▲][▼] key > [Subnet Mask] > [OK] key
6 Enter Subnet Mask
Subnet Mask which can enter is the following,

Subnet Mask: 000 to 255
If you select [◄] or [►] key the entering position moves left and right and the highlight is
displayed.
7 Select [OK] key.
8 [▲][▼] key > [Default Gateway] > [OK] key
9 Enter the Default Gateway.
Default Gateway which can enter is the following.

Default Gateway: 000 to 255
If you select [◄] or [►] key, the entering position moves left and right and the highlight is
displayed.
10 Select [OK] key.
After changing the setting, restart the network from System Menu, or turn the machine OFF
and then ON.
Ask your network administrator for the IP address in advance, and have it ready when you
configure this setting.
In the following cases, set the IP address of DNS server in using the Command Center RX.
When using the host name in the "DHCP" setting "Off"
When using the DNS server with IP address that is not assigned by DHCP automatically.
With regard to the IP address setting of the DNS server, refer Command Center RX
operating procedures.
Set the Wireless Network

When setting to connect in the model which is equipping with Wi-Fi function, it is possible to print and send in a wireless
network (wireless LAN) environment.
2-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
The configuration methods are as follows:

Configuration Method Descriptions
Configuring the Connection from When setting to connect in the system menu, Use Wi-Fi Settings or Wireless
the Operation Panel on This Network..
Machine
Setting the Connection by Using This is the tool included in the Product Library. You can configure the connection
the Wi-Fi Setup Tool according to the instructions provided by the wizard.
Configuring Connections on the You can be set by Command Center RX.

Web Page
If you switch the network interface except for the wire, switch the appropriate setting value in "Primary Network
(Client)".
If you switch the network interface except for the wire in the model which is equipping with Wi-Fi function, switch the
appropriate setting value in "Primary Network (Client)".
Setting the Connection by Using the Wi-Fi Setup Tool

To send the Wi-Fi settings configured in the Wi-Fi Setup Tool to the machine, connect the computer or handheld device
with the machine locally. There are both wired connection via LAN cable and wireless LAN connection (Wi-Fi Direct) as
the method of local connection.
If you use the Wi-Fi Direct, before connecting the machine unit and the PC in the Wi-Fi Direct, take effect (Select
[Use]) the Wi-Fi Direct on the operation panel, making sure of checking that the network is restarted.
When connecting to the machine unit directly by using the LAN cable, Auto-IP address (Link Local Address) is alloted
both the machine unit and the computer. The machine unit applies to the Auto-IP address as the initial value.
Make sure whether the connecting PC is compatible to WPS or not. Configure the settings on the operation panel if
your computer supports WPS.
Connect to the wire by using the LAN cable.
Connect the machine with a computer

1 When the machine is powered on, connect a computer with the machine unit via the LAN
cable directly.
2 Turn on the computer.

IP address (link local address) of the machine and computer is generated automatically.
1 Insert the DVD.
Installation on Windows must be done by a user logged on with administrator privileges.

If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, click [Cancel].
If the auto playback screen is displayed, click [Execute setup.exe].
If the user account management screen is appeared, click [Yes].
2-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

1 Click [Display View License
Agreement] and read the License
Agreement.
2 Click [Accept].
1 2
3 Select [Maintenance].
4 [Wi-Fi Setup Tool] > [OK]
5 Configure the settings.

3 [Disuse WPS] > [Next] > [Next]
4 [Use LAN cable] > [Next] > [Next]
5 [Easy setup] > [Next]

The machine is detected.
Only one machine can be searched using Wi-Fi Setup Tool. It may take times to search
the machine.
If the machine is not detected, select [Advanced setup] > [Next]. Select [Express] or
[Custom] as device search method and specify the IP address or host name to search
the machine.
6 Select the machine > [Next]
7 [Use the device setting] via [Certification mode] Select [Use the device settings.] on
[Authentication mode], and enter the login user name and password. Login user name and
Password are both Admin.
8 Execute the communication settings > Click [Next]
9 Change the settings of access point as necessary > [Next]

The network is configured.
2-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Connect to the wireless by Using Wi-Fi Direct

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲][▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲][▼] >
[Networking setting] > [OK] key > [▲][▼] key > [Wi-Fi Diret setting] > [OK] key > [▲] [▼] key >
[Wi-Fi Direct] > [OK] key
2 Set
[▲] [▼] key > [Set] > [OK] key
3 Restart the network.

[System Menu/Counter] key > [▲][▼] key > [System/Network] > [OK] key > [▲][▼] key >
[Networking setting] > [OK] key > [▲][▼] key > [The restart of the network] > [OK] key > [Yes]
4 Connect a computer or a portable device with the machine.
5 Insert the DVD.

If the "Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard" dialog box displays, click [Cancel].
If the auto playback screen is displayed, click [Execute setup.exe].
If the user account management screen is appeared, click [Yes].

1 Click [Display View License
Agreement] and read the License
Agreement.
2 Click [Accept].
1 2
2-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
7 Select [Maintenance].
8 [Wi-Fi Setup Tool] > [OK]
9 Configure the settings.

10 [Disuse WPS] > [Next] > [Next]
11 [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Next] > [Next]
12 [Advanced setup] > [Next]

Select [Express] or [Custom] as the detection method of the machine unit. Nominate the IP address
or the host name as the detection method.
13 Select the machine > [Next]
14 [Use the device setting] via [Certification mode] Select [Use the device settings.] on
[Authentication mode], and enter the login user name and password. Login user name and
Password are both Admin.
15 Execute the communication settings > Click [Next]
16 Change the settings of access point as necessary > [Next]

The network is configured.
Set the Wi-Fi Direct

When setting to connect in the model which is equipping with Wi-Fi function, it is possible to print in a Wi-Fi Direct
environment. The configuration methods are as follows:
Set the Connection from the Operation Panel on the Machine

Connecting to Computers or portable Devices that Support Wi-Fi Direct

2 Set
[▲] [▼] key > [Set] > [OK] key

2-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
4 Select the machine unit from a computer or a portable device.

If a confirmation message is appeared on the operation panel of the machine, select [Yes].
The network between this machine and the computer or portable device is configured.
Connecting to Computers or portable Devices Unsupported Wi-Fi Direct

Here, we'll explain the procedures for connecting to iOS handheld devices.

6 Set
[▲] [▼] key > [Set] > [OK] key

8 [Wi-Fi Direct] key > [▲][▼] key > [Advanced setting] > [OK] key
9 Note the network name (SSID), IP address, and password.
10 Set the portable device.
17 [Settings] > [Wi-Fi]
18 Select the network name (SSID) appeared in step 5 from the list.
19 Enter the password that was provided in step 5 > [Connect]

The network between this machine and the computer or handheld device is configured.
Configuring the Connection by Using Push Button

When your computer or portable device does not support Wi-Fi Direct but supports WPS, you can configure the network
using push button.

2 Set
[▲] [▼] key > [Set] > [OK] key

2-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
4 [Wi-Fi Direct] key > [▲][▼] key > [Push button connection] > [OK] key
5 Push a connected PC or the push button of a portable device > [Next]

The network between this machine and the computer or handheld device is configured.
You can connect to three portable devices at the same time using Wi-Fi Direct setting. When the devices that support
Wi-Fi Direct have already been connected, if you want to connect other device, disconnect the network of the already-
connected devices. The disconnection methods are as follows:
Disconnect the network from the computer or handheld computer
Disconnecting all devices from the network on the operation panel
[Wi-Fi Direct] key > [▲][▼] key > [Connect situation] > [OK] key > [Menu] > [▲] [▼] key > [All disconnect]
[OK] key
Configuring auto disconnecting time from the System menu
Set auto disconnecting time from Command Center RX
2-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(1)Altitude Adjustment Setting

Execute [Altitude Adjustment] from the System Menu when setting up at a high altitude. In case of declining the printing
quality in the environment of an altitude 1,000m above sea level, if you set the altitude adjustment mode, you can
recover the printing quality.
1. [System Menu/Counter] key

2. Push [▲] or [▼] key, select [Adjustment/ Maintenance] and push [OK] key.
3. Push [▲] or [▼] key, select [Service setting] and push [OK] key.
4. Push [▲] or [▼] key, select [High Altitude Adjustment] and push [OK] key.
5. Push [▲] or [▼] key, select the either of [Standard], [1,001 to 2,000m], [2,001 to 3,000m], [3,001 to 3,500m], and
push the [OK] key.
*: Standard: Using of altitude 0 to 1,000m

(1-1)Installing Software
Install appropriate software on your PC from the included DVD (Product Library) if you want to use the printer function of
this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or Network FAX transmission from your PC.
2-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Software on DVD (Windows)

the installation method can be selected the either [Express Install] or [Custom Install]. [Express Install] is the standard
installation method. If components that cannot be installed by [Express Install], install [Custom Install].
Software Description Express
Install
KK Driver (KX DRIVER) This driver enables files on a computer to be printed by the ○
machine. Multiple page description languages (PCL XL,
KPDL, etc.) are supported by a single driver. This printer
driver allows you to take full advantage of the features of the
machine.
Use this driver when you create PDF files.
KX XPS printer driver This printer driver supports the XPS (XML Paper -
Specification) format developed by Microsoft Corporation.
(KX XPS DRIVER)
KPDL mini-driver/PCL mini-driver This is a Microsoft MiniDriver that supports PCL and KPDL. -
(PCL/KPDL) There are some restrictions on the machine features and
option features that can be used with this driver.
(KPDL mini-driver/PCL mini-driver)
FAX Driver This makes it possible to send a document created in a -

computer software application as a fax via the machine.
(FAX Driver)
Kyocera WIA Driver This driver enables scanning on the machine using a TWAIN- ○
compliant software application.
(Kyocera TWAIN Driver)
Kyocera WIA Driver WIA (Windows Imaging Acquisition) is a function of Windows -

that enables reciprocal communication between an imaging
(Kyocera WIA Driver)
device such as a scanner and an image processing software
application. An image can be acquired using a WIA-compliant
software application, which is convenient when a TWAIN-
compliant software application is not installed in the computer.
KYOCERA Net Viewer This is a utility that enables monitoring of the machine on the -
network.
Status Monitor This is a utility that monitors the printer status and provides an ○
ongoing reporting function.
This makes it possible to print a - -

PDF file without starting Adobe
Acrobat/Reader.
FONTS These are display fonts that enable the machine's built-in ○
fonts to be used in a software application.
(2)Output an maintenance report (Execution of Maintenance mode U000) (For Service)

1. Input "10871087" using the numeric keys to enter
the maintenance mode.
2. Input "000" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
3. Select [Maintenance] and press the [Start] key to output the status report.
4. Press the [Stop] key.
2-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(3)Clearing the counts (Execution of maintenance mode U927) (For service)

1. Input "927" using the numeric keys and press the
[Start] key.
2. Select [Execute].
3. Press the [Start] key to clear the counter value.
4. Press the [Stop] key.
(4)Release of the maintenance mode (For service)

1. Input "001" using the numeric keys and press the
[Start] key.
*: The maintenance mode is exited.
(5)Output a status report

(5-1)Default
1. Press [System Menu/Counter] key
[System menu/Counter] Key
Figure 2-4
2. Select [Report] and push [OK] key.
System menu/Counter:
Report
Counter
System/NetWork
Exit
Figure 2-5
3. Select [Report Printing] and press [OK] key.
Report:
Report print
Admin Rpt Set.
Result Rpt Set.
Exit
Figure 2-6
2-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
4. Select [status page] and press [OK] key.
Report Print:
Menu Map
Status Page
Font list
Exit
Figure 2-7
5. Press [YES] as the message of "May I print ?" is displayed.
Yes No
Figure 2-8
(6)Installing completion of the main unit
1. Turn the power switch off.
Check that the indicators are off.
IMPORTANT
When the "Processing" indicator or "Memory" indicator is lighting or blinking, the main unit is operating. Turning the
power switch off while the main unit is operating may cause malfunctions.
The confirmation message for power supply off is displayed when you set [Confirmation of Power Off Message].
It takes approximately 3 minutes for power off.
2-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
3 Machine Design
3-1 Cross-section view
(1) Main unit + Document processor + Paper feeder (option)
Figure 3-1
3-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
1. Cassette paper feed and Conveying sec- 7. Primary transfer section

tion 8. Secondary transfer section
2. MP paper feed section 9. Fuser section
3. Image scanner unit 10. Feedshift and eject section
4. Laser scanner unit 11. Duplex conveying section
5. Developer unit 12. Document processor
6. Drum unit 13. Paper feeder (option)
3-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
3-2 Paper conveying and Paper detection

(1) Main unit + Document processor + Paper feeder (option)
Figure 3-2
[Paper jam] [Sensor (Paper conveying)]

14. Paper jam at cassette 1 1. Paper sensor
15. Paper jam at cassette 2 2. MP paper length sensor
16. Paper jam at the MP tray 3. PF paper sensor
17. Paper jam at the document processor 4. Registration sensor
1. Paper jam at the duplex unit 5. Eject sensor
2. Paper jam at rear cover 1 6. DP original sensor
3. Paper jam at ejection 7. DP paper feed sensor
8. DP timing sensor
3-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
3-3 Electric parts

(1) Wire connection
(1-1) Machine left side
Figure 3-3
1. Main/Engine PWB 4. Color developer drive solenoid

2. Power source PWB 5. In-machine fan motor
3. Main motor 6. Scanner motor
3-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(1-2) Machine right side
Figure 3-4
1. Conveying motor 7. Lift solenoid

2. Switchback solenoid 8. Toner solenoid (K)
3. Eject/Duplex clutch 9. Toner solenoid (M)
4. Fuser pressure release clutch 10. Toner solenoid (C)
5. Registration clutch 11. Toner solenoid (Y)
6. Paper feed clutch
3-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(1-3) Document processor
Figure 3-5
1. DP feed motor
2. DP paper feed clutch
(2) Wire connection (option)

(2-1) Paper feeder
Figure 3-6
1. PF PWB 3. PF paper feed clutch

2. PF lift solenoid 4. PF conveying clutch
3-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(3) Descriptions about the major PWBs

(3-1) Main/Engine PWB
It controls the software for interface, image data pro-

cessing, etc. and hardware for the image scanner,
operation unit, high voltage/bias output, paper con-
veying mechanism, etc.
Figure 3-7
(3-2) High-voltage PWB
The drum main charger high voltage, developer bias,

transfer bias, etc. are output.
Figure 3-8
3-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(3-3) Container relay PWB
Toner container relay PWB.
Figure 3-9
(3-4) Unit relay PWB
It consists of the toner container, conveying mecha-

nism, and relay wiring to the main/engine PWB.
Figure 3-10
(3-5) Power source PWB
The input voltage (AC) from the AC power supply is

[100V
changed to DC such as DC24V, and it controls the
fuser heater.
[200V models]
Figure 3-11
(3-6) Operation panel PWB
(3-7) It consists of the LED indicators, the

key switches and buzzer.
Figure 3-12
3-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(4) Electric parts layout (standard)

(4-1) PWBs
Machine left side / Machine inside / Machine right side
Figure 3-13
3-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
1. Main/Engine PWB ................................. It controls the software for the interface and image data processing, and
controls the hardware such as the image scanner unit, operation section,
high voltage/bias output, paper conveying mechanism, etc.
2. Toner container relay............................. It consists of the relay wiring to the toner container, paper conveying mecha-
nism and main/engine PWB.
3. Unit relay PWB...................................... It consists of the relay wiring to the developer unit, drum unit and process
unit thermistor.
4. High-voltage PWB................................. It generates the main charger high voltage, developer bias, transfer bias,
the separation bias, etc.
5. Power source PWB ............................... The input voltage (AC) from the AC power supply is changed to DC such as
DC24V, and it controls the fuser heater.
6. Drum PWB (K) ...................................... It retains the drum unit information.
7. Drum PWB (M)...................................... It retains the drum unit information.
8. Drum PWB (C) ...................................... It retains the drum unit information.
9. Drum PWB (Y) ...................................... It retains the drum unit information.
10. APC PWB.............................................. Emitting and controlling the laser beam.
11. PD PWB ................................................ Controlling the synchronous lateral laser beam.
12. Operation panel PWB ........................... It consists of LCD, LED indicators, key switches and buzzer.
13. Wi-Fi PWB *1 ........................................ It communicates wireless data.
14. FAX PWB *2.......................................... Modulate/demodulate image data
*1: Wi-Fi model only, *2: FAX model only.
Part name table
No. Name used in service manual Name used in parts list Part. No.
1 Main/Engine PWB PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY SP 30C0C9401_
PARTS PWB MAIN ASSY SP EU 30C0C9402_
2 Container relay PWB PARTS PWB CONTAINER CONNECT 302R79421_
ASSY SP
3 Unit relay PWB PARTS PWB UNIT CONNECT ASSY 302R79424_
SP
4 High-voltage PWB PARTS UNIT HIGH VOLTAGE SP 302R79431_
5 Power source PWB PPARTS UNIT LOW VOLTAGE 230V 302R79453_

SP
6 Drum PWB (K) – –
(DK-5430) (30C0A9301_)
7 Drum PWB (M) – –
8 Drum PWB (C) (DK-5431) (30C0A9302_)
9 Drum PWB (Y)
10 APC PWB – –
11 PD PWB (LK-5230) (302R79311_)
13 Operation panel PWB *2 PARTS PWB M PANEL ASSY SP 302R99402_

(PARTS OPERATION ASSY CN SP) (302RA9401_)*2
(302R99407_)*1,*2
(302WN9402_)
3-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
16 Wi-Fi PWB *1 PARTS WIFI MODULE SP 302RH9408_
(PARTS WIFI UNIT CN SP) (302R79446_)
17 FAX PWB *2 PARTS FAX UNIT E SP 303PA9401_
3-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(4-2) Sensors and Switches

Documnet Processor
20
Fuser unit 1
5
6
Laser scanner unit

Primary Transfer unit
Image Scanner unit
Main unit
Drum unit
15
13
3
12
2
18
Developer unit
16
8 14
9 17
10
11
1. Home position sensor ........................... Detecting the position of the image scanner unit.
3-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
2. Paper sensor......................................... Detecting the presence of paper on the cassette.

3. Registration sensor ............................... Controlling the timing to start the secondary paper feeding.
4. Press-release sensor ............................ Detecting the mode of the fuser pressure.
5. Eject sensor .......................................... Detecting the paper jam at the fuser section.
6. Fuser thermistor 1 (Edge) ..................... Detecting the heat roller temperature (Edge).
7. LSU thermistor ...................................... Detecting the LSU temperature.
8. T/C sensor (K)....................................... It detects the toner density in the developer unit (Black).
9. T/C sensor (M) ...................................... It detects the toner density in the developer unit (Magenta).
10. T/C sensor (C)....................................... It detects the toner density in the developer unit (Cyan).
11. T/C sensor (Y)....................................... It detects the toner density in the developer unit (Yellow).
12. ID sensor (R)......................................... Measuring the toner density at the calibration.
13. ID sensor (L) ......................................... Measuring the toner density at the calibration.
14. MP paper sensor................................... Detecting the presence of paper on the MP tray.
15. Interlock switch...................................... Shutting off the 24V power supply line when the rear cover is opened.
16. Right cover switch ................................. Right cover open detection and toner container detection
17. Power switch ......................................... Turning on and off the main/engine PWB, the engine relay PWB and the
operation panel PWB, etc.
18. Temperature sensor (outside) ............... Detecting the temperature outside the main unit.
19. CIS ........................................................ Scanning the front side original data.
Conveying cover switchPart name table
1 Home position sensor PARTS SENSER OPT.SP 302P79401_
2 Paper sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
3 Registration sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
4 Fuser pressure release sensor - –
5 Eject sensor (FK-5240) (302R99308_)
6 Fuser thermistor 1 (edge)
7 LSU thermistor - -
(LK-5230) (302R79311_)
8 T/C sensor (K) - -
(DV-5430(K)) (30C0A9303_)
9 T/C sensor (M) - -
(DV-5430(M)) (30C0A9305_)
10 T/C sensor (C) - -
(DV-5430(C)) (30C0A9306_)
11 T/C sensor (Y) - -
(DV-5430(Y)) (30C0A9305_)
12 ID sensor (R) PART PWB ID SENSOR ASSY SP 302R79420_
13 ID sensor (L)
14 MP paper length sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P79401_
15 Interlock switch INTER LOCK SWITCH 2FB2716_
16 Right cover switch SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
17 Power switch PARTS PWB SWITCH ASSY SP 302R79426_
18 Temperature sensor (outside) PARTS PWB ASSY THERMISTOR SP 302M29413_
3-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
19 CIS PARTS SENSOR A4 CIS SP 302R79432_
3-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(4-3) Motors
Documnet Processor
Fuser unit 3
Laser scanner unit

Primary Transfer unit
5 Image Scanner unit
4
7
Main unit
Drum unit
1
6
Developer unit
1. Conveying motor ................................... Drive for the paper feed, toner supply and waste toner disposal mechanism
3-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
2. Main motor (Drum/Developer)............... Drive for the drum unit / developer unit.
3. Scanner motor....................................... Drive for the optical section.
4. Polygon motor ....................................... Drive for polygon mirror.
5. LSU cleaning motor............................... Drive for the LSU glass cleaning mechanism.
6. DP feed motor ....................................... Drive for the DP paper conveying mechanism
7. In-machine fan motor ............................ In-machine cooling
8. Eject fan motor ...................................... Cooling the eject section
Part name table
1 Conveying motor PARTS MOTOR-BL W30 SP 302K99433_
2 Main motor (Drum/Developer) PARTS MOTOR-BL W40 SP 302LC9428_

(DR-5230) (302R79315_)
3 Scanner motor PARTS MOTOR ISU SP 302R79438_
4 Polygon motor - -
5 LSU cleaning motor (LK-5230) (302R79311_)
6 In-machine fan motor PARTS FAN MOTOR SP 302NG9422_
7 Eject fan motor FAN MOTOR 302HN4421_
3-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(4-4) Others
1. Lift solenoid ........................................... Controlling the cassette bottom plate

2. Switchback solenoid.............................. Eject roller rotation direction switching
3-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
3. Color developer drive solenoid.............. Developer roller position switching

4. MP paper feed solenoid ........................ Controlling the MP bottom plate
5. Toner solenoid (K) ................................. Toner supply operation control (K)
6. Toner solenoid (M) ................................ Toner supply operation control (M)
7. Toner solenoid (C)................................. Toner supply operation control (C)
8. Toner solenoid (Y) ................................. Toner supply operation control (Y)
9. Registration clutch................................. Registration roller drive control
10. Fuser pressure release clutch............... Fuser pressure release control
11. Paper feed clutch .................................. Paper feed section drive control
12. Eject/Duplex clutch................................ Eject/Duplex roller drive control
13. DP paper feed clutch............................. Document processor conveying drive control
14. Fuser heater.......................................... Heating the heat roller
15. Speaker*1 ............................................. FAX speaker sound and FAX monitor sound generation
16. Eraser.................................................... Removing the remaining electric charge on the drum.
Part name table
1 Lift solenoid SOLENOID TONER 302GR4415_
2 Switchback solenoid SOLENOID FD ASSY SP 302HN9414_

(PARTS GUIDE EXIT R ASSY SP) (302R79416_)
3 Color developer drive solenoid SOLENOID MPF 302HN4416_
(DR-5230) (302R79315_)
4 MP paper feed solenoid SOLENOID TONER 302GR4415_
(PARTS FRAME MFP ASSY SP) (302R79408_)
5 Toner solenoid (K) SOLENOID MPF 302HN4416_
6 Toner solenoid (M) SOLENOID MPF 302HN4416_
7 Toner solenoid (C) SOLENOID MPF 302HN4416_
8 Toner solenoid (Y) SOLENOID MPF 302HN4416_
9 Registration clutch PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SP 302NR9401_
10 Fuser pressure release clutch - -

(PARTS DRIVE EXIT PRESS ASSY SP) (302R79408_)
11 Paper feed clutch PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SP 302NR9401_
12 Eject/Duplex clutch - -
(PARTS DRIVE EXIT PRESS ASSY SP) (302R79408_)
13 DP paper feed clutch PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SP 302NR9401_
14 Fuser heater - -
(FK-5240) (302R99308_)
15 SPEKER*1 PARTS SPEAKER SP 302R74508_
16 Eraser PARTS PWB ERASER ASSY SP 302R79423_
*1: FAX model only.
3-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(5) Electric parts layout (option)

(5-1) Paper feeder
Figure 3-14
1. PF PWB ................................................ Controlling the electric parts in the PF.

2. PF paper sensor.................................... Detecting the presence of paper on the PF.
3. PF rear cover switch ............................. Detecting the PF rear cover open/close.
4. PF Lift solenoid ..................................... Controlling the PF bottom plate
5. PF paper feed clutch ............................. Driving the PF paper feed mechanism
6. PF conveying clutch .............................. Driving the PF paper conveying mechanism
Part name table
1 PF PWB PARTS PWB PWB PF ASSY SP 303R69401_
2 PF paper sensor PARTS SENSOR OPT. SP 302P794010
3 PF cover switch SW.PUSH 7SP01000004+H01
4 PF lift solenoid SOLENOID TONER 302GR4415_
5 PF paper feed clutch PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SP 302NR9401_
6 PF conveying clutch PARTS CLUTCH 35 Z35R SP 302NR9401_
3-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
3-4 Drive system

(1) Drive system for the unit
Figure 3-15
[Eject/Fuser pressure release unit (blue letters)] 2. Paper feed clutch

3. Fuser pressure release clutch
1. Conveying motor 4. Eject/Duplex clutch
1. Registration clutch
1. Paper feed roller 7. Eject roller

2. MP paper feed roller 8. Feedshift roller
3. MP conveying roller 9. Duplex conveying roller
4. registration roller 10. Primary transfer belt drive roller
5. Secondary transfer roller [Main drive unit (Red letters)]
6. Fuser heat roller
1. Main motor
1. Drum (Black) 4. Drum (Yellow)

2. Drum (Magenta) 5. Developer roller (Black)
3. Drum (Cyan) 6. Developer roller (Magenta)
3-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(2) Each section drive

(2-1) Drum drive
Figure 3-16
A.Main motor
a.Drum joint (Yellow)
(2-2) Developer drive

B
a b c d
Figure 3-17
A.Main motor
B.Color developer drive solenoid
a.Developer joint (Yellow)
3-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(2-3) Paper feed roller drive
A.Conveying motor
B.Paper feed clutch
a.Paper feed roller
Figure 3-18
(2-4) Primary transfer drive
A.Conveying motor
a.Belt drive roller
Figure 3-19
3-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(2-5) Fuser roller drive
A.Conveying motor
a.Fuser unit joint
Figure 3-20
(2-6) Eject/Fuser pressure release unit
A.Conveying motor
B.Eject/Duplex clutch
C.Fuser pressure release clutch
a.Feedshift roller
b.Eject roller
Figure 3-21
3-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(3) Drive location

Machine left side
Machine right side
Figure 3-22
A:Main drive unit 5. Conveying motor
1. Main motor
2. Color developer drive solenoid C:Paper feed/ Registration clutch assy
B:Eject/Fuser pressure release unit 6. Paper feed clutch
3. Fuser pressure release clutch 7. Registration clutch
4. Eject/Duplex clutch
3-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(4) Drive unit

(4-1) Main drive unit
Figure 3-23
(4-2) Eject/Fuser pressure release unit
Figure 3-24
3-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
3-5 Mechanical construction

(1) Paper feed and conveying section
The paper feed and conveying section consists of the cassette paper feed section and the MP tray paper feed sec-
tion, and the paper conveying section conveying the fed paper to the transfer and separate section.
(1-1) Cassette paper feed and Conveying section

The cassette can load 300 sheets paper (64g/m2) or 250 sheets paper (80g/m2). The cassette forwards paper by
rotating the pickup roller and conveys it to the paper conveying section by rotating the paper feed roller. Multi-feeding
is also prevented by the effect of the retard roller.
The paper conveying section conveys paper to the transfer and separation section. The fed paper is conveyed to
where it turns the registration sensor on by the paper feed roller, and then, conveyed to the transfer and separation
section by the registration rollers.
Components parts
1. Pickup roller
2. Paper feed roller
3. Retard roller
4. Cassette bottom plate
5. Friction pad
6. Paper width guides
7. Paper length guide
8. Middle pulley
9. Rear registration roller
10. Front registration roller
11. Actuator
(PF paper sensor)
12. Actuator
(registration sensor)
13. Cassette base
Figure 3-25
Figure 3-26
3-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Block diagram
Figure 3-27
3-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(1-2) MP tray paper feed/ paper conveying section

The MP tray can load 50 sheets paper (80 g/m2). The paper on the MP tray is fed by rotating the MP paper feed roller
while lifting up the MP bottom plate by the MP solenoid. Multi-feeding is also prevented by the effect of the MP sepa-
ration pad.
The paper conveying section conveys paper to the transfer and separation section. The fed paper is conveyed to
where it turns the registration sensor on by the MP paper feed roller, and then, conveyed to the transfer and separa-
tion section by the registration rollers.
Components parts
1. MP paper feed roller
2. MP separation pad
3. MP friction plate
4. MP bottom plate
5. MP paper width guides
6. MP cover
7. MP conveying roller A
8. MP conveying pulley A
9. MP actuator
(MP paper sensor)
10. MP conveying roller B
11. MP conveying pulley B
12. MP conveying guide
Figure 3-28
Figure 3-29
3-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Block diagram
Figure 3-30
3-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(2) Optical section

The optical section consists of the image scanner section for scanning the original and the laser scanner section to
write the image.
(2-1) Image scanner unit

The original image is exposed by the exposure lamp (LED) and the reflection light is scanned by the CIS image sen-
sor and converted to the electric signal.
When using the document processor, the image scanner unit stops at the original scanning position (slit glass) and
scans the image from the original conveyed in the document processor.
Components parts
1. CIS
2. Scanner carriage
3. Slit glass
4. Contact glass
5. ISU top flame
6. Scanner motor
7. Scanner drive belt
8. ISU bottom flame
9. Operation section
Figure 3-31
3-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Figure 3-32
3-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Block diagram
Figure 3-33
3-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(2-2) Laser scanner unit

The charged drum surface is scanned by the laser emitted from the laser scanner units. The laser reflects to the poly-
gon mirrors by rotating the polygon motor so that the laser scans horizontally to the image. The laser scanner unit
has some lenses and mirrors, that adjust the diameter of the laser to focus the laser to the drum surface. Also, the
LSU cleaning motor operates to automatically clean the LSU glass.
Components parts
1. Polygon motor
2. fθ lens
3. Mirror
4. LSU glass
5. Laser scanner frame
6. Cleaning shaft
7. Cleaning holder
8. Collimate lens
9. Cylindrical lens
Figure 3-34
Figure 3-35
3-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Block diagram
Figure 3-36
3-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(3) Developer section

(3-1) Developer unit
The developer section consists of the developer roller forming the magnetic brush, the developer blade forming the
thin layer by replacing the toner, and the developer screw mixing up the toner. The toner density is adjusted by
impressing the bias to the developer roller. The toner amount inside the developer unit is detected by the T/C sensor.
Components parts
1. Developer roller
2. Developer blade
3. Developer screw A
4. Developer screw B
5. T/C sensor
6. Developer case
7. Developer shutter
Figure 3-37
Figure 3-38
3-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Block diagram
Figure 3-39
3-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(4) Drum section

The drum section consists of the drum, the charger roller unit, and the cleaning blade. The drum surface is evenly
charged to prepare forming the electrical latent image by emitting the laser.
(4-1) Charger roller

The charged roller with the electric charge contacts the drum surface and rotates to charge the drum evenly.
(4-2) Cleaning
The remaining toner on the drum surface after transferring is removed by the cleaning blade, and collected to the
waste toner box by the drum screw. The eraser consists of the LED lamp, and it removes the remaining electric
charge on the drum before the main charge.
Components parts
1. Drum
2. Charger roller
3. Drum screw
4. Cleaning blade
5. Eraser light guide
6. Primary transfer belt
7. Drum unit frame
Figure 3-40
Figure 3-41
3-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Block diagram
Figure 3-42
3-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(5) Transfer and separation section

(5-1) Primary transfer unit
The primary transfer section consists of the transfer cleaning unit, the transfer belt and four primary transfer rollers
facing each drum. When printing the color image, the toner image with a single color formed on each drum is repeatedly
transferred on the transfer belt by impressing the bias to the primary transfer rollers facing each drum, and then the full
color toner image is formed. Also, the ID sensor attached to the main unit measures the toner density on the transfer
belt.
The transfer cleaning unit collects the remaining toner on the transfer belt after the secondary transferring, and forwards
it to the waste toner box as waste toner.
Components parts
2. Belt tension roller
3. Belt drive roller
4. Backup roller
5. Primary transfer roller
6. Cleaning screw
7. Cleaning blade
8. Drum
Figure 3-43
Figure 3-44
3-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Block diagram
Figure 3-45
3-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(5-2) Secondary transfer unit

The secondary transfer roller section consists of the secondary transfer roller attached to the paper conveying unit, and
the separation brush. The secondary transfer roller is grounded and transfers the toner image formed on the primary
transfer belt to paper by the electric potential difference with the primary transfer belt. Next, the paper is separated as
the curvature separation and is discharged by the grounded separation needles.
Components parts
1. Secondary transfer roller
2. Separation brush
3. Transfer front guide
4. Belt drive roller
Figure 3-46
Figure 3-47
3-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Block diagram
Figure 3-48
3-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(6) Fuser section

The paper from the transfer and separation section is pinched between the heat roller and the press roller. The heat
roller is heated by the fuser heater, and the paper is pressed by the press roller with the pressure added by the pres-
sure spring toward the heat roller, so toner is fused on the paper by that heat and pressure.
The surface temperature of the heat roller is detected by the fuser thermistor and controlled by the Engine PWB. If
the fuser section has abnormal temperature, the power supply line is shut off by switching the fuser thermostat and
the fuser heater is turned off forcedly.
Components parts
1. Fuser heater
2. Fuser heat roller
3. Fuser press roller
4. Fuser separator
5. Fuser thermistor
6. Fuser thermostat
7. Fuser front guide
8. Actuator
(Eject sensor)
9. Feedshift pulley A
10. Feedshift roller
Figure 3-49
3-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Figure 3-50
Block diagram
Figure 3-51
3-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(7) Eject and feedshift section

The eject and feedshift section consists of the paper path from the fuser section to the inner tray or the duplex con-
veying section.
Components parts 6 1 2 3 4
1. Feedshift pulley A
2. Feedshift roller
3. Feedshift pulley B
4. Feedshift guide
5. Actuator
(Eject sensor)
6. Eject roller
7. Eject pulley
8. Eject tray
9
7 5
Figure 3-52
2
3
4
7
6
Figure 3-53
3-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Block diagram
Figure 3-54
3-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(8) Duplex conveying section

The duplex conveying section consists of the paper conveying path to forward the paper from the eject and feedshift
section in the duplex print to the paper conveying section.
Components parts
1. DU conveying roller
2. DU conveying pulley
3. DU conveying guide
4. Rear registration roller
5. Front registration roller
6. Actuator
(Registration sensor)
7. Actuator
(Eject sensor)
8. Feedshift roller
9. Feedshift guide
Figure 3-55
3-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Figure 3-56
3-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Block diagram
Figure 3-57
3-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(9) Document processor

The original feed section consisting of the parts in the figure, feeds and conveys the original on the original tray to the
original conveying section by the rotation of the DP forwarding pulley and DP feed roller.
The 2nd side of the conveyed original is scanned *1 when passing the CIS and the 1st side at the optical section (CIS)
in the main unit when passing the DP slit glass. The original already scanned is ejected to the original eject tray by the
eject roller.
Figure 3-58
Components parts 8. DP actuator *1 15. DP actuator

1. DP pickup pulley (DP backside original timing (DP original timing sensor)
2. DP feed roller sensor) 16. DP scanning guide
3. DP pickup holder 9. DP CIS contact glass 17. DP eject roller
4. DP friction pad 10. DPCIS *1 18. DP eject pulley
5. DP separation pad 11. DP conveying roller B 19. DP original width guide
6. DP actuator 12. DP conveying pulley B 20. DP original tray
(DP original sensor ) 13. DP conveying roller C 21. DP eject tray
7. DP actuator 14. DP conveying pulley C
(DP paper feed sensor)
Figure 3-59
3-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Block diagram
Figure 3-60
3-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(10)Paper feeder (option)

(10-1) Cassette paper feed section
The cassette can load 300 sheets paper (64g/m2) or 250 sheets paper (80g/m2). Paper fed from the cassette is
picked up by the rotation of the pickup roller and is conveyed to the main unit by the rotation of the paper feed roller
and conveying roller. Multi-feeding is also prevented by the effect of the retard roller.
Components parts
1. PF paper feed roller
2. PF pickup roller
3. PF pickup holder
4. PF retard roller
5. PF conveying roller
6. PF conveying pulley
7. PF cassette bottom plate
8. PF friction pad
9. PF paper width guides
10. PF actuator
(PF paper sensor)
11. PF paper length guide
12. PF cassette base
Figure 3-61
Figure 3-62
3-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Block diagram
Figure 3-63
3-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
4 Maintenance
4-1 Precautions for the maintenance
(1) Precautions
When disassembling the main unit, press the main power switch and then turn the power off. Make sure that the power
lamp on the operation panel is off and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. Then, start the disassembly.
When handling the PWBs (printed wiring boards), do not touch parts with bare hands. Take care not to damage the
PWB.
If ICs are mounted on the PWB, do not touch them by hand or something that is charged with static electricity.
Make sure to release the hook and disconnect the connector when disconnecting the connector with the hook.
Take care not to put in the wire during the operation.
Use the original screws when reassembling the parts which you disassembled once.
If the types and the sizes of the screws are not sure, refer to the parts list.
(2) Storage and handling of the drum

Take care the following points when handling and storing the drum.
When detaching the drum unit from the main machine unit, take care that the drum surface is not exposed extremely
strong light such as direct sunlight.
Store in the place of ambient temperature of -20 to 40 degree C(–4°F to 104°F) and ambient humidity of 85% RH or less.
Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on. Avoid storing the drum unit in the place where the temperature
and humidity may suddenly change even if these changes are within the tolerable range.
Avoid exposure to any substance which is harmful or may affect the quality of the drum.
Do not touch the drum surface with any object.
Make sure not to touch the drum surface with bare hands or gloves.
If the drum is touched by hands or stained with oil, clean it.
(3) Storage of the toner container

Store the toner container in a cool and dark place.
Do not place the toner container under direct sunshine or in a damp environment.
(4) Screening of the toner container

Look at the screening film on the brand protection seal affixed to the toner container through the windows of the
validation viewer.
Look at the screening film through two windows to check the genuineness.
The forgery prevention film portion is " Black color" when seen through the left window ( mark).
The forgery prevention film portion is " Gold color(gloss) " when seen through the right window ( mark).
When seen as the above, it is genuine. Otherwise (e.g. both seen in gold), it is a counterfeit.
4-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
See through the left window See through the right window
( marking) ( marking)
Validation viewer Validation viewer
Brand Brand
protection protection
seal seal
A black-colored band when A shiny or gold-colored band when

seen through the left side window seen through the right side window
Figure 4-1
The forgery prevention film portion is slit in three places as the below chart, and it can not reuse.
Three cut parts at the red circle section
Figure 4-2
4-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
4-2 Maintenance parts replacement procedures

As the machine unit is maintenance-free, there is not the setting of the maintenance parts.
When the parts replacement is necessary in a malfunction, replace the maintenance kit in the following procedures,
execute maintenance mode U251, and then reset the count.
(1) Cassette paper feed section

(1-1) Reattaching and detaching the retard pulley, the pickup pulley and paper feed roller
Procedures
1. Open the rear cover (a).
2. After lifting the retard guide cover (c) in the direction
of the arrow, detach along the guide (b).
Figure 4-3
3. After lifting to release the shaft (b) of the retard

guide, remove the retard guide (a) in the direction of
the arrow.
Figure 4-4
4-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
4. Tilt the middle guide (a) toward you.
Figure 4-5
5. After pushing down the lock portion (b) of paper

feeding holder, slide in the direction of the arrow.
6. Twisting paper feeding holder (a), remove in the
direction of the arrow.
7. Check, clean or replace the retard pulley, the pickup
pulley and paper feed roller
8. Reattach the parts in the original position.
Figure 4-6
4-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Notes when attaching

*: When attaching the paper feed holder (a), insert the
protrusion (b) into adjusting the guide (c) of the main
unit.
*: When the coupling can not be inserted, insert turn-

ing the gear.
Figure 4-7
IMPORTANT
When replacing the new pickup holder or retard holder, take care not to touch on the roller surface.
Scan the code the below for the paper feed related replacement video.
https://sm-movie.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com/eng2/detail/videos/ma2100cwfx-pa2100cwx-series-service-manual-
support-movie/video/6284802419001/ma-2100cwfx-series-paper-feed-related-replacement?page=1
4-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(2) MP paper feed portion

(2-1) Reattaching and detaching the MP paper feeding roller and MP separation pad
Procedures
1. Pull the cassette (a) out of the main unit (b) in the
direction of the arrow, and detach it.
Figure 4-8

3. After coming near releasing the rear cover left (b) in
the direction of the arrow, releasing two protrusions
(c), and remove it.
Figure 4-9
4-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
4. Remove one screw (a)(M3x8TP).

5. After sliding the front cover left (b) in the direction of
arrow and release four hooks (c), and detach it.
Figure 4-10
6. Open the right cover (a).

7. Open the MP tray (c).
8. Detach two screws (b)(M3x8).
Figure 4-11
4-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
9. Lifting two top of both ends (b) of the front cover,

open the front cover (a).
*: After executing the step 24, it is possible to reattach

and detach the MP paper feeding roller.
Figure 4-12
10. Remove two fixed strap portion (a) of the front cover
by using the pliers.
Figure 4-13
4-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
11. Twisting the fulcrum of the front cover, detach in (c)

(b) order.
12. Detach the front cover (a) in the direction of the
arrow.
Figure 4-14
13. Holding the handle (b) of MPF guide (a), and then
pull it down.
Figure 4-15
4-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
14. Disconnect two connectors (a) and detach the wire

from the holder.
15. Detach two screws (b) (M3×8P tight).
16. Detach MPF unit (c) in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 4-16
17. Turn over the MPF unit (a).

18. Release the hook (c) and detach the MP solenoid
(b).
Figure 4-17
4-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
19. Release the cable from the hook (g).

20. Release two hooks (e) of MP drive cover (b) by
using a flat-head screwdriver, and detach from the
MPF unit (a).
21. Detach four drive gears (c) and MP lift cam (d).
Figure 4-18
22. Detach two screws (c) (M3×8P tight) of the MPF

unit.
23. Turn over the MPF unit (b) and detach it.
Figure 4-19
4-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
24. Release the lock portion (b) of the frame on the MP

and slide the MP paper feeding shaft (c).
Slide MP paper feeding pulley (d) in the direction of
the shaft, detach in the direction of the arrow from
the frame (d) on the MP.
Figure 4-20
25. Detach the MP lift plate (b) from the frame under the
MP.
26. The MP separation pad (c) turn places two hooks
(d) as a fulcrum, and detach it in the direction of the
arrow.
27. Check MP paper feeding roller and MP separation
pad, clean or replace it.
IMPORTANT
When replacing the new MP paper feeding roller or MP
separation pad, take care not to touch the roller surface.
Figure 4-21
4-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(3) Transfer portion

(3-1) Reattaching and detaching the primary transfer unit
Procedures
2. Push up the container lock lever, release the lock.
3. Pull the container, and detach it.
4. In a similar way detach the container of each color
in following procedures.
Figure 4-22

Figure 4-23
4-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
7. Open the MP tray (a).

Figure 4-24

Figure 4-25
4-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
10. Detach two screws (a)(M3x8).
Figure 4-26
11. Disconnect the connector (a).

12. Pull the drive release lever (b).
13. Draw the process unit (c).
IMPORTANT
In case of drawing, take care not to hit against the front
cover.
Figure 4-27
4-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
14. Detach the primary transfer unit (a) from the pro-
cess unit frame (b) in the upper direction.
15. Check the primary transfer unit (a) and clean or
replace it.
IMPORTANT
In case of drawing, take care not to have the transfer belt,
put on a flat place.
Figure 4-28
After replacing the primary transfer unit, execute the following setting.
1. Clearing the transfer counts. (Execution of maintenance mode U127): Clear
2. Set the ID corrective operation.
: [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Calibration]
3. Adjust the color printing position.
: [System Menu/Counter] key > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Color Registration] > [Auto]
Scan the code the below for the primary transfer replacement video.
support-movie/video/6284802799001/ma-2100cwfx-series-primary-transfer-unit-replacement
4-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(3-2) Reattaching and detaching the secondary transfer roller unit

Procedures
2. Release the front and rear hook portion of the sec-
ondary transfer unit(b) by using a flat-head screw-
driver (c).
3. Rotating the secondary transfer unit (b) in the direc-
tion of the arrow, detach in upper direction.
4. Check the secondary transfer unit (b) and clean or
replace it.
Figure 4-29
After replacing the secondary transfer unit, execute the following setting.
Scan the code the below for the secondary transfer replacement video.
support-movie/video/6284802640001/ma-2100cwfx-series-secondary-transfer-unit-replacement?page=1
4-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(4) Drum section

(4-1) Reattaching and detaching the drum unit
Procedures
Figure 4-30

Figure 4-31
4-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-32

Figure 4-33
4-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
10. Disconnect one connector (b).

11. Detach two screws (c)(M3x8).
Figure 4-34

IMPORTANT
cover.
Figure 4-35
4-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
IMPORTANT
Figure 4-36
16. Detach the FFC (a) of the drum unit from the con-
nector (b) of the unit relay PWB.
17. Release two lock levers (c) and (d) of the drum unit
18. Detach the drum unit (e) in the direction of the arrow
from the process frame (f).
19. In a similar way detach the drum unit of each color.
20. Check the drum unit and clean or replace it.
IMPORTANT
In case of detaching the drum unit, take care not to touch
the drum.
Figure 4-37
*: In case of replacing the new unit, execute [LSU cleaning/Drum refreshment/Calibration] automatically. (About five
minutes)
Execute the following settings manually, if Color Quality Adjustment is necessary.

4-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Scan the code the below for the drum unit replacement video.
support-movie/video/6284804114001/ma-2100cwfx-series-drum-unit-replacement?page=1
(5) Developer portion

(5-1) Reattaching and detaching the developer unit
Procedures
Figure 4-38
4-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-39

Figure 4-40
4-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
9. While lifting two top of both ends (b) of the front

cover, open the front cover (a).
Figure 4-41
Figure 4-42
4-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

IMPORTANT
cover.
Figure 4-43
IMPORTANT
Figure 4-44
4-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
16. Release two lock levers (c) and (d) of the drum unit
17. Detach the drum unit (e) in the direction of the arrow
from the process frame (f).
IMPORTANT
In case of detaching the drum unit, take care not to touch
the drum.
Figure 4-45
Figure 4-46
4-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
20. While holding the handle (d) of developer unit, pull-

ing in front, release the lock by using the flat-head
screwdriver (c).
21. Release two locks in the above procedures.
Figure 4-47
22. Hold the handle (c) of the developer unit, detach the
developer unit (d) in the direction of the arrow from
the process frame (e).
24. Check the developer unit and clean or replace it.
IMPORTANT
In case of detaching the developer unit, take care not to
touch the developer roller and the film.
Figure 4-48
4-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
When attaching the developer unit to the process frame

(c), push down two both ends (b) of developer unit (a),
and lock it.
IMPORTANT
Do not press the range (d) that might be cause of an
image failure.
Figure 4-49
*: When a new unit is replaced, the [T/C sensor correction/Calibration] is automatically executed. (About 90 sec-
onds).
Execute the following settings manually, if Color Quality Adjustment is necessary.

Scan the code the below for the developer unit replacement video.
support-movie/video/6284804113001/ma-2100cwfx-series-deve-unit-replacement?page=1
4-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(6) Fuser section

(6-1) Detaching and reattaching the fuser unit
Procedures
2. After releasing the rear cover left (b) in the direction
of the arrow and two protrusions, and remove it.
Figure 4-50
3. Remove one screw (a)(M3x8).

4. Twist the fuser wire cover (b) in the direction of the
arrow and remove it.
Figure 4-51
4-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
5. Disconnect three connectors (a).

Figure 4-52
7. While turning the fuser unit (a) in the direction of the

arrow, and remove it.
8. Check the fuser unit (a) and clean or replace it.
IMPORTANT
In case of detaching the fuser unit (a) after the machine
operates soon, take care not to touch in the high
temperature section of the paper conveying section.
Figure 4-53
4-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Scan the code the below for the fuser unit replacement video.
support-movie/video/6284802350001/ma-2100cwfx-series-fuser-unit-replacement?page=1
4-3 Disassembly and Reassembly

(1) Detaching and reattaching the toner container
Procedures
Figure 4-54
4-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(2) Outer covers

(2-1) Detaching and reattaching the rear right cover
Procedures
2. Detach one screw (b) (M3×8P tight).
3. Twist the rear cover right (c), release the back side
of two protrusions (d), detach in the direction of the
arrow.
Figure 4-55
(2-2) Detaching and reattaching the right cover/ the right cover lower
Procedures
1. Push the lock button (a) of the right cover, and
open it.
2. Press the fulcrum side of the right cover (b), and
detach it.
3. Detach the fulcrum (d) and remove the rear right
cover (b).
Figure 4-56
4-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
4. Detach one screw (a)(M3x8).

5. Press the concave (d) of the right cover bottom,
release five back side hooks (c) in the direction of
the arrow, and detach it.
Figure 4-57
(2-3) Detaching and reattaching the rear cover left

Procedures
2. After releasing the rear cover left (b) in the direction
of the arrow and two protrusions (c), and remove
them.
Figure 4-58
4-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(2-4) Detaching and reattaching the fuser wire cover

Procedures
Figure 4-59
(2-5) Detaching and reattaching the front cover left

Procedures
arrow and release four hooks (c), and detach it.
Figure 4-60
4-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(2-6) Detaching and reattaching the rear inner cover left

Procedures
1. Release two hooks (b) of the rear inner cover left
in the direction of the arrow.
2. Detach the rear inner cover left (a) in the direction of
the arrow and detach it.
Figure 4-61
4-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(2-7) Detaching and reattaching the rear cover

Procedures
Figure 4-62
2. Close the conveying section (a).

3. After detaching the stop ring (c) of the rear cover
(b), and remove the strap (b).
Figure 4-63
4-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
1. After coming near the rear cover in the direction of

the arrow, release the fulcrum (b) and (c), and
detach the rear cover (a).
Figure 4-64
(2-8) Detaching and reattaching the rear cover bottom

Procedures
1. Release the hook (b) of the rear cover bottom in
the direction of the arrow.
2. After coming near the rear cover bottom (a?in the
direction of the arrow, release three hooks (c) of the
rear cover bottom and detach them.
Figure 4-65
4-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(2-9) Detaching and reattaching the front cover

Procedures
2. Open the MP tray (c).
Figure 4-66

Figure 4-67
4-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
5. Remove two fixed strap portions (a) of the front

cover by using the pliers.
Figure 4-68
6. Twisting the fulcrum of the front cover, detach in (c)

(b) order.
7. Detach the front cover (a) in the direction of the
arrow.
Figure 4-69
4-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(2-10) Detaching and reattaching ISU rear cover/ISU left cover/ISU right cover
Procedures
1. After twisting ISU rear cover (a) in the direction of
the arrow, releasing two protrusions (b), and
remove them.
Figure 4-70
2. Raising the edge (d) of ISU left cover slightly,

release two protrusions.
3. After coming near ISU left cover in the direction of
the arrow, release five hooks (b) and detach the ISU
left cover (a).
Figure 4-71
4-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
4. Raising the edge (d) of ISU right cover slightly,

5. After coming near ISU right cover in the direction of
right cover (a).
Figure 4-72
(2-11) Detaching and reattaching the top cover

Procedures
1. After releasing four hooks (b) by using the flat-
head screwdriver, detach the fan duct (a).
2. After releasing two hooks (d) by using the flat-head
screwdriver, detach the fan holder (c).
Figure 4-73
4-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
3. Disconnect the connector (b) of the fan relay wire.

4. Detach the fan relay wire (c) from the wire guide (d).
Figure 4-74
*: Procedures 5 to 8 are FAX model only.

5. Detach the connector (b) of FAX wire from the main/
engine PWB.
6. Detach the FAX relay wire (a) from the wire guide
(c).
Figure 4-75
4-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
7. Disconnect the connector (b) of the loudspeaker (a).

8. Detach two screws (c)(M3x8) and remove the FAX
PWB (a).
Figure 4-76
9. Release two hooks (b) of ISU inner cover (a) by

using a flat-head screwdriver .
10. Detach the ISU inner cover (a) in the direction of the
arrow.
Figure 4-77
4-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
11. Detach six screws (b)(M3x8).

12. Detach one screw (d) (M4×10P tight).
13. After coming near the top cover in the direction of
the arrow, release the back side of hook and detach
the top cover (a).
Figure 4-78
Note 1 when attaching the upper cover

In case of attaching the top cover (a), lift not to insert the
actuator (b) and attach it.
Figure 4-79
4-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

When attaching the upper cover (a), take care not to
have the sponge (b) rub the USB wire holder (c).
Figure 4-80
(3) Optical section

(3-1) Detaching and reattaching the laser scanner unit (LSU).
Procedures
Figure 4-81
4-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-82

Figure 4-83
4-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-84
Figure 4-85
4-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
11. Twist the rear cover left (a), release two protrusions
(b), and detach the rear cover left in the direction of
the arrow.
Figure 4-86

the arrow, release four hooks (c), and detach it.
Figure 4-87
4-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

IMPORTANT
cover.
Figure 4-88

18. Detach two LSU fixed pins (b).
Figure 4-89
4-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
19. Disconnect the connector (a) and FFC (b) from the
main/engine PWB.
20. Unplug the disconnected connector (a) and FFC(b)
from the holder aperture (c).
21. Lift the LSU (a) and pull out it.
22. Check the ISU (c) and clean or replace it.
IMPORTANT
In case of detaching LSU (a), take care not to touch the
side of slit glass and hit against the front cover.
Figure 4-90
IMPORTANT
In case of detaching FFC of the main/engine PWB
(a),coming near the lock (c) of the connector (b) in the
direction of the arrow and release it.
Figure 4-91
Execute the following setting after replacing the laser scanner unit.
4-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Scan the code the below for the LSU replacement video.
support-movie/video/6284802210001/ma-2100cwfx-series-lsu-replacement
4-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(3-2) Detaching and reattaching the image scanner unit (ISU)

Procedures
arrow.
Figure 4-92
4. Twist the rear cover left, release two protrusions (b),

and detach the rear cover left (a) in the direction of
the arrow.
Figure 4-93
4-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-94

Figure 4-95
4-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

the arrow, release two protrusions (b), and remove
it.
Figure 4-96

release two protrusions (c).
left cover (a).
Figure 4-97
4-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

right cover (a).
Figure 4-98
14. Detach one screw (b)(M3x8) and remove the

ground terminal (c).
15. Disconnect FFC (d) and two connectors (e).
16. Open the document processor (a).
17. Lift up the document processor (a) in the direction of
the arrow and remove from the main unit.
Figure 4-99
4-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
18. Disconnect two connectors (b) and two FFC (c).

19. Detach two screws (d) (M4×12P tight).
20. After coming near ISU (a) in the direction of the
arrow, release the hook and detach it.
21. Check the ISU (a) and clean or replace it.
Figure 4-100
Scan the code the below for the ISU unit replacement video.
support-movie/video/6284802351001/ma-2100cwfx-series-isu-replacement?page=1
4-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(3-3) Detaching and reattaching the operation panel

Procedures
1. Open the document processor.
2. After lifting the edge of left operation panel cover (b)
and slide in the direction of the arrow.
3. Detach the operation panel cover (b) from the oper-
ation panel (a).
4. In a similar way detach the right operation panel
cover (c) and (d) from the operation panel (a).
Figure 4-101
5. Detach the clear panel (b) from the operation panel

(a).
6. Next remove the operation panel (c).
Figure 4-102
4-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
7. Release two hooks (b) of the operation panel (a)

from the flat-head screwdriver (c).
8. Lift the front side of the operation panel (a).
Figure 4-103
9. Reverse the operation panel (a).

10. Disconnect FFC (c) from the connector of the oper-
ation panel PWB (b).
11. Remove the operation panel (a).
12. Check the operation panel (a) and clean or replace
it.
13. Reattach the detached parts in the original position.
Figure 4-104
4-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Scan the code the below for the operation panel replacement video.
support-movie/video/6284802352001/ma-2100cwfx-series-operation-panel-replacement?page=1
(3-4) Detaching and reattaching the ISU top frame

Procedures
1. Detach the document processor.
2. Remove the operation panel.
3. Detach two screws (c) (M3×8P tight).
4. Release three fixed portions (e) of ISU top frame
from the fixed portion (d) of ISU frame
5. Detach the ISU top frame (b) from the ISU bottom
frame (a).
6. Check the ISU frame and clean or replace it.
IMPORTANT
In case of detaching the ISU top frame, take care not to
touch the contact glass.
If it is dirty, wipe off with a dry cloth.
Figure 4-105
4-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(3-5) Detaching and reattaching the scanner carriage

Procedures
1. Detach the document processor.
2. Remove the operation panel.
3. Detach the ISU top frame.
4. Remove the FFC (d) from the connector (c) of the
scanner carriage.
5. Remove the drive belt (f) from the fixed portions of
the scanner carriage.
6. Detach the scanner carriages (b) from the ISU bot-
tom frame (a).
7. Check the scanner carriage (b) and clean or replace
it.
IMPORTANT
In case of detaching the scanner carriage, take care not
to touch the CIS glass.
If it is dirty, wipe off with a dry cloth.
Figure 4-106
(4) Drive section

(4-1) Detaching and reattaching the main drive unit
Procedures
Figure 4-107
4-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-108

Figure 4-109
4-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Figure 4-110

Figure 4-111
4-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
the arrow.
Figure 4-112

Figure 4-113
4-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
14. Detach the rear top cover (c).

15. Release two hooks (b) of the rear inner cover left in
Figure 4-114
17. Detach the SD card cover (a) in the direction of the

arrow.
Figure 4-115
4-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-116

IMPORTANT
cover.
Figure 4-117
4-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
23. Detach (Wi-Fi model) Wi-Fi assembly (a) in the

Figure 4-118
24. Detach the FCC (a).
Figure 4-119
4-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
25. Detach one screw (a)(M3x8) and remove the

ground terminal (b).
27. Disconnect two FFC (d).
28. Release the lock of FFC (e) with locking.
Figure 4-120
29. Disconnect five connectors (a).

30. Disconnect two connectors (b).
31. Detach the FFC (c).
Figure 4-121
4-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
32. Detach one screw (b)(M3x6).

33. Detach nine screws (c)(M3x8).
34. Detach the main shield plate (a).
Figure 4-122
35. Disconnect the all connectors and FFC from the

main/engine PWB.
36. Remove six screws (b)(M3x8) and remove the
main/engine PWB (a).
Figure 4-123
4-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

ground terminal.
38. Disconnect one connector (c).
39. Detach the inlet (d) from the frame.
Figure 4-124

41. Release two hooks (c) and remove the low voltage
power source PWB (a).
*: Even if the power switch of the main unit is turned

off and the power cord is unplugged, the electric
charge may remain in the capacitors on the low volt-
age PWB, so that please be careful not to touch the
mounted parts to protect you from electric shock.
Figure 4-125
4-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
42. Disconnect the connector (b) of the fan in the

machine and the clutch connector (c).
43. Release the wire (d) from the fan holder duct (a).
44. After releasing five hooks (f) of the fan holder duct
(a) by using the flat-head screwdriver (d), detach it.
Figure 4-126

46. Detach the power supply shield plate (a) in the
Figure 4-127
4-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
47. Disconnect the connector (b) of the solenoid and

the connector (c) of the motor.
48. Detach nine screws (b)(M3x8).
49. Detach the main drive unit (a).
50. Check the main drive unit (a) and clean or replace it.
Figure 4-128
(4-2) Detaching and reattaching the eject/the pressure release unit

Procedures
Figure 4-129
4-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

arrow.
Figure 4-130
8. Push the lock button (a) of the right cover, and open
it.
detach it.
cover (b).
Figure 4-131
4-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-132
the arrow.
Figure 4-133
4-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-134

the arrow, and remove it.
Figure 4-135
4-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

right cover (a).
Figure 4-136
19. Remove two screws (b)(M3x8).

20. After releasing the hook (c) by using the flat-head
screwdriver, detach the right inner cover (a).
Figure 4-137
4-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
21. Detach the wire (c) from two hooks (b) of the eject
duct.
22. Disconnect the connector (b) from the main frame.
23. Detach two screws (e)(M3x8).
24. Detach the eject duct (a).
Figure 4-138
25. Disconnect two connectors (b) of the clutch.

26. Detach one screw (c) (M3×12P tight).
27. Detach one screw (c)(M3x12) and remove the eject/
pressure release unit (a).
28. Check the eject/pressure release unit (a) and clean
or replace it.
Figure 4-139
4-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(4-3) Detaching and reattaching the eject drive unit

Procedures
Figure 4-140

2. Detach one screw (b)(M3x8TP).
arrow.
Figure 4-141
4-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
it.
detach it.
cover (b).
Figure 4-142

the arrow.
Figure 4-143
4-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-144

Figure 4-145
4-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-146
Figure 4-147
4-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

the arrow, release two protrusions (b), and remove
it.
Figure 4-148

left cover (a).
Figure 4-149
4-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

right cover (a).
Figure 4-150

Figure 4-151
4-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-152
27. After releasing four hooks (b) by using the flat-head

screwdriver, detach the fan duct (a).
Figure 4-153
4-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-154

engine PWB.
(c).
Figure 4-155
4-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

PWB (a).
Figure 4-156

arrow.
Figure 4-157
4-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

the top cover (a).
Figure 4-158

Figure 4-159
4-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-160

Figure 4-161
4-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-162
44. Disconnect the connector (b).

45. Detach the wire from two hooks (c) of the eject duct.
Figure 4-163
4-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

49. Detach one screw (c) (M3×12P tight).
50. Detach one screw (d)(M3x12) and remove the eject/
pressure release unit (a).
Figure 4-164
51. Detach one screw (c)(M3x8).

52. Remove the FAX ground plate (b) from the eject unit
(a).
Figure 4-165
4-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
53. Detach (c) by releasing the hook (b).

54. Detach two screws (d)(M4x12TP).
56. Detach the eject unit (a) in the direction of the arrow.
Figure 4-166

58. After coming near in the lower direction, release
three hooks (c) and detach the right inner cover (a).
Figure 4-167
4-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
59. Disconnect the connector (b) of the solenoid.

60. Detach three screws (c)(M3x8) and remove the
eject drive unit (a).
61. Check the eject drive unit (a) and clean or replace it.
Figure 4-168
4-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(4-4) Detaching and reattaching the conveying motor

Procedures
Figure 4-169

of two protrusions (d), and detach in the direction of
the arrow.
Figure 4-170
4-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
it.
detach it.
cover (b).
Figure 4-171

Figure 4-172
4-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-173
15. Detach the wire (c) from two hooks (b) of the eject
duct.
16. Disconnect the connector (b) from the main frame.
Figure 4-174
4-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
19. Disconnect the connector (b).

20. Detach two screws (c)(M3x8) and remove the con-
veying motor (a).
21. Check the conveying motor (a) and clean or replace
it.
Figure 4-175
4-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(4-5) Detaching and reattaching the paper feeder/resist clutch assembly.

Procedures
Figure 4-176

the arrow.
Figure 4-177
4-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
it.
detach it.
cover (b).
Figure
4-178

Figure 4-179
4-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-180

12. Detach two screws (c)(M3x8) and remove the paper
feeding/resist clutch assembly (a).
13. Check the paper feeding/resist clutch assembly (a)
and clean or replace it.
Figure 4-181
4-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(5) Others
(5-1) Detaching and reattaching the conveying unit
Procedures
Figure 4-182
2. Lift the conveying portion (a) and open it.

*: When the conveying portion is locked, close the
rear cover once and open it.
3. After detaching the stop ring (c) of the rear cover
(b), and remove the strap (b).
Figure 4-183
4-99
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
4. After coming near the rear cover in the direction of

the arrow, release the fulcrum (b) and (c), and
detach the rear cover (a).
Figure 4-184
5. Open the conveying portion (a) in the direction of

the arrow.
6. Remain open the middle guide (b) and detach with
the conveying portion (a).
7. Check the conveying unit (a) and clean or replace it.
Figure 4-185
4-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(5-2) Detaching and reattaching the eject unit

Procedures
the arrow.
Figure 4-186

the arrow.
Figure 4-187
4-101
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-188

Figure 4-189
4-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-190
Figure 4-191
4-103
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-192

left cover (a).
Figure 4-193
4-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

right cover (a).
Figure 4-194

Figure 4-195
4-105
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-196

Figure 4-197
4-106
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-198

engine PWB.
(c).
Figure 4-199
4-107
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

PWB (a).
Figure 4-200

arrow.
Figure 4-201
4-108
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

the top cover (a).
Figure 4-202

Figure 4-203
4-109
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-204
37. Detach one screw (c)(M3x8).

38. Remove the FAX ground plate (b) from the eject unit
(a).
Figure 4-205
4-110
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
39. Detach two screw (e)(M4x12TP).

40. Detach two screw (d)(M3x8).
41. Release (b) to detach (c).
42. Detach the eject unit (a) in the direction of the arrow.
43. Check the eject unit (a) and clean or replace it.
Figure 4-206
(5-3) Replacing the language sheet

Procedures
1. After lifting the edge of left operation panel cover
(b) and slide in the direction of the arrow.
ation panel (a).
3. In a similar way detach the center and right opera-
tion panel cover (c) and (d) from the operation por-
tion (a).
Figure 4-207
4-111
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

(a).
6. Replace the operation panel sheet of the applicable
language.
Figure 4-208
(5-4) Fan motor attachment direction

*: When detaching and reattaching the fan motor, take care of the attachment direction (intake/exhaust).
Figure 4-209
4-112
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
1. Eject fan motor: intake (the lower side of the label)

2. In-machine fan motor: intake (inside of the label)
4-113
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(6) PWBs
*: Before replacing the PWB, be sure to take the following procedures.
Otherwise, The PWB may be damaged.
- Disconnect the power cord.
- Press the power switch one second or more to discharge the electric charge inside the main unit.
(6-1) Detaching and reattaching the main PWB

Procedures
(c), and remove it.
Figure 4-210

Figure 4-211
4-114
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
5. Release two hooks (b) of the rear inner cover left in

Figure 4-212

arrow.
Figure 4-213
4-115
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-214

Figure 4-215
4-116
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Figure 4-216

Figure 4-217
4-117
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-218

Figure 4-219
4-118
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
22. Disconnect the all connectors and FFC from the

main/engine PWB.
23. Remove six screws (b)(M3x8) and remove the
main/engine PWB (a).
24. Check or replace the main/engine PWB (a).
Figure 4-220
Notes when replacing the main/engine PWB

When replacing the main/engine PWB, remove the EEPROM (U4) on the old PWB and make sure to attach to the new
PWB.
Do not replace with others, since the EEPROM is not compatible and take care it carfully cause it can not be proveded
as service parts.
Figure 4-221
*: When replacing the main/engine PWB, in order to take over the user information, insert a USB drive and execute
U917 to export the data. (see page 6-85)
4-119
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
*: Since the MAC address changes, check the network settings.

Example: If the printer name is registered with the IP address, reset the IP address.
Execute the following setting after replacing the main/engine PWB.

1. Machine No. (maintenance mode U004)
*: If the C0180 error occurs, execute U004 to match the serial numbers in the PWBs.
(1)Input "004" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
(2)Select [Execute] and press the [Start] key.
(3)Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
2. Firmware update (see page 5-1,5-1)

*: Check the latest firmware and upgrade it.
3. Execute maintenance mode U600 (Init All Data) to setting the country code. (FAX model only)
(1)Press the [Start] key.
(2)Select [Execute].
(3)Select [Country Code] and enter a country code using the numeric keys.
(4)Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
*: Data initialization starts.
The firmware version is displayed after the data initialization.
Country code list
Country Destination Country Destination

code code
000 Japan 007 South America*3
156 Asian nations*1 253 European nations*4
254 Taiwan 250 Russia
097 Korea 009 Australia
038 China 126 New Zealand*5
181 North America*2
*1: Applied for Sales company competent Singapore, India, Thailand, Hong Kong.
*2: Applied for Sales company competent USA, Canada.
*3: Applied for Sales company competent Bolivia, Chile, Peru, Argentina, Brazil.
*4: Applied for Sales company competent Italy, Germany, Spain, U.K., Netherlands, Sweden, France,
Austria, Switzerland, Belgium, Denmark, Finland, Portugal, Ireland, Norway, Saudi Arabia, Turkey.
*5: Change the country code when selling in New Zealand. The country code to input is 126.
4. Insert the USB drive and execute U917 to import the data.
5. Adjusting the scanner automatically (maintenance mode U411)

Adjusting the table scanning automatically
(1)Set the specified original (P/N: 302NM94340) on the table.
(2)Enter maintenance item U411.
(3)Select [Target].
(4)Select [Auto].
(5)Select [Table(ChartA)].
(6)Press the [Start] key to read the barcode of the original chart and to start the automatic adjustment.
(7)When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
6. Reactivating the license
4-120
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Reactivate the license when equipping the license of the optional product.
(1)Card Authentication Kit (B)
(2)UG-33 (ThinPrint)
*: Re-entering 4-digit encryption codes entered at setup is necessary.
7. Resetting the initial settings

Reset the user default setting and FAX default setting (e.g. the local FAX information)* from the System Menu or
Command Center.
*: FAX model only
8. Resetting the maintenance mode

Reset the following maintenance mode if necessary.
No. Maintenance mode relating to the main No. Maintenance mode relating to the
unit main unit
U253 Double/single count switch U603* User data 1
U260 Feed/eject counter switch U604* User data 2
U402 Print margin adjustment U610* System 1
U403 Scanning margin adjustment (table) U611* System 2
U404 Scanning margin adjustment (DP) U612* System 3
U425 Target adjustment U625* Communication Setting
U695* FAX function customization
*: FAX model only
9. Exiting from the maintenance mode

Input "001" using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
Scan the code the below for the main engine pwb replacement video.
support-movie/video/6284802418001/ma-2100cwfx-series-main-engin-pwb-replacement
4-121
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(6-2) Detaching and reattaching the high voltage PWB

Procedures
the arrow.
Figure 4-222

the arrow.
Figure 4-223
4-122
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-224

Figure 4-225
4-123
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-226
Figure 4-227
4-124
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-228

left cover (a).
Figure 4-229
4-125
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

right cover (a).
Figure 4-230

Figure 4-231
4-126
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-232

Figure 4-233
4-127
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-234

engine PWB.
(c).
Figure 4-235
4-128
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

PWB (a).
Figure 4-236

arrow.
Figure 4-237
4-129
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

the top cover (a).
Figure 4-238

Figure 4-239
4-130
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-240
37. Detach six hooks (e) and remove the FFC cover (a).
38. Detach the container FFC (b) from the connector
and hook.
39. Remove the high voltage FFC (c) from the connec-
tor and hook.
Figure 4-241
4-131
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
40. Perform Step 43 through Step 46 while rolling up the

dust-proof film (a) and (b) in the direction of the
arrow.
Caution
When reattaching, securely cover the wire (c) with the
dust-proof film (a).
Take care not to tear the dust-proof film.
Figure 4-242
41. Detach seven connectors (b) and (c) from the con-
nector of the container relay PWB (a).
Figure 4-243
4-132
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

43. Release three lock portions (c) by using the flat-
head screwdriver (d).
44. After lifting the high volume PWB assembly (a) in
the direction of the arrow from the main unit (e) and
detach it.
45. Check the situation of the high voltage PWB (a) and
if necessary clean or replace it.
Figure 4-244
Scan the code the below for the high voltage pwb replacement video.
support-movie/video/6284802892001/ma-2100cwfx-series-hvu-replacement?page=1
4-133
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(6-3) Detaching and reattaching the power supply PWB

Procedures
(c), and remove it.
Figure 4-245
3. Detach the rear top cover left (c).

4. Open the rear inner cover left (a) in the direction of
Figure 4-246
4-134
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-247

arrow.
Figure 4-248
4-135
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-249

Figure 4-250
4-136
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Figure 4-251

Figure 4-252
4-137
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-253

Figure 4-254
4-138
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

ground terminal.
23. Disconnect one connector (c).
24. Detach the inlet (d) from the frame.
Figure 4-255

26. Release two hooks (c) and remove the power sup-
ply PWB (a).
27. Check the situation of the low voltage power supply
PWB (a) and if necessary clean or replace it.
*: Even if the power switch of the main unit is turned

off and the power cord is unplugged, the electric
charge may remain in the capacitors on the power
supply PWB, so that please be careful not to touch
the mounted parts to protect you from electric
shock.
Figure 4-256
4-139
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Scan the code the below for the power supply pwb replacement video.
support-movie/video/6285348938001/ma-2100cwfx-series-lvu-pwb-replacement
(6-4) Detaching and reattaching the container relay PWB.

Procedures
the arrow.
Figure 4-257
4-140
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

the arrow.
Figure 4-258

Figure 4-259
4-141
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-260

Figure 4-261
4-142
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Figure 4-262

Figure 4-263
4-143
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

left cover (a).
Figure 4-264

right cover (a).
Figure 4-265
4-144
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-266

Figure 4-267
4-145
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-268

Figure 4-269
4-146
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

engine PWB.
(c).
Figure 4-270

PWB (a).
Figure 4-271
4-147
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

arrow.
Figure 4-272

the top cover (a).
Figure 4-273
4-148
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-274

Figure 4-275
4-149
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
37. Detach six hooks (e) and remove the FFC cover (a).
38. Detach the container FFC (b) from the connector
and hook.
39. Remove the high voltage FFC (c) from the connec-
tor and hook.
Figure 4-276
40. Perform Step 43 through Step 46 while rolling up the

dust-proof film (a) and (b) in the direction of the
arrow.
Caution
When reattaching, securely cover the wire (c) with the
dust-proof film (a).
Take care not to tear the dust-proof film.
Figure 4-277
4-150
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
41. Detach seven connectors (b) and (c) from the con-
Figure 4-278

43. Release three lock portions (c) by using the flat-
head screwdriver (d).
44. After lifting the high volume PWB assembly (a) in
the direction of the arrow from the main unit (e) and
detach it.
Figure 4-279
4-151
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
45. Disconnect the eraser (b) and FFC (c) from the con-
46. Detach four screws (b)(M3x8).
47. Detach the container relay PWB (a) in the direction
of the arrow.
48. Check the situation of the container relay PWB (a)
and if necessary clean or replace it.
Figure 4-280
4-152
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(6-5) Detaching and reattaching the unit relay PWB.

Procedures
2. Push up the container lock lever (b), release the
lock.
Figure 4-281

the arrow.
Figure 4-282
4-153
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-283

Figure 4-284
4-154
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Figure 4-285
Figure 4-286
4-155
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-287

IMPORTANT
cover.
Figure 4-288
4-156
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
IMPORTANT
Figure 4-289
18. Detach the FFC (b) of drum unit each color from the
unit relay PWB (a).
19. Detach the FFC (c) of developer unit each color
from the unit relay PWB (a).
Figure 4-290
4-157
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
20. Detach five screws (c)(M3x8).

21. Detach five hooks (d) from the process unit (e) and
remove the left frame (b).
22. Detach the unit relay PWB (a).
23. Check the situation of the container relay PWB (a)
Figure 4-291
4-158
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(6-6) Detaching and reattaching the operation panel PWB

Procedures
1. After lifting the edge of left operation panel cover
(b) and slide in the direction of the arrow.
ation panel (a).
3. In a similar way detach the center and right opera-
tion panel cover (c) and (d) from the operation por-
tion (a).
Figure 4-292

(a).
Figure 4-293
4-159
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
6. Release two hooks (b) of the operation cover (a) by

using the flat-head screwdriver (c).
7. Lift the front side of the operation cover (a).
Figure 4-294
8. Reverse the operation cover (a).

9. Disconnect FFC (c) from the connector of the oper-
ation panel PWB (b).
Figure 4-295
4-160
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
10. Detach ten screws (c)(M3x8) and remove the oper-

ation panel PWB (b) from the operation cover (a).
11. Check the situation of the operation panel PWB (b)
Figure 4-296
4-161
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(6-7) Detaching and reattaching the FAX PWB (FAX model only.)
Procedures
2. Detach one screw (b)(M3x8P).
the arrow.
Figure 4-297

the arrow.
Figure 4-298
4-162
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-299

Figure 4-300
4-163
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

left cover (a).
w
Figure 4-301

right cover (a).
Figure 4-302
4-164
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-303

Figure 4-304
4-165
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Figure 4-305

Figure 4-306
4-166
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
engine PWB.
(c).
Figure 4-307

PWB (a).
27. Check the situation of the FAX PWB (a) and if nec-
essary clean or replace it.
Figure 4-308
4-167
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(7) Detaching and reattaching the document processor

(7-1) Detaching and reattaching the DP pickup pulley, DP paper feed roller and DP separate
pad
Procedures
1. Open the DP top cover (a).
2. After twisting to release two hooks (c) of the DP
front cover, and remove the DP front cover (b).
Figure 4-309
3. After twisting to release two hooks (b) of the DP rear

cover, and remove the DP rear cover (a).
Figure 4-310
4-168
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
4. Detach two paper feed roller shaft guides (c) from

the paper feeder roller shaft (b) of the DP pulley
assembly (a).
(1)Detach the inside hook of the paper feeder roller shaft
guide (c) in the lower direction.
(2)After sliding inside the paper feeder roller shaft guide
(c), rotate in the direction of the arrow.
(3)Detach the outside hook of the paper feeder roller
shaft guide (c), remove in the upper direction.
5. Detach the stop ring (b) and bushing (c) from the DP
paper feed roller shaft (a).
Figure 4-311
4-169
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
6. Detach two stop rings (d), clutch (e) and bushing (f)
from the paper feed roller shaft (c).
7. After sliding the DP paper feed roller shaft (c) in the
direction of the arrow, detach the DP paper feed
roller assembly (a) from the document processor
(b).
Figure 4-312
8. Push inside both side hooks (b) of DP separate pad

assembly (a) and detach from the document pro-
cessor (c).
9. Check the pickup pulley, DP paper feed roller and
DP separate pad assembly (a) and clean or replace
it.
Figure 4-313
IMPORTANT
When replacing the new DP paper feeding roller assembly or DP separate pad, take care not to touch on the roller and
pad surface.
4-170
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(7-2) Detaching and reattaching the DP front cover

Procedures
2. After twisting to release two hooks (c) of the DP
front cover, and remove the DP front cover (b).
Figure 4-314
(7-3) Detaching and reattaching the DP rear cover

Procedures
2. After twisting to release two hooks (c) of the DP rear
cover, and remove the DP rear cover (b).
Figure 4-315
4-171
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(7-4) Detaching and reattaching the DP main motor

Procedures
2. After twisting to release two hooks (c) of the DP rear
cover, and remove the DP rear cover (b).
Figure 4-316
3. Disconnect the connector (c).

4. Detach two screws (b)(M3x8) and remove the DP
main motor (a).
5. Check the main motor (a) and clean or replace it.
Figure 4-317
4-172
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
4-4 Maintenance parts replacement procedures (Option)

(1) Paper feeder (PF-5110)
(1-1) Detaching and reattaching the retard pulley, the pickup pulley and paper feed roller
Procedures
1. Open the PF rear cover (a).
2. After lifting the retard guide cover (c) in the direction
of the arrow, detach along the guide (b).
Figure 4-318
3. After lifting to release the shaft (b) of the retard

guide, remove the retard guide (a) in the direction of
the arrow.
Figure 4-319
4-173
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
4. After pushing down the lock portion (b) of paper

feeding holder, slide in the direction of the arrow.
Twisting paper feeding holder (a), remove in the
5. Check the retard pulley, the pickup pulley and paper
feed roller and clean or replace it.
Figure 4-320

*: When attaching the paper feed holder (a), insert the
protrusion (b) into adjusting the PF guide.
*: When the coupling can not be inserted, insert turn-

ing the gear.
Figure 4-321
IMPORTANT
When replacing the new pickup holder or retard holder, take care not to touch on the roller surface.
Execute the following setting after replacing the paper feed roller.
Clearing the maintenance counts (maintenance mode U251): Clear
4-174
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(1-2) Detaching and reattaching the PF PWB

Procedures
1. Detach one screw (b).
2. After twisting to release seven hooks (c) of the PF
cover right, and remove the PF cover right (a).
Figure 4-322
3. Disconnect all the connectors from the PF PWB (a).

4. Detach one screw (b) (M3×8 tight).
5. Detach the PF PWB (a).
6. Check the situation of the PF PWB (a) and if neces-
sary clean or replace it.
Figure 4-323
4-175
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
5 Firmware
5-1 Firmware update
Execute the following to update the firmware below.
*: The processing time is reduced with simultaneous processing by group.
[GROUP1 UPDATE]
UPDATE Target Master file name Message
order
1 Controller data DL_CTRL.C0A*2 CTRL
DL_CTRL.C09 CTRL
2 Color table 1 DL_PCLT1.C09 CLT1
3 Color table 2 DL_PCLT2.C09 CLT2
4 Optional language 1 DL_OPT_xx.C09*1 OPT1
*1: The numbers 01 to 99 different for each language in xx are inserted.

*2: FAX model, *3: Without FAX model
[GROUP2 UPDATE]: No applicable firmware is available.
[GROUP3 UPDATE]
UPDATE Target Master file name Message
order
1 Engine firmware DL_ENGN.C0A ENGN

Verify the signature at firmware update
Verify the signature of the update file to prevent the firmware update with illegally falsified data.
File names of the signature and firmware certificate

Target Signature file name Firmware certificate file
name
Controller data C0A_CTRL_sign.bin*2 C0A_CTRL_cert.pem*2
C0J_CTRL_sign.bin*3 C0J_CTRL_cert.pem*3
The first color table for printer C0A_PCLT1_sign.bin C0A_PCLT1_cert.pem
The second color table C0A_PCLT2_sign.bin C0A_PCLT2_cert.pem
Optional language data *1 C0A_OPT_xx_sign.bin C0A_OPT_xx_cert.pem
5-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Target Signature file name Firmware certificate file

name
Engine PWB C0A_ENGN_sign.bin C0A_ENGN_cert.pem
Data for optional language data C0A_OPT_ER_sign.bin C0A_OPT_ER_cert_pem

deletion
*1:The numbers 01 to 99 different for each language in xx are inserted.

*2: FAX model, *3: Without FAX model
Preparations
Unzip the file containing the downloaded firmware and then copy the firmware and high-speed master file (skip files:
ES_SKIP.ON) in the root folder of the USB drive.
*: If the high-speed master file exists, the same version firmware update is skipped.
Procedures
1. After turning the power switch (a) on and the
screen is properly displayed, turn the power
switch (a) off.
2. Insert the USB drive (b) with the firmware into the
USB drive slot.
3. Turn the power switch (a) on.
4. [FW-UPDATE] is displayed, the version up is
started.
*: Several kinds of firmware updates are processed
simultaneously. c
b
a
Figure 1-5-1
5. While the firmware is updated, the target name and the progress status are expressed by the progress bar.
(Display sample)
The first line: Display "FW-Update" FW-Update
The second line: The progress bar is indicated the
update progress status.
6. When the firmware update completes normally, the completion message is displayed in the first page, the charac-
ter string subject to update and the updated version is displayed in the second and subsequent page.
(The first page)
The first line: "FW-Update" FW-Update 1/10
Display the page number, total page numbers and up and down key Completed
icon.
The second line: "Completed" (Completion message)
5-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(The second and subsequent page)

[CTRL] 2/10
The first line: "CTRL", (The character string applicable to UPDATE target) C0A_2000.001.005
Display the page number, total page numbers and up and down key icon.
The second line: (updated version)
*: When there is no corresponding master file, "No Change" is displayed.

[ENGN] 9/10
No Change
*: "*" is displayed after the update target name when it has been skipped.
[CTRL] 2/10
C0A_2000.001.005
7. Check if the new firmware versions are displayed.

8. Unplug the power cord and disconnect the USB drive.
9. Insert the power cord, check if " Can make a copy" is displayed and turn the power switch off.
When any errors (the error that can not read a file) occurs during FW-UPDATE, interrupt the process immediately, and
the completion displays without the subsequent FW-UPDATE.
(The first page)

The first line: "FW-Update" FW-Update 1/10
Display the page number, total page numbers and up and down key Error
icon.
The second line: "Error"
(The second and subsequent page)

[ENGN] 10/10
The first line: "ENGN", (The character string applicable to UPDATE target) Error 0100
Display the page number, total page numbers and up and down key icon.
The second line: "Error", error code
Error code
Code Error contents Code Error contents
0000 Others S000 File is missing to signature validation of
the official version
0100 No master file name S001 Official signature verification file is short.
0200 The version discrepancy of master file N001 Can not connect to the internet *2
name (There is no target under the update.)
03xx *4 There is no download file(No.xx).
04xx *4 File(No.xx) check sum discrepancy N002 Can not connect to the internet *3
(There is the target under the update.)
05xx *4 File(No.xx) ready failure
06xx *4 File(No.xx) size excess
08xx *4 File(No.xx) writing failure
*1: It includes the expired FM certificate.

*2: As the normal startup is possible next time, restart automatically and start normally.
5-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
*3: As the normal startup is not possible next time, not restart automatically, move to the USB update mode.
*4: The identifier applicable of code XX is as following.
Update target Code Identifier
Controller data 01 BOOT
02 KERNEL
03 FDTBIN
04 ROOTFS
05 APPLI
The first color table (for Printer) 01 CLUT1
The second color table (for Printer) 01 CLUT2
Optional language data 01 M_OPT_ALL
Engine PWB 01 ENGN
The display of the signature verification result

Official signature verification file Indicate the result
Both certificate and signature files exist and verification is Version number
successful.
Both certificate and signature files exist but verification is S000

unsuccessful.
Neither certificate nor signature files exist. S001

Or either of them does not exist.
10. Unplug the power cord and disconnect the USB drive.
11. Plug in the power cord and turn the power switch (a) on.
12. Check that the "Home" screen is displayed and then turn the power switch (a) off.
Precautions
Never turn the power switch (a) off or disconnect the USB drive (b) during the firmware update.
Safe-Update
When the firmware update was interrupted by power shut-off or disconnecting the USB drive during the firmware
update, the firmware update is retried at the next power-on.
Turn the main power on again while the USB drive is installed.
*: The firmware update that was already completed before power shut-down is skipped.
5-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
6 Maintenance mode
6-1 Maintenance mode
The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine.
(1) Executing the maintenance mode
Start
Enter “10871087” using

Maintenance mode is entered.
the numeric keys.
Enter the maintenance item

number using the [▲] [▼] keys The maintenance item is selected.
or numeric keys.
Press the start key.
The selected maintenance item is run.
Press the stop key.
Yes Repeat the same

maintenance item?
No
Yes
Run another maintenance
item?
No
Enter 001 using the [▲] [▼] keys
or numeric keys Maintenance mode is exited.
and press the start key.
End
6-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(2) Maintenance modes list

Section No. Maintenance item Outline
General U000 Printing Maintenance Report Printing the reports and exporting them to a
USB drive
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode Exiting from the maintenance mode
U002 Set Factory Default Initializing to the factory-default setting
U004 Machine serial number Display of the machine serial number and set-
ting
U010 Setting the maintenance mode ID Setting the maintenance mode ID
U019 Firmware Version Displays the firmware version of the PWB
Initializa- U021 Initializes Memory Initializing the backup RAM
tion
U025 Firmware update (S) Updates the firmware
Drive U034 Paper timing adjustment Adjusting the leading edge timing and the center
Paper line
feed
Convey-
ing
Cooling
Optical U065 Adjusting the magnification for table Adjusting the magnification for table scanning
scanning
U066 Adjusting the table scanning timing Adjusting the leading edge timing for table scan-
ning
U067 Adjusting the table scanning center Adjusting the center line for table scanning
line
U068 DP scanning position adjustment Adjusting the starting position for DP scanning
U070 DP magnification adjustment Adjusting the magnification for DP scanning
U071 Adjusting the DP leading edge Adjusting the DP scanning timing
Timing
U072 Adjusting the DP original center Adjusting the center line for DP scanning
High volt- U127 Clearing the transfer count Displaying the counts
age sys-
tem
Fuser U199 Fuser temperature Monitor the fuser temperature
Opera- U201 Initializing the touch panel Correct the X and Y axis position of the touch
tion sec- panel
tion /
U222 Setting the IC card type Sets the ID card type
Support
equip-
ment
Mode U252 Destination Sets the machine operation and indication
Setting depending on the specification of the destination
U253 Switching the double/single counts Sets the counter by color mode
U260 Select Copy Count Setting the count-up timing
U285 Set Service Status Page Setting the print coverage report output
Mode U287 Set Auto Reset Function Enable/disable the auto recovery after error
Setting
6-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

U326 Black line cleaning display setting Switch the black line cleaning guidance indica-
tion
U332 Adjusting the black coverage Setting the coefficient of the custom size
coefficient
U346 Selecting Sleep Mode Setting the BAM related sleep mode
Image U402 Adjusting the printing margins Adjusts the scan image margins
process-
U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an Adjusts the margin for scanning originals
ing original on the contact glass
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an Adjusts the margin for scanning originals
original from the document processor
U407 Adjusting the writing timing (Duplex/ Adjusting the writing timing when duplex printing
Reversal)
U411 Scanner auto adjustment Adjusting the scanner and DP automatically
U425 Set Target Inputs the Lab value printed on an adjustment
original
U520 TDRS setting Checking/setting the TDRS
FAX U600 Initialize: All Data Initializes all data and image memory.
U601 Initialize: Keep data Initializing the software switches of other than
the machine data
U603 User data 1 Makes user settings to enable the use as a FAX
U604 User data 2 Makes user settings to enable the use as a FAX
U605 Data clear Initializing the FAX communication data
U610 System 1 Set the number of lines to be ignored when
receiving a FAX at 100% magnification and in
the auto reduction mode.
U611 System 2 Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduc-
tion.
U612 System 3 Setting regarding the FAX communication oper-
ation
U620 FAX system Sets the signal detection method for remote
switching
U625 Communication settings Sets the auto redialing interval and the number
of times of auto redialing
U630 Communication control procedures 1 Setting the FAX communication
U631 Communication control procedures 2 Sets the FAX communication
FAX U632 Communication control procedures 3 Setting the FAX communication
U633 Communication control procedures 4 Setting the FAX communication
U634 Communication control procedures 5 Set the acceptable error when judging the
received TCF signal
U640 Communication time setting 1 Setting the detection time by remote switching
mode
U641 Communication time setting 2 Sets the time-out time for the fax communication
U650 Modem 1 Sets the G3 transmission cable equalizer
U651 Modem 2 Sets the modem output level
6-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

U660 Ring setting Setting the NCU (network control unit)
U670 List output Outputting the list of the fax communication data
U695 FAX function customization FAX batch transmission is set up.
U699 Software switch: Set Sets the software switches individually
Others U910 Black rate data Clearing the print coverage data and its period
U917 Read/Write Backup Data Reading/writing the backup data to a USB drive
U920 Billing counter Displays the billing count
U927 Clearing all the billing/life counters Clearing the billing count and machine life count
U928 Machine life counter Displays the machine life count
U964 Log check Transfer the log files to a USB drive
U977 Setting the data capture mode Stores the data sent to the main unit into a USB
drive
*
6-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(2-1) Content of the maintenance mode

U000 Printing Maintenance Report
(Message: Mainte Report)
Contents
Prints the list of the current settings of the maintenance items, paper jam and service call error occur-
rences. Output the event log and service status page.
Also, sends output data to a USB drive.
Purpose
Checks the current settings of the maintenance items, paper jam and service call error occurrences.
Before initializing or replacing the backup memory, print the list of the current settings of the maintenance
items to reenter the settings after initialization or replacement.
Method
1.Press the [Start] key.
2.Select the item to output.
Items Output list

Maintenance Maintenance mode setting list
User Status Output User Status Page
Svic Status Output Service Status Page
Event Output the event log report
NW Status Output Network Status Page
LLU Report Output LLU report
All All reports output
3.Press the [Start] key to output the list.

*: If A4 paper is available, it is output with this size. If A4 paper is unavailable, select the paper source.
Output status is displayed.
Method: when sending output data to a USB drive

2.Insert a USB drive into the USB drive slot.
3.Select the item to send.
4.Select [USB(Text)] or [USB(HTML)].
Items Output list

Print A report is printed.
USB(Text) Destination: send to USB drive (text format)
USB(HTML) Destination: send to USB drive (HTML format)

*: The output data is sent to the USB drive.
Completion
Press the [Stop] key.
*: The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
6-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Detail of event log (1)
Event Log
MFP XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
ECOSYS MA2100cwfx (2) 2014/10/19 15:15
(1) Firmware version C0A_2000.000.000 2014.09.19 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
(3) (4) (5)
(6) Machine No.:Z6B0000000 (7) Life Count:100000
(8) Paper Jam Log (10) Maintenance Log

# Count. Event Descriptions Date and Time # Count. Item Date and Time
16 9999999 4003.01.00.00.00 2014/09/22 10:00 8 9999999 02.01 2014/07/05 10:00
15 8888888 0501.01.00.00.00 2014/09/20 09:22 7 9999999 02.00 2014/07/04 10:00
14 9999999 4201.01.00.00.00 2014/09/11 10:00 6 9999999 02.01 2014/06/26 10:00
13 9999999 4003.01.00.00.00 2014/09/11 10:00 5 9999999 02.02 2014/05/01 10:00
12 9999999 4003.01.00.00.00 2014/09/11 10:00 4 9999999 02.03 2014/04/05 10:00
11 9999999 4003.01.00.00.00 2014/09/03 10:00 3 9999999 02.01 2014/02/21 10:00
10 9999999 4003.01.00.00.00 2014/08/15 10:00 2 9999999 02.00 2013/11/30 10:00
9
8 4003.01.00.00.00
9999999
9999999
4003.01.00.00.00 2014/08/11 10:00
4003.01.00.00.00 2014/07/05 10:00
1 9999999 02.02 2013/11/24 10:00
7 (a)
9999999 (b) (c) (d) 2014/07/04
4003.01.00.00.00 (e) 10:00
6 9999999 4003.00.00.00.00 2014/06/26 10:00
5 9999999 4003.00.00.00.00 2014/05/01 10:00
4 9999999 4003.00.00.00.00 2014/04/05 10:00
3 9999999 4003.00.00.00.00 2014/02/21 10:00
2 9999999 4003.00.00.00.00 2013/11/3010:00
1 9999999 4003.00.00.00.00 2013/11/24 10:00
(9) Service Call Log (11) Toner Log

# Count. Service Code Date and Time # Count. Item Serial Number Date and Time
8 9999999 01.00.0100 2014/07/05 10:00 5 9999999 01.00 0123456789ABCDEF 2014/05/01 10:00
7 9999999 02.01.0100 2014/07/04 10:00 4 9999999 01.00 0123456789ABCDEF 2014/04/05 10:00
6 9999999 01.01.0000 2014/06/26 10:00 3 9999999 01.00 0123456789ABCDEF 2014/02/21 10:00
5 9999999 01.00.0000 2014/05/01 10:00 2 9999999 01.00 0123456789ABCDEF 2013/11/30 10:00
4 9999999 01.01.0000 2014/04/05 10:00 1 9999999 01.00 0123456789ABCDEF 2013/11/24 10:00
3 9999999 02.00.0000 2014/02/21 10:00
2 9999999 02.00.0000 2013/11/30 10:00
1 9999999 01.00.0000 2013/11/24 10:00
Figure 6-1
6-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Detail of event log (2)
Event Log
MFP XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
ECOSYS MA2100cwfx (2) 2014/10/19 15:15
(1) Firmware version C0A_2000.000.000 2014.09.19 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
(3) (4) (5)
(6) Machine No.:Z6B0000000 (7) Life Count:100000
(12) Counter Log

(f) J0000 : 1 J0035 : 999
J0001 : 2 J0036 : 999
J0002 : 3 J0037 : 999
J0003 : 4 J0038 : 999
J0004 : 5 J0039 : 999
J0005 : 6 J0040 : 999
J0006 : 7 (g) C0001 : 1
J0007 : 8 C0002 : 2
J0008 : 9 C0003 : 3
J0009 : 10 C0004 : 4
J0010 : 20 C0005 : 5
J0011 : 30 C0006 : 6
J0012 : 40 C0007 : 7
J0013 : 50 C0008 : 8
J0014 : 60 C0009 : 9
J0015 : 70 C0010 : 10
J0016 : 80 C0011 : 11
J0017 : 90 C0012 : 12
J0018 : 100 C0013 : 13
J0019 : 110 C0014 : 14
J0020 : 120 C0015 : 15
J0021 : 130 C0016 : 16
J0022 : 140 C0017 : 17
J0023 : 150 C0018 : 18
J0024 : 160 C0019 : 19
J0025 : 170 C0020 : 20
J0026 : 180 CF245: 21 ( 0)
J0027 : 190 CF248: 22 ( 11)
J0028 : 200 CF345: 222 ( 111)
J0029 : 300 (h) T00 : 10
J0030 : 400 T01 : 20
J0031 : 500 T02 : 30
J0032 : 600 T03 : 40
J0033 : 700 M00 : 50
J0034 : 800 M01 : 60
J0035 : 900 M02 : 70
M03 : 80
M04 : 90
Figure 6-2
6-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Description of event log

No. Contents
(1) System version
(2) System date
(3) Engine firmware version
(4) Engine boot version
(5) Operation panel firmware version
(6) Machine serial number
(7) Machine life counter
6-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(8) Paper Jam Log

# Count. Event Descriptions Date and
Time
Remembers 1 to 16 of The total page count at the Log code ( 5 types in Date and
occurrence. time of a paper jam. hexadecimal) time of
occurrence
If the past paper jam
occurrence is less than 16,
(a) Cause of paper jam
all of them are indicated.
The oldest log is deleted (b) Paper source
when exceeding 16 events.
(c) Paper size
(d) Paper type
(e) Paper eject
(a)Detail of Cause of paper jam (Hexadecimal)
:Refer to "7-2 Paper Misfeed Detection" (see page 7-72),for the detail of Cause of
paper jam. (see page 7-74)
(b) Detail of paper source (Hexadecimal)
00: MP tray
01: Cassette 1
02: Cassette 2 (paper feeder)
3 to 09: Reserved
(c) Detail of paper size (Hexadecimal)

00: Not specified 0B: B4 22: Special 1
01: Monarch 0C: Ledger 23: Special 2
02: Business 0D: A5R 24: A3 Wide
03: International DL 0E: A6 25: Ledger Wide
04: International C5 0F: B6 26: Full bleed paper
05: Executive 10: Commercial #9 (12 x 8)
06: Letter-R 11: Commercial #6 27: 8K
86: Letter-E 12: ISO B5 28: 16K-R
07: Legal 13: Custom size A8: 16K-E
08: A4R 1E: C4 32: Statement-R
88: A4E 1F: Hagaki B2: Statement-E
09: B5R 20: Oufuku Hagaki 33: Folio
89: B5E 21: Oficio II 34: Youkei type 2
0A: A3 35: Youkei type 4
No. Contents Items
6-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(8) Paper Jam Log

cont. (d) Detail of paper type (Hexadecimal)
01: Plain 0A: Color 15: Custom 1
02: Transparency 0B: Prepunched 16: Custom 2
03: Preprinted 0C: Envelope 17: Custom 3
04: Labels 0D: Cardstock 18: Custom 4
05: Bond 0E: Coated 19: Custom 5
06: Recycled 0F: 2nd side 1A: Custom 6
07: Vellum 10: Media 16 1B: Custom 7
08: Rough 11: High quality 1C: Custom 8
09: Letterhead
(9) Service Call Log

# Count. Service Code Date and
Time
Remembers 1 to 8 th of The total page count at the Self diagnostic error code Date and
occurrence of self time of the self diagnostic time of
(see page 7-103)
diagnostics error. error. occurrence
If the occurrence of the
previous self-diagnostic Example: 01.6000
error is 8 or less, all of the
Self diagnostic error6000:
diagnostics errors are
Self diagnostic error code
logged.
number
6-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(10) Maintenance Log

# Count. Iem Date and
Time
Remembers 1 to 8 of Total page count at the time Maintenance item code (1- Date and
occurrence of unknown of the replacement of the byte value to indicate 2 time of
toner detection. If the maintenance item. items) occurrence
occurrence of the previous
unknown toner detection is
less than 8, all of the First byte (Replacing item)
unknown toner detection
The toner replacement log 01: Toner container
are logged.
is triggered by toner empty.
Second 1 byte
This record may contain
(replacement item type)
such a reference as the
toner container is inserted 00: Black
twice or a used toner
01: Cyan
container is inserted.
02: Magenta
03: Yellow
First byte (Replacing item)

02: Maintenance kit
Second 1 byte
(replacement item type)
01: -
No. Contents
6-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(11) Toner Log

# Count. Item. Serial Number Date and
Time
Remembers 1 to 32 of The total page count at the Unknown toner log code (1 Date and
occurrence of unknown time of the request of toner byte, 2 categories) time of
toner detection. If the container replacement. occurrence
First byte (Replacing item)
occurrence of the previous
unknown toner detection is 01: Genuine product
less than 32, all of the
02: Non-genuine product
unknown toner detection
are logged.
Second byte (Type of
replacing item)
00: Black
01: Cyan
02: Magenta
03: Yellow
Last 16 digits
Displays the serial number
of the toner container.
*: When detecting
nongenuine toner, no serial
number is displayed.
"0" is displayed if the serial
number is not registered in
the toner container.
6-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(12) Counter Log

(f) Paper jam (g) Self diagnostic error (h) Replacement for
maintenance Item
Indicates the log counter of Indicates the log counter of Indicates the log counter Consist of
paper jams depending on self diagnostics errors depending on the three log
location. depending on cause. maintenance replacing counters of
item. paper
Refer to Paper Jam Log.
jams, self
Example: C6000: 004 diagnostics
T: Toner container errors, and
All instances including Self diagnostic error 6000
maintenan
those not having occurred has happened four times. 00: Black
ce
are displayed.
01: Cyan replaceme
nt items.
02: Magenta
03: Yellow
M: Maintenance kit
01: -
Example: T00: 1
The toner container (Black)
has?been replaced once.
The toner replacement log

is triggered by toner empty.
This record may contain
such a reference as the
toner container is inserted
twice or a used toner
container is inserted.
6-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Detail of service status page (1)
(6)
Service Status Page [XXXXXXXXXX]
MFP (2) 2014/10/30 15:15
ECOSYS MA2100cwfx (3) (4) (5)
(1) Firmware Version C0A_2000.000.000 2014.10.30 [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX] [XXXXXXXX]
Controller Information
Memory status (28) FRPO Status
Standard Size 1.0 GB User Top Margin A1+A2/100 0.0
Option Slot 1.0 GB User Left Margin A3+A4/100 0.0
(7) Total Size 2.0 GB .
.
Time
(8) Local Time Zone .
+01:00 _Tokyo
(9) Date and Time .
10/30/2014 02:33
(10) Time Server .
10.183.53.13
.
Installed Options .
(
(11) Paper Feeder2 Installed .
(12) SD Card Not Installed .
(13) Card Authentication Kit (B) Installed .
(14) UG-33 Installed .
(15) USB Keyboard Installed .
(16) USB Keyboard Type US-English .
(17) Print Coverage .
Average(%) / Usage Page(A4/Letter Conversion) .
(18) Total .
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11 .
C: 2.20 / 2222222.22 .
M: 3.30 / 3333333.33 .
Y: 4.40 / 4444444.44
(19) Copy e-MPS error control Y6 0
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
C: 2.20 / 2222222.22 RP Code
M: 3.30 / 3333333.33 (29) 1234 5678 9012
Y: 4.40 / 4444444.44
(30) 5678 9012 3456
(20) Printer (31) 9012 3456 7890
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
C: 2.20 / 2222222.22 (32) 3456 7890 1234
M: 3.30 / 3333333.33
Y: 4.40 / 4444444.44
(21) FAX
K: 1.10 / 1111111.11
(22) Period (27/10/2010 - 03/11/2010 08:40)
(23) Last Page K/C/M/Y(%) 1.00 / 2.22 / 3.33 / 4.44
FAX Information
(24) Rings (Normal) 3
(25) Rings (FAX/TEL) 3
(26) Rings (TAD) 3
(27) Option DIMM Size 16MB
Figure 6-3
6-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Detail of service status page (2)
Service Status Page [ZE76100020]

MFP
ECOSYS MA2100cwfx 2016/03/09 19:45
Firmware Version C0A_2000.001.123 2016.02.18 [C0A_1000.001.083][2R7_1100.001.002] [2R7_4000.002.123]
Controller Information Engine Information

Print Settings (37) NVRAM Version _CR05A19_CR05A19
(33) MP Tray Priority MP Tray Priority (38) FAX Slot1 2NM_1200.001.089
(34) Altitude Adjustment FAX BOOT Version 2NM_5000.001.006
Status Normal FAX APL Version 2NM_5100.004.001
Send Information FAX IPL Version 2NM_5200.001.006
(39) MAC Address 00:17:C8:3B:41:7E
(35) Date and Time 14/03/05 15:30
(36) Address mail@bjd.ne.jp
1/4 (40) (41)

644/600 (42)
(43) -10/0/0/0/
(44) 0/0/-49/0
(45) 0/50/0/50/
(46) 0000064/0000000/0000064/0000000/
0000063/0000063/0000063/0000063/0000063/0000063/0000063/0000044/0000044/0000044/
F00/U00/0/1/0/0/1/25/27/30/0/0/25/25//5/1/0/ (47) (48) (49) (50) (51) (52) (53) (54) (55) (56) (57) (58) (59) (60) (61) (62) (63) (64)
(65) 1010/9000/2010/4000/3010/1010/4000/2010/1010/1010/5000/6000/3010/
5010/1010/1010/1010/1010/1010/1010/1010/1010/1010/
(66) 6A00/F000/9901/4302/E102/9903/E803/E803/7100/F200/8601/3D02/D902/9503/E803/E803/
7500/F500/8701/3A02/EA02/9103/E803/E803/7400/0001/A901/4E02/F602/7C03/C403/CE03/
(67) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(68) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000
(69) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(70) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(71) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(72) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(73) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(74) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(75) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/
(76) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(77) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(78) 0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/0000000000000000/000000000000/
(79) 0300A000/00000000/544B2D353234314B5300000000000000/36313246303335580000000000000000/0078/00/00
0300A000/00000000/544B2D35323431435300000000000000/36313246303136570000000000000000/0078/00/00
0300A000/00000000/544B2D353234314B5300000000000000/363132453236325A0000000000000000/0078/00/00
0300A000/00000000/544B2D35323431595300000000000000/36313245323931420000000000000000/0078/00/00
(80) /
(81) [2R7_81BR.001.008] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
[ ] [ ] (82) (83)
(84) 0284F60000/0258000000/00CF060005/000000FF00/5A00410022/0000003F00/00003F0000/003F000000/3F00001861/0000186100/
0018610000/1861000000/3F0000003F/0000000029/0028002300/2200900090/0028000002/0000EE02EE/02EE025203/0000002500/
0000250000/0025000000/310000002C/0000002C00/00002C0000/003F3C6E78/8CAA000186/A00000003D/00000101B0/0438048403/
8403840375/030302EF01/CC01EA0160/676D700105/0EFF39FEC7/004D00BCFE/DC01DE0159/FEA103EDFF/02FF1BFF0A/005800E5FF/
320082FE60/FE1BFF1500/2800D8FF54/FFA5FF5700/2100310000/000040
(85) 4/
1/0/5.0/12.0/ (86) (87) (88) (89)
0/5/ (90) (91)
0/0/15:47/0/ (92) (93) (94) (95)
(96) EPE00Z100025/EPF00Z100083/EPF00Z100178/EPF00Z100085/
(97) EPG00Z100059/EPK00Z100059/EPJ00Z100059/EPH00Z100059/
Figure 6-4
6-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
No. Items Contents

(1) Firmware Version -
(2) System date -
(3) Engine firmware version -
(4) Engine boot version -
(5) Operation panel firmware version -
(6) Machine serial number -
(7) Total memory size -
(8) Local time zone -
(9) Report output date Day/Month/Year hour : minute
(10) NTP server name -
(11) Availability of the paper feeder 2 Installed/Not Installed
(12) Availability of the SD memory card Installed/Not Installed
(13) Availability of the ID Card Introduced/ before introduction/trial

Authentication Kit
(14) Availability of UG-33 Introduced/ before introduction/trial
(15) USB keyboard connection status Connected/Not connected
(16) Type of the USB keyboard US-English/US-English with Euro symbol/German

France
(17) Page count converted to the A4/Letter Print Coverage provides a close-matching reference of
size toner consumption and will not match the actual toner
consumption.
(18) Entire average coverage Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(19) Average coverage for copy Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(20) Average printer coverage Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(21) Average coverage for FAX Black/Cyan/Magenta/Yellow
(22) Cleared date and output date -
(23) Coverage on the last output page -
(24) Number of rings 0 to 15
(25) Number of rings before automatic 0 to 15

switching
(26) Number of rings before connecting to 0 to 15
the answering machine
(27) Optional DIMM size -
(28) FRPO setting -
(29) RP code Coding the engine firmware version and the date of the
previous update.
(30) RP code Code the main software version and the date of the latest
update.
(31) RP code Coding the engine firmware version and the date of the
previous update.
(32) RP code Code the main software version and the date of the
previous update.
6-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
No. Items Contents

(33) MP tray priority setting Off/Auto/Always
(34) High altitude adjustment set data Normal/1001-2000m/2001-3000m/3001-3500m
(35) The last sent date and time -
(36) Transmission address -
(37) NVRAM version _ 1F3 1225 _ 1F3 1225

(a)(b)(c)(d)(e)(f)
(a) Consistency of the current firmware version and the
database
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(b) Database version
(c) The oldest time stamp of database version
(d) Consistency of the present software version and the
ME firmware version
_ (underscore): OK
* (Asterisk): NG
(e) ME firmware version
(f) The oldest time stamp of the ME firmware version
Normal if (a) and (d) are underscored, and (b) and (e) are
identical with (c) and (f).
(38) FAX firmware version -
(39) Mac address -
(40) Destination information -
(41) Area information -
(42) Margin setting Top margin/Left margin
(43) Top offset setting by paper source MP tray top offest / Paper feeder 2 top offset / Duplex top
offset
/ Top offset for rotated output
(44) Left offset setting by paper source MP tray left offset / Paper feeder 2 left offset / Duplex left
offset
/ Left offset for rotated output
(45) L parameters Top margin integer part/Top margin decimal part/Left
margin integer part /Left margin decimal part
(46) Life counter (cassette 1) Machine life/MP tray/Cassette/Paper feeder 1/Duplex
Life counter (cassette 2) Drum unit K/Drum unit C/Drum unit M/Drum unit Y/
Primary transfer unit/Developer unit K/Developer unit C/
Developer unit M/Developer unit Y/
Fuser unit
6-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
No. Items Contents

(47) Panel lock information F00: OFF
F01: Partial lock1
F02: Partial lock2
F03: Partial lock3
F04: Full lock
(48) USB information U00: Not Connected
U01: Full speed
U02: Hi speed
(49) Paper handling information 0: Paper source select
1: Paper source fixed
(50) Auto cassette change 0: OFF
1: ON (Default)
(51) Color printing double count mode 0: All single counts
3: Folio (Less than 330 mm length), Single counts
(52) Black and white printing double count 0: All single counts
mode
3: Folio (Less than 330 mm length), Single counts
(53) Billing counts timing 0: When secondary paper feed starts
1: When the paper is ejected
(54) Temperature (machine inside) -
(55) Temperature (machine outside) -
(56) Relative humidity (machine outside) -
(57) Absolute humidity (machine outside) -
(58) LSU humidity information -
(59) LSU 2 humidity information -
(60) DRT information -
(61) Asset Number -
(62) Job end judgment time-out time -
(63) Job end detection mode 0: Detects as one job, even if contained multiple jobs
1: Detects as individual job, dividing multiple jobs at a
break in job
(64) Prescribe environment reset 0: Off
1: On
6-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
No. Items Contents

(65) Media type attributes Weight settings Fuser settings
1 to 28 (Not used: 18, 19, 20) 0: Light 0: High
1: Normal 1 1: Middle
*: For details on settings, refer to
2: Normal 2 2: Low
MDAT command in "Prescribe
Commands Reference Manual". 3: Normal 3 3: Vellum
4: Heavy 1
5: Heavy 2 Duplex settings
6: Heavy 3 0: Disable
7: Extra Heavy 1: Enable
(66) IO Calibration information K/C/M/Y
(67) Bias Calibration information -
(68) Calibration information -
(69) Sensor initial information -
(74) Paper loop correction shift amount -
(75) Paper loop correction interval -
(76) Paper loop correction patch amount -
(79) RFID information (K,C,M,Y) -
(80) RFID reader/writer version -
(81) Optional paper feeder firmware version -
(82) Color table version -
(83) Color table 2 version -
(84) Maintenance information -
(85) MC correction 1 to 7
(86) Automatic judgment of the color 0: Off

conversion process
1: On
(87) Configuring the toner coverage 0: Full-color count display
counters
1: Color coverage count display
(88) Low coverage setting 0.1 to 100.0
(89) Middle coverage setting 0.1 to 100.0
(90) Toner low setting 0: Disabled

1: Enabled
(91) Toner low detection level 0 to 100 (%)
(92) Full-page print mode 0: Normal mode (Factory setting)

1: Full-page mode
6-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
No. Items Contents

(93) Wake-up mode 0: Off (Don't wake up)
1: On (Do wake up)
(94) Wake-up timer Displays the wake-up time
(95) BAM conformity mode setting 0: Non-conformity mode

1: Conformity Mode
(96) Drum serial number Black/Cyan/Magenta/yellow
(97) Developer serial number Black/Cyan/Magenta/yellow
Code conversion
A B C D E F G H I J
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
U001 Exiting the maintenance mode

(Message: Exit Mainte)
Contents
Exits the maintenance mode and returns to the normal copy mode.
Purpose
Exit the maintenance mode.
Method
2.The normal copy mode is entered.
U002 Set Factory Default

(Message: Set Factory Def)
Contents
Sets the machine initial setting values to the factory default.
Purpose
Executes the machine initial settings when shipping from factory.
Method
2.Select [Mode1(All)].
Items Contents
(No Action) No action
Mode1(All) Sets the machine initial setting values to the factory default.
4.Turn the power switch off.
6-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
*: An error code is displayed in case of the initialization error.

When errors occur, turn the power switch off then on, and execute initialization using maintenance
mode U002.
Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Error codes
Codes Contents
0001 Controller (Entity error)
0002 Controller (Counter error)
0003 Controller (OS error)
0020 Engine error
U004 Machine serial number

(Message: Machine No.)
Contents
Sets or displays the machine serial number.
Purpose
Checks the machine serial number
After the main/engine PWB replacement, execute if the "C0180 machine number mismatch" occurs.
Method
When the machine serial number in the engine PWB matches the one in the main PWB,
Items Contents
Machine No. Displays the machine serial number.
When the machine serial number in the engine PWB does not match the one in the main PWB,
Items Contents
Machine No.(Main) Displays the machine serial number in the main PWB.
Machine No.(Eng) Displays the machine serial number in the engine PWB.
Setting
Execute if the serial numbers do not match.
1.Select [Execute].
*: The serial number writing starts.
3.Turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power off and on.
Completion
U010 Setting the maintenance mode ID

(Message: Set Mainte ID)
Contents
Change the maintenance mode ID for service.
Purpose
Modify maintenance mode ID for service for more security.
6-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Method
2.Select the item to set.
*: The screen for setting is displayed.
Items Contents
Change Change the maintenance mode ID for service.
Initialize Initializes the maintenance mode ID for service.
Setting: Change
1.Select [New ID].
Items Contents
New ID Enter a new 8-digit maintenance ID
New ID(Reconfirm) Enter a new 8-digit maintenance ID (to confirm)
Execute Change the maintenance mode ID for service.
2.Press ten keys (0–9, *, #) to enter a new 8-digit ID.

*: Either [*] or [#] must be included.
3.Press the [Start] key to set the setting value.
4.Select [New ID(Reconfirm)].
5.Press ten keys (0–9, *, #) to re-enter the new 8-digit ID.
6.Select [Execute].
Method: Initialize
1.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Initializes the maintenance mode ID for service.
2.Press the [Start] key to initialize the maintenance mode ID.
Completion
Error codes
Codes Contents
0001 Do not include "#" or "*" in the ID.
0002 ID does not match.
0003 8-digit ID is not input
U019 Firmware Version

(Message: Firm Version)
Contents
Displays the firmware version installed in each PWB.
Purpose
Check the firmware version installed in each PWB
6-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Method
*: The firmware version is displayed.
2.Change the screen using the [Up/Down cursor] key.
Items Contents
Main Main firmware
MMI Operation firmware
Engine Engine firmware
Engine Boot Engine boot
Option Language 1 Optional language firmware 1
Color Table1 Color table 1
Color Table2 Color table 2
Completion
U021 Initializes Memory

(Message: Init Memory)
Contents
Initializes all settings, except those pertinent to the type of machine, namely each counter, service call error
history and mode setting. Also, initializes the backup RAM according to the area specification selected in
the maintenance mode U252 (Setting the destination).
Purpose
Initialize the backup data except machine settings to the factory default in the field
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Initialize data according to the destination information.

*: All data other than for adjustments is initialized by the destination setting.
*: An error code is displayed in case of the initialization error.
mode U021.
6-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Error codes
Items Contents
0001 Controller (Entity error)
0002 Controller (Counter error)
0020 Engine error
0040 Scanner error
Completion
U025 Firmware update (S)

(Message: Firm Update(S))
Contents
Executes Firmware-Update from the USB drive while "Very High" is selected in the Security Level settings
under the System Menu.
Supplement
Initiate the firmware upgrade by a service person by executing U025 while a USB drive is inserted
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Updates the firmware

*: This is not executable when a USB drive is not installed.
4.After normal completion, turn the power switch off then on. Wait more than 5 seconds between the power
off and on.
Completion
U034 Paper timing adjustment

(Message: Adj Paper Timing)
Contents
Adjust the leading edge registration or center line.
Purpose
Executed if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
Adjusted if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original.
Method
2.Select the item to adjust.
6-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
*: The screen for adjusting is displayed.
Items Contents
LSU Out Top Leading edge registration.
LSU Out Left Adjusts the center line
Adjustment: LSU Out Top

2.Press the [System Menu] key.
3.Press the [Start] key to output a test pattern.
Items Contents Setting range Initial Data

setting varia-
tion
Top Leading edge registration. 0 to 1180 600 0.1mm
MPT Adjust the leading edge timing for the MP -70 to 70 0 0.1mm
tray
Cass Adjusts the leading edge timing for -70 to 70 0 0.1mm
cassette feed
Dup Adjusting the leading edge timing when -70 to 70 0 0.1mm
duplex copying
5.Press the [◄] [►] keys or the numeric keys to change the counter value.
For the test pattern 1, increase the value.
For the test pattern 2, decrease the value.
*: When the setting value is increased, the image moves backward, and it moves forward when the set-
ting value is decreased.
A A
A
Center line
(within ± 1.0 mm)
Correct image Output Output

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-5
Precautions
Check the copy image after the adjustment. If the image is still incorrect, adjust the following in the mainte-
nance mode.
U034 > U066(P.6-27) > U071(P.6-31)
Adjustment: LSU Out Left

6-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

setting varia-
tion
Left Adjusts the center line 0 to 1180 600 0.1mm
MPT Adjust the center line for the MP tray -70 to 70 0 0.1mm
Cass1 Adjust the center line for cassette 1 feed -70 to 70 0 0.1mm
Cass2 Adjust the center line for cassette 2 -70 to 70 0 0.1mm

(Optional unit) feed
Dup Adjusting the center line when duplex -70 to 70 0 0.1mm
copying (Back page)
For the test pattern 1, increase the value.
For the test pattern 2, decrease the value.
*: When the setting value is increased, the image moves to right, and it moves to left when the setting
value is decreased.
Center line
(within ± 2.0 mm)
A A A
Correct image Output Output

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-6
Precautions
nance mode.
U034 < U067(P.6-28) < U072(P.6-32)
Completion
U065 Adjusting the magnification for table scanning

(Message: Adj Scn)
Contents
Adjust the magnification in the sub scanning direction of the table scanning.
Purpose
Adjusts the magnification in the sub scanning direction of the table scanning if the above incorrect.
Method
3.Place an original and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
6-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
5.Select [Sub Scan].

setting varia-
tion
Sub Scan Adjusts scanner magnification in the sub- -25 to 25 0 0.1%
scanning direction
For the copy example 1, increase the value.
For the copy example 2, decrease the value.
*: When the setting value is increased, the image get longer, and it shortens when the setting value is
decreased.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-7
Completion
U066 Adjusting the table scanning timing

(Message: Table Timing)
Contents
Adjusts the leading edge timing for the table scanning.
Purpose
Executed if there is a regular error between the leading edges of the copy image and original.
Adjustment

setting variation
Front Adjusts the scanner leading edge margin. -45 to 45 0 0.085 mm
6-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
*: When the setting value is increased, the image moves forward, and it moves backward when the set-
Leading edge registration of the copy image (+1.0/-1.5 mm or less)
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-8
Precautions
nance mode.
U034(P.6-24) > U065(P.6-26) > U066
Completion
U067 Adjusting the table scanning center line

(Message: Table Center)
Contents
Adjusts the center line for the table scanning.
Purpose
Adjusted if there is a regular error between the center lines of the copy image and original.
Adjustment

setting variation
Front Adjusts the scanner center line -40 to 40 0 0.085 mm
6-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
*: When the setting value is increased, the image moves to left, and it moves to right when the setting
value is decreased.
Center line of the copy image (within ± 2.0 mm)
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-9
[Note]
Condition of the center adjustment
In case if the value outside of the range below is notified by the auto adjustment or, the value outside of the range below
is entered by manual input in maintenance mode, etc.
Table scanning
In case of the value is outside of the range of -5 < = (U067 value) < = +5,
If the value is smaller than -5, fix it as a -5
If the value is larger than +5, fix it as a +5
Precautions
nance mode.
U034(P.6-24) > U065(P.6-26) > U067
Completion
U068 DP scanning position adjustment

(Message: DP Scn Start Pos)
Contents
Adjusts the starting position for scanning originals from the DP.
Execute test copy at the four scanning positions after adjustment.
Purpose
Adjust if the image fogging occurs because the scanning position is not proper when the DP is used
*: Execute U071 to adjust the timing of the DP leading edge when the scanning position is changed.
Method
6-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

setting variation
DP Read Adjusts the starting position for scanning -33 to 33 0 0.085 mm
originals.
Black Line Adjusts the scanning position for the test 0 to 3 0 -
copy originals.
Adjustment: DP Read
1.Select [DP Read].
*: When the setting value is increased, the image moves backward, and it moves forward when the set-
Adjustment: Black Line

1.Select [Black Line].
4.Set the original (the one of which density is known) in the DP and press the [System Menu] key.
5.Press the [Start] key to execute the test copy.
6.Perform the test copy at each scanning position with the setting value from 0 to 3 and check that no black
line appears and the image is normally scanned.
Completion
U070 DP magnification adjustment

(Message: Adj DP Motor)
Contents
Adjusting the magnification for DP scanning.
Purpose
Adjusted if the magnification is incorrect in the auxiliary scanning direction when the DP is used
Adjustment
3.Place an original on the DP and press the [Start] key to make a test copy.
*: Check the duplex scanning by setting [Duplex] when test copying.
Items Contents Setting Initial Data

range setting varia-
tion
Sub Scan (F) Adjusts the 1st side magnification in the sub- -25 to 25 0 0.1%
scanning direction when scanning in simplex
6-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
decreased.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-10
Completion
U071 Adjusting the DP leading edge Timing

(Message: DP Timing)
Contents
Adjusts the DP original scanning timing.
Purpose
Adjusted if there is a regular error between the leading or trailing edges of the original and the copy image
when the DP is used
Method

range setting variation
Front Head Leading edge registration. (Front page) -32 to 32 0 0.195
(mm)
Front Tail Trailing edge registration. (Front page) -32 to 32 0 0.195
(mm)
Adjustment: Front Head/Back Head

6-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-11
Precautions
Check the 2nd side after adjusting the 1st side. Adjust if necessary.
nance mode.
U034(P.6-24) > U071
Adjustment: Front Tail/Back Tail

decreased.
Original
Copy Copy
example 1 example 2
Figure 6-12
Completion
U072 Adjusting the DP original center

(Message: DP Center) *: MFP Only
Contents
Adjusts the DP original center line.
Purpose
Adjusted if there is a regular error between the center lines of the original and the copy image when the DP
is used
Adjustment
6-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>


setting variation
Front DP center line. (Front page) -40 to 40 0 0.085 mm
*: When the setting value is increased, the image moves to left, and it moves to right when the setting
value is decreased.
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-13
[Note]
Condition of the center adjustment
In case if the value outside of the range below is notified by the auto adjustment or, the value outside of the range below
is entered by manual input in maintenance mode, etc.
DP front side scanning
In case of the value is outside of the range of -5 < = (U067 value - U072 front side value) < = +5,
DP back side scanning
In case of the value is outside of the range of -5 < = (U072 back side value) < = +5,
Precautions
Check the 2nd side after adjusting the 1st side. Adjust if necessary.
nance mode.
U034(P.6-24) > U065(P.6-26) > U067(P.6-28) > U072
Completion
6-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U127 Clearing the transfer count

(Message: Clr Trans Cnt)
Contents
Display and clear the transfer counts for the transfer high-voltage output correction etc.
Purpose
Verifies the primary transfer counter value after replacement. Also, clear the counts after replacement.
Method
*: The transfer counter value appears.
Items Contents
Mid(Cnt) Displaying the primary transfer counter value
Clear Clears the primary transfer counter value
Method: Clear
1.Select [Clear].
*: Clears the primary transfer counter value.
Completion
U199 Fuser temperature

(Message: Fuser Temp)
Contents
Fuser temperature is displayed.
Purpose
Execute to check the fuser temperature.
Method
*: Fuser temperature is displayed.
Items Contents
Heat Edge Displays the heat roller edge temperature (°C)
Completion
U201 Initializing the touch panel *:

(Message: Init Touch Panel)
Contents
6-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Adjusts touch panel detecting positions.

Purpose
Correct and confirm the touch panel detecting positions, when the panel PWB or the operation panel is
replaced or if the detecting positions are not aligned.
Method
2.Select the item to execute.
*: The screen for executing is displayed.
Items Contents
Initialize Automatically corrects the touch panel display position
Check Checks the touch panel display position
Method: Initialize
1.Press the center of "+".
2.Press the center of "+".
6-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
3.Press the center of "+". +

4.The touch panel is automatically corrected after setting.
5.After finishing setting, the [Check] screen is automati-
cally displayed.
Method: Check
1.Press the indicated three "+", and then check the dis- +
play position.
2.Check that the gap of the X and Y axis of the displayed Initialize
coordinate is 6 or less.
*: If out of the specified value, select [Initialize] and +

press the [Start] key to return to Step.1.
+
Completion
U203 Check DP operation

(Message: Chk DP Ope)
Contents
Simulate the original conveying operation separately in the DP.
Purpose
Check the DP operation
Method
2.Place an original in the DP if running this simulation with paper.
3.Select the scan speed
Items Contents
Normal Speed Normal scanning (600dpi)
High Speed High speed scanning
Method: Normal Speed/High Speed
6-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
1.Select the item to operate.
Items Contents
CCD ADP With paper, a single-sided original is fed to the CCD
CCD ADP (Non-P) Without paper, a single-sided original is fed to the CCD (continuous
operation)
CIS(Non-P) *1 Without paper, a double-sided original is fed to the CIS (continuous
operation)

*: The operation starts.
3.To stop the operation, press the [Stop] key.
Completion
The screen for selecting a maintenance item No. is displayed.
U222 Setting the IC card type

(Message: Set IC Card Type) *: Only when the ID card is
installed
Contents
Sets the ID card type
Purpose
Change the type of ID card
Setting
Items Contents
Other Select when the ID card type is other than SSFC.
SSFC Select when the ID card type is SSFC.
*: Initial setting: Other

*: SSFC: Shared Security Formats Cooperation
Completion
U252 Destination
(Message: Set Dest)
Contents
Switch the operations and screens of the main unit according to the destination.
Purpose
Execute after initializing the backup RAM, in order to return the setting to the value before replacement or
initialization
6-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Method
Items Contents
Europe Metric Europe Metric
Inch Inch
Asia Pacific Asia Pacific
Australia Australia
China China
Korea Korea
*: Initial setting: Destination

*: Initializes according to the destination.
*: An error code is displayed when an error occurs.
mode U252.
Error codes
Items Contents
0001 Controller (Entity Error)
0002 Controller error
0020 Engine error
0040 Scanner error
U253 Switching the double/single counts

(Message: Set D/S Count)
Contents
Switches the count timing for the total counter and other counters by color mode. (Single/Double Count)
Purpose
Select, according to user's request (copy service provider), if the maximum size paper is to be counted as
one sheet (single count) or two sheets (double count)
Setting
2.Select [B/W].
Items Contents
Color Switch the counter for full color mode
B/W Switch the counter for B/W mode
6-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
3.Select [SGL(All)] or [DBL(Folio)].
Items Contents
SGL(All) Sets single count for all the paper sizes
DBL(Folio) Set double count for Folio size or larger
*: Initial setting: DBL(Folio)
Completion
U260 Select Copy Count

(Message: Set Count Mode)
Contents
Switches the count timing for the total counter and other counters between paper feed and eject.
Purpose
Change the count timing according to the user's request
Setting
2.Selects the copy count timing.
Items Contents
Feed When secondary paper feed starts.
Eject Selects the paper eject timing
*: Initial setting: Eject

Completion
U285 Set Service Status Page

(Message: Set Svc Sts Page)
Contents
Determines whether to display the digital dot coverage report on the report print.
Purpose
Change the setting according to the user's request
Setting
Items Contents
On Displays the digital dot coverage.
Off Not to display the digital dot coverage.
*: Initial setting: On
6-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
3.Press the [Start] key. Set the setting value.
Completion
4.Press the [Stop] key.
U287 Set Auto Reset Function

(Message: Set Reset Func)
Contents
Enables/disables the auto recovery function after service call error or system error.
Purpose
Sets to enable/disable the auto recovery function after service call error or system error.
Setting
Items Contents
C0XXX Enable/disable the auto recovery after error
C1XXX Enables/disables the auto recovery function after C1xxx error
CFXXX Enable/disable the auto recovery after CF error
Completion
4.Press the [Stop] key.
U326 Black line cleaning display setting

(Message: Set Clean Bk Line)
Contents
Sets whether to indicate the black lines cleaning guidance when detecting black lines.
Purpose
Displays the cleaning guidance to reduce the service call with the black lines by dust on the contact glass
when scanning from the document processor.
Method
6-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Items Contents
Black Line Mode Sets On/Off of the black line cleaning guidance indication
Setting: Black Line Mode

Items Contents
On Indicate the black lines cleaning guidance
Off Black line cleaning guidance is not indicated
Completion
U332 Adjusting the black coverage coefficient

(Message: Adj Calc Rate)
Contents
Sets the coefficient of custom size with A4/Letter size. The coefficient set here is used to convert the black
ratio in relation to the A4/Letter size and to display the result in the service status page.
Sets the coverage counter for color copy and color print and the coverage threshold.
Purpose
Set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for custom sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size
Setting
Items Contents Setting range Initial set-

ting
Rate Set the coefficient for converting the black ratio for 0.1 to 3.0 1.0
custom sizes in relation to the A4/Letter size.
Mode Switch full-color count and color coverage count 0: Full color 1.0
display
1: Color coverage
Level1 Low coverage threshold value 0.1 to 99.8 10
Display: 1.0
Level2 Middle coverage threshold value 0.1 to 99.8 25
Display: 2.5
6-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Completion
U346 Selecting Sleep Mode

(Message: Slct Sleep Mode)
Contents
Changes the sleep mode settings.
Purpose
Changes the sleep mode settings.
Method
Items Contents
Timer/Sleep Level BAM conformity country setting
Auto sleep Switches AutoSleep function setting
Setting: Timer/Sleep Level

Items Contents
More Energy Save BAM conformity setting On
Sleep mode is disabled (Quick Recovery setting is disabled)
Less Energy Save BAM conformity setting Off
Sets Sleep Level (Quick Recovery or Energy Saver)
*: Initial setting: More Energy Save

Setting: Auto sleep

Items Contents
On The sleep mode is enabled from the system menu.
Off The sleep mode is disabled from the system menu.
Completion
6-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U402 Adjusting the printing margins

(Message: Print Margin)
Contents
Adjusts the scan image margins.
Purpose
Make the adjustment if margins are incorrect
*: If the leading edge margin is less than the specified value, it may cause jam at the fuser.
*: If there is no bottom margin, when continuously printing, it may cause an image smudge on the second
page.
Adjustment

setting varia-
tion
Lead Adjusts the printer leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.1 mm
A Margin Printer left margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.1 mm
C Margin Printer right margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.1 mm
Trail Printer trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.9 0.1 mm
*: When the setting value is increased, the margin widens, and it narrows when the setting value is
decreased.
Leading edge margin

(4.0 +1.5/-0mm)
Left margin Right margin

(Within 4.0mm) (Within 4.0mm)
Trailing edge margin

(Within 4.0mm)
Figure 6-14

Precautions
Appropriate margins are not obtained after this adjustment, execute the following maintenance mode.
U034(P.6-24) > U402
Completion
6-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U403 Adjusting margins for scanning an original on the contact

glass
(Message: Adjust Scanning Margin(Table))
Contents
Adjusts the margins for the table scanning.
Purpose
Adjustment

setting varia-
tion
A Margin Adjusts the scanner left margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm
B Margin Adjusts the scanner leading edge margin. 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm
C Margin Adjusts the scanner right margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm
D Margin Adjusts the scanner trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.0 0.5mm
decreased.
Leading edge margin

(4.0 +1.5/-0mm)


(Within 4.0mm)
Figure 6-15
Precautions
nance mode.
U034(P.6-24) > U402(P.6-43) > U403
Completion
6-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U404 Adjusting margins for scanning an original from the docu-

ment processor
(Message: Scan Margin DP)
Contents
Adjusts the margins for DP scanning.
Purpose
Adjustment

tion
A Margin Adjusts the DP left margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5mm
B Margin Adjusts the DP leading edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 2.5 0.5mm
C Margin Sets the DP right margin 0.0 to 10.0 3.0 0.5mm
D Margin Adjusts the DP trailing edge margin 0.0 to 10.0 4.0 0.5mm
decreased.
Leading edge margin

(4.0 +1.5/-0mm)


(Within 4.0mm)
Figure 6-16
Precautions
nance mode.
U034(P.6-24) > U402(P.6-43) > U403(P.6-44) > U404
Completion
6-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U407 Adjusting the writing timing (Duplex/Reversal)

(Message: WR DR Timing)
Contents
Adjusts the writing timing when duplex printing.
Purpose
Adjusted when the back page image of duplex copying is printed in rotated 180 degrees from the scanner
reading image (image on the memory)
Precautions
Adjust this after finishing the following maintenance modes.
U034(P.6-24) > U402(P.6-43) > U66(P.6-27)>
U403(P.6-44) > U71(P.6-31) > U404(P.6-45) > U407
Adjustment
5.Select [Adj Data].

setting varia-
tion
Adj Data Adjusts the leading edge timing when -47 to 47 0 1dot
writing the image in the memory
Leading edge registration of the copy image (+1.0/-1.5 mm or less)
Original Copy Copy

example 1 example 2
Figure 6-17
Completion
6-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U411 Scanner auto adjustment

(Message: Auto Adj Scn) *: MFP Only
Contents
Uses the specified originals and automatically adjusts the following items in the scanner and the DP scan-
ning sections.
Scanner section:Original size magnification, leading edge timing, center line, chromatic aberration in main/
sub scanning direction, MTF correction, color/monochrome input gamma, color correction matrix automatic
adjustment
DP scanning section: Original size magnification, leading edge timing and center line, MTF correction, Input
gamma, automatic adjustment of color correction matrix
Purpose
Automatically adjusts the scanner and the DP scanning sections.
Items Contents Original for adjustment

(P/N)
Table (Chart Automatically adjusts the table scanning. 302NM94340
A)
Scanning timing
( Leading edge timing / Center line /
Sub-scanning direction )
Input gamma correction coefficient for color
Color correction matrix coefficient
Black line detection correction value
LED light intensity adjustment
Tentative white reference correction
coefficiency
DP Execute the 1st side automatic adjustment
FU(ChartA) in the DP scanning section.

Input gamma correction coefficient for
monochrome
DP Execute the 2nd side automatic adjustment
FD(ChartA) in the DP scanning section.

6-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Items Contents Original for adjustment

(P/N)
DP Execute the 1st side automatic adjustment 302NM94330
FU(ChartB) in the DP scanning section.
DP Execute the 2nd side automatic adjustment
FD(ChartB) in the DP scanning section.
Magnification in the sub-scanning direction

Leading edge timing
Center line
Trailing edge timing
Target Set-up for obtaining the target value 302NM94340
*: Cut the trailing edge of the DP adjustment original (ChartB) as shown below.
80
65
Method: Table (Chart A)

Automatic input of the target value
*: Usually, it adjusts here.
1.Set the specified original (P/N: 302NM94340) on the table.
2.Enter maintenance item U411.
3.Select [Target].
4.Select [Auto].
6.Select [Table(ChartA)].
7.Press the [Start] key to read the barcode of the original chart and to start the automatic adjustment.
8.When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed.
*: When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the table scanning and the bar-
code is not read, adjust the following after manually inputting the target value.
Manual input of the target value

1.Enter the target values which are shown on the lower part of the front page of the adjustment original (P/
N: 302NM94340) by executing the maintenance mode U425.
2.Set the specified original (P/N: 302NM94340) on the table.
4.Select [Target].
5.Select [U425].
7.Select [Table(ChartA)].
8.Press the [Start] key to start Auto adjustment.
If the image position is shifted largely at the DP adjustment below, an error might occur when adjust-
ing it with ChartA. First, use ChartB (image position) to adjust it and then use ChartA (color).
Method: DP FU (Chart B)
6-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
*: Adjusting the first side of the DP duplex scanning

1.Set the specified original (P/N: 302NM94330) face-up on the DP.
3.Select [DP FU(ChartB)].
Method: DP FD (Chart B)
*: Adjusting the second side of the DP duplex scanning
1.Set the specified original (P/N: 302NM94330) face-down on the DP.
3.Select [DP FD(ChartB)].
Method: DP FU (Chart A)
3.Select [Target].
4.Select [Auto].
6.Select [DP FU(ChartA)].
*: When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the DP scanning and the barcode
is not read, adjust the following after manually inputting the target value.

4.Select [Target].
5.Select [U425].
7.Select [DP FU(ChartA)].
Method: DP FD (Chart A)
1.Set the specified original (P/N: 302NM94340) face-down on the DP.
3.Select [Target].
4.Select [Auto].
6.Select [DP FD(ChartA)].
*: When the error code "1e" or "1f" is displayed during the automatic adjustment in the DP scanning and the barcode
is not read, adjust the following after manually inputting the target value.

6-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

4.Select [Target].
5.Select [U425].
7.Select [DP FD(ChartA)].
*: When automatic adjustment has normally completed, [OK] is displayed. If an error occurs during auto
adjustment, error code "NGXX" is displayed and operation stops. In this case, check the error and exe-
cute the automatic adjustment again.
Error codes
Codes Contents Corrective action

00 Automatic adjustment success -
01 Black band detection error 1. Set the original correctly and

(Table scanning leading edge skew in the execute the adjustment again.
sub-scanning direction) 2. Check lighting of the lamp or
replace it.
04 Black band is not detected (Table leading
edge in the sub-scanning direction)
05 Black band is not detected (Table far end in
the main scanning direction)
06 Black band is not detected (Table near end
in the main scanning direction)
07 Black band is not detected (Table trailing
08 Black band is not detected (DP far end in 1. Check the attachment position of
the main scanning direction) DP.
09 Black band is not detected (DP near end in 2. Check lighting of the lamp or
the main scanning direction) replace it.
0a Black band is not detected (DP leading 3. Check the back and front of the
edge in the sub-scanning direction) adjustment original.
0b Black band is not detected
(Original check of DP leading edge in the
sub-scanning direction)
0c Black band is not detected (DP trailing
0d White band is not detected (DP trailing
0e DMA time out Turn the power switch off then on,
and execute again.
6-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Codes Contents Corrective action

0f Magnification error in the sub-scanning 1. Turn the power switch off then
direction on, and execute again.
10 Leading edge error in the sub-scanning 2. Adjust manually.
direction (U065 to U067, U070 to U072)
11 Trailing edge error in the sub-scanning
direction
12 DP skew error in the sub-scanning direction
13 Maintenance request error Turn the power switch off then on,
and execute again.
14 Center line error in the main scanning 1. Turn the power off and on, and
direction execute again.
15 DP skew error in the main scanning 2. Adjust manually.
direction (U065 to U067, U070 to U072)
16 Magnification error in the main scanning
direction
17 Service call error Turn the power off and on, and
execute again.
18 DP paper jam error Set the original correctly and exe-
cute again.
19 PWB replacement error -
1a Original error 1. Clean the contact glass and slit

glass.
2. Exchange the adjustment origi-
nal.
1b Input gamma adjustment original error Set the original correctly and execute
again.
1c Matrix adjustment original error
1d Original for the white reference correction

coefficient error
1e Lab value detection error Check the following and execute
again.
Is the bar code dirty?
Is the original position correct?
Is the bar code position correct?
1f Lab value comparison error Check the following and execute
again.
Is the acquired bar code the same?
Is the original position correct?
Is the bar code position correct?
20 Input gamma correction coefficient error Set the original correctly and execute
again.
21 Color correction matrix coefficient error
30 Chromatic aberration adjustment original

error
50 White reference correction ratio error Set the original correctly and execute
again.
63 Completed to obtain the test RAW -
6-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Completion
U425 Set Target

(Message: Set Target Adjustment Value)
Contents
Enter the lab values which are shown on the back page of the adjustment original (P/N: 302NM94340).
Purpose
Enter data in order to correct for differences in originals during the automatic adjustment
Method
Items Contents
ChartA Setting the adjustment value of the table scanning
ChartB Sets the adjustment value of the DP scanning
Method: ChartA
Items Contents
White Setting the white patch for the adjustment original
Black Setting the black patch for the adjustment original
Gray1 Setting the Gray1 patch for the adjustment original
C Setting the cyan patch for the adjustment original
M Setting the magenta patch for the adjustment original
Y Setting the yellow patch for the adjustment original
R Setting the red patch for the adjustment original
G Setting the green patch for the adjustment original
B Setting the blue patch for the adjustment original
Adjust Original Setting the main scanning and sub-scanning directions
Setting: White
2.By using [Left/Right cursor] keys or the numeric keys, enter the values which are shown on the back page
of the adjustment original.

setting variation
L L parameter setting 0.0 to 100 93.6 -
6-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

setting variation
a A value setting -200 to 200 0.9 -
b B value setting -200 to 200 -0.4 -
Setting: Black

setting variation
a A value setting -200 to 200 -0.2 -
Setting: Gray1

setting variation
b B value setting -200 to 200 1.2 -
Setting: Gray2

setting variation
Setting: Gray3
6-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

setting variation
Setting: C

setting variation
Setting: M

setting variation
Setting: Y

setting variation
Setting: R
6-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

setting variation
Setting: G

setting variation
Setting: B

setting variation
Setting: Adjust Original

*: This setting is usually unnecessary.

setting variation
Lead Set the adjustment value of the 4.0 to 6.0 5.0 0.1mm
leading edge.
Main Scan Sets the adjustment value of the 9.0 to 11.0 10.0 0.1mm
left edge.
Sub Scan Set the adjustment value of the 265.0 to 267.0 266.0 0.1mm
trailing edge.
1.Measure the distances "A", "B" and "C" from the upper edge of black belt 1 to the lower edge of black belt
3 of the adjustment original.
Measurement procedure
1) Measure the distance "A", "B" and "C" between two points as follows. (A: 30mm from the left edge, B:
6-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
105mm from the left edge, C: 180mm from the left edge)
?Measure the distance from the leading edge to the top edge of black belt 1.
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: ((A+B+C)/3)
2.Enter the value solved in "Lead" using the [◄] [►] keys keys.
4.Measure the distance "F" from the left edge to the right edge of black belt 2 on the adjustment original.
Measure the distance "F" from the left edge at 21mm from the top edge of black belt 1to the right edge of
black belt 2.
5.Enter the values measured in "Main Scan" using the [◄] [►] keys.
7.Measure the distance "D" and "E" from the top edge of black belt 1 to the bottom edge of black belt 3 on
the adjustment original at two positions.
1) Measure the distance "D" and "E" between two points as follows. (D: Measure the distance from the
leading edge to the trailing edge of black belt 3 on the adjustment original at 30mm of the left edge and
deduct A. E: Measure the distance from the leading edge to the trailing edge of black belt 3 on the
adjustment original at 180mm of the left edge and deduct C.)
2) Apply the following formula for the values obtained: (D/2+E/2)
8.Enter the value solved in "Sub Scan" using the [◄] [►] keys keys.
30mm 105mm 180mm Black belt 1

A B C Leading edge
21mm
Black belt 2 D E
Left edge
[Dist1] = (A+B+C)/3
[Dist2] = F
[Dist3] = D/2+E/2
Original for adjustment Black belt 3

(P/N: 302NM94340)
Figure 6-18
Setting: DP(ChartB)
*: This setting is usually unnecessary.

setting variation
Lead Set the adjustment value of the 14.0 to 16.0 15.0 0.1mm
leading edge.
Main Scan Sets the adjustment value of the 14.0 to 16.0 15.0 0.1mm
left edge.
Sub Scan Set the adjustment value of the 265.0 to 269.0 267.0 0.1mm
trailing edge.
1.Measure the distance "A" from the leading edge to the black belt (inside) on the adjustment original.
2.Enter the values measured in "Lead" using the [◄] [►] keys.
6-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
3.Measure the distance "B" from the left edge to the black belt (inside) on the adjustment original.
4.Enter the values measured in "Main Scan" using the [◄] [►] keys.
5.Measure the distance "C" from the leading black belt (inside) to the trailing black belt (inside) on the
adjustment original.
6.Enter the values measured in "Sub Scan" using the [◄] [►] keys.
B
Original for adjustment

(P/N: 302NM94330)
Figure 6-19
Completion
U520 TDRS setting

(Message: Set TDRS)
Contents
Checks/sets the TDRS
Purpose
Execute to check/set the TDRS
Method
Items Contents
Registration *1 Changes to the TDRS Manager registration dialog
Information *1 Transition to the Device Agent description dialog
On/Off Config Changes to the TDRS features setting dialog
*1: displayed only when TDRS function is enabled.
Setting: Registration
6-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Items Contents
TDRS User Registering process for user and password
Access Code Registers Access Code
Setting: TDRS User

Items Contents
Regist Registers in the TDRS Manager
TDRS Server Sets the TDRS server URL
TDRS User Sets the TDRS Username
Proxy Server Sets the TDRS proxy server URL
Proxy Port Sets the TDRS proxy port number
Proxy User Sets the TDRS proxy username
Text Sets the TDRS description
Setting: Access Code

Items Contents
Regist Registers in the TDRS Manager
TDRS Server Sets the TDRS server URL
Access Code Sets the TDRS access code
Proxy Server Sets the TDRS proxy server URL
Proxy Port Sets the TDRS proxy port number
Proxy User Sets the TDRS proxy username
Text Sets the TDRS description
*: [Regist] is not executable if a USB drive is not installed.

*: When the USB drive is inserted, TDRS information is automatically retrieved and displayed.
After obtaining the TDRS information, select [Regist] and then register the TDRS information by press-
ing the [OK] or [Start] key.
*: After the normal completion, [Complete] is indicated in the status information of the item that was per-
formed.
When an error occurs, the following numbers are indicated in the status information of the item that has
been operated.
*: If [User/Processing Registration using a Password] is selected in the previous dialog, the "TDRS User"
will be indicated.
If [Processing Registration using an Access Code] is selected, the "Access Code" will be indicated.
Error codes
Items Contents Items Contents

e0001 HDD is unavailable. t0001 Fatal error
e0002 The USB drive is unavailable. t0002 Error in processing the network
e0003 The file to import does not exist in t0003 An illegal parameter error
the USB drive.
e0004 Reading from the USB drive has t0004 Insufficient resource
failed.
6-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Items Contents Items Contents

e0005 Unmounting the USB drive has t0005 Communication error
failed.
e0006 Moving or renaming the file has t0006 Error in processing
failed. communication.
e0007 Opening the file has failed. t0007 Login error
e0008 Closing the file has failed. t0008 External error
e0009 Error in reading the file t0009 Authentication error
e000A Copying the file has failed. t000A HTTP error: Request error
e000B Opening the directory has failed. t000B HTTP error: Error due to the server
e000C Creating the working directory has t000C HTTP error: Error due to the client.
failed.
e000D Deleting the working file has failed.
Setting: Information
1.Displays the set contents.
Items Contents
Agent ID Agent ID
Agent Type Agent Type
Model Displays the model name.
Serial No Display of the machine serial number
Offline Display of the TDRS connection state
Setting: On/Off Config

Items Contents
On Enables TDRS
Off Disables TDRS
*: Initial setting: Off

Completion
U600 Initialize: All Data

(Message: Initialize: All Data)
Contents
Initializes software switches, and all data and image memory in the backup data on the FAX PWB accord-
ing to the destination and OEM setting.
Initializes the file system and then initializes the communication record and the registered contents if the file
system is checked and an error is detected there.
Purpose
Initialize the FAX PWB
Method
6-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
2.Select [Execute].
*: The screen for entering the country code and OEM code is displayed.
Items Contents
Execute Executing data initialization
3.Select [Country Code] and enter a country code using the numeric keys.
*: Refer to the following country code list.
Items Contents
Country Code Setting Country code
OEM Code Sets the OEM code
*: No need to change the default value of [OEM Code].

Press the [Stop] key to cancel the data initialization.
5.The firmware version is displayed after the data initialization.
The firmware version of 3 types of application, boot and IPL is displayed.
*: When initialization is successful, "Completed" is displayed for one second.

*: Where an irregular value is input, when it initializes, the following errors are displayed.
Kind of error
Unknown Country (When Country Code is unknown)
Unknown OEM (When OEM Code is unknown)
Unknown Country (When both are unknown)
Country code list

code code
181 North America*2
Completion
6-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U601 Initialize: Keep data

(Message: Initialize: Keep Data)
Contents
Initializes software switches other than the machine data on the FAX PWB according to the destination and
OEM setting.
Purpose
Initialize the FAX PWB without changing the user registration data and the factory defaults
Method
2.Select [Execute].
*: The screen for entering the country code and OEM code is displayed.
Items Contents
Execute Executing data initialization
3.Select [Country Code].

*: Refer to the country code list. (see page P.6-59)
Items Contents
Country Code Setting Country code
OEM Code Sets the OEM code
*: No need to change the default value of [OEM Code].

Press the [Stop] key to cancel the data initialization.
6.The firmware version is displayed after the data initialization.
The firmware version of 3 types of application, boot and IPL is displayed.
U603 User data 1

(Message: User Data 1)
Contents
Sets the line type for FAX use
Purpose
Execute as required
Method
2.Select [Line Type].
Items Contents
Line Type Line Type
Items Contents
DTMF DTMF
10PPS 10PPS
6-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Items Contents
20PPS 20PPS

*: Completed is displayed.
Completion
U604 User data 2

(Message: User Data 2)
Contents
Sets the number of rings for the automatic FAX/telephone switching for FAX use
Purpose
Adjust the number of rings to longer or shorter at the automaric FAX/telephoe switching
Method
2.Select [Rings(F/T)].
Items Contents Setting Initial setting

range
Rings (F/T) Number of fax/telephone rings 0 to 15 -
*: If the default is set to "0", the main unit will start FAX reception without any ringing.
Completion
U605 Data clear

(Message: Clear Data)
Contents
Initializes data related to the fax transmission such as transmission history or various ID.
Purpose
Clear the communication history
Method
2.Select [Clear Com.Rec.].
Items Contents
Clear Com.Rec. Delete data of communication history and protocol list of displayed port

6-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Completion
U610 System 1
(Message: System Setting 1)
Contents
Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100% magnification and in the auto reduction
mode.
Method
Items Contents
Cut Line: A4 Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax (A4R/LetterR)
in the auto reduction mode.
Cut Line: 100% Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 100%
magnification.
Cut Line: Auto Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the auto reduction
mode.
Setting: Cut Line: A4

Set the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacity
when the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode onto A4R or Letter R paper.
If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, the entire data
on a page is further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page.
Contents Setting Initial Data

tion
Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the A4R 0 to 22 0 -
auto reduction mode.
*: Increase the setting value if a page received in the reduction mode is reduced too much with the trail-
ing edge margin. Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image.
Setting: Cut Line(100%)

Sets the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capac-
ity when recording the data at 100% magnification.
If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If it is over the setting, they are
recorded on the next page.

tion
Set the number of lines to be ignored when receiving a fax at 0 to 22 3 -
100% magnification.
6-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
*: Increase the setting value if a blank second page is output in the full magnification reception. Decrease
the value if there is dropout in received image.
Setting: Cut Line: Auto
Set the maximum number of lines to be ignored if the received data volume exceeds the recording capacity
when the data is recorded in the auto reduction mode.
If the number of excess lines is below the setting, those lines are ignored. If over the setting, the entire data
on a page is further reduced so that it can be recorded on the same page.

tion
Number of lines to be ignored when receiving in the auto 0 to 22 0 -
reduction mode.
*: Increase the setting value if a page received in the reduction mode is reduced too much with the trail-
ing edge margin. Decrease the value if there is dropout in received image.
Completion
U611 System 2
Contents
Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
Purpose
Method
Items Contents
Adj lines Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction.
Adj lines(A4) Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 paper is
set.
Adj lines(LT) Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size
paper is set.
Setting: Adj lines


tion
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction. 0 to 22 7 -
6-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Setting: Adj lines(A4)


tion
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when A4 0 to 22 22 -
paper is set.

Setting: Adj lines(LT)

Sets the number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when letter size paper is set.

tion
Number of adjustment lines for automatic reduction when 0 to 22 26 -
letter size paper is set.

Completion
U612 System 3
Contents
Sets the FAX operation and automatic printing of the protocol list.
Method
6-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Items Contents
Auto reduct Selects auto reduction in the sub-scanning direction
Protocol List Sets the automatic protocol list printing.
Setting: Auto Reduct

Sets whether to receive a long document by automatically reducing it in the sub-scanning direction or at
100% magnification.
Items Contents
On Auto reduction is executed if the received document is longer than the
FAX paper.
Off Auto reduction is not performed.

Setting: Protocol List

Sets the automatic protocol list printing.
Items Contents
Off The protocol list is not printed out automatically.
Err Automatically printed if a communication error occurs.
On Automatically printed out after communication.

Completion
U620 FAX system

(Message: FAX System)
Contents
Sets the signal detection method for remote switching.
Change the setting according to the type of telephone connected to the main unit.
Purpose
Sets the remote switching conditions according to the user's telephone type, preference, etc.
Setting
6-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
2.Select [Remote Mode] and press the [Start] key.
Items Contents
Remote Mode Setting the remote switching mode
Items Contents
One Sets the one-shot type detection
Cont Sets the continuous type detection
*: Initial setting: One

Completion
U625 Communication settings

(Message: Set Communication)
Contents
Sets the auto redialing interval and the number of times of auto redialing.
Purpose
FAX transmission may not be available if redialing interval is short. If long, it takes much time to complete
transmission. Changes the setting to prevent the following problems.
Method
Items Contents
Interval Sets the auto redialing interval
Times Sets the number of times of auto redialing
Setting: Interval

tion
Sets the redialing interval 1 to 9 minutes 3 -
minutes

Setting: Times

tion
Sets the number of times of redialing 0 to 15 times 3 times -
6-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Completion
U630 Communication control procedures 1

(Message: Communication Control 1)
Contents
Sets the FAX communication.
Purpose
Sets the following to correspond to field claims
Reducing the transmission time to improve the accuracy of reception when using a low quality line
Improving the accuracy of communication during the international communication
Method
Items Contents
TX Speed Sets the communication starting speed.
RX Speed Sets the reception speed.
TX Echo Sets the waiting period to prevent echo problems at the sender.
RX Echo Sets the reception speed.
Setting: TX Speed
Sets the transmission speed of the sender. When the destination unit has the V.34 capability, V.34 is
selected for transmission regardless of this setting.
1.Select the communication speed.
Items Contents
14400bps/V17 V.17 14400bps
9600bps/V29 V.29 9600bps
4800bps/V27ter V.27ter 4800bps
2400bps/V27ter V.27ter 2400bps
*: Initial setting: 14400bps/V17

Setting: RX Speed
Sets the reception capacity to advise the transmitter by the DIS/NSF signal. When the destination unit has
the V.34 capability, V.34 is selected for transmission regardless of this setting.
6-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
1.Select the reception speed.
Items Contents
14400bps V.17, V.33, V.29, V.27ter
9600bps V.29, V.27ter
4800bps V.27ter
2400bps V.27ter (fallback only)
*: Initial setting: 14400bps

Setting: TX Echo
Sets the time to send the DCS signal after the DIS signal is received. Execute when an error occurs with
echo at the transmitter side.
Items Contents
500 Sends the DCS 500 ms after receiving a DIS.
300 Sends the DCS 300 ms after receiving a DIS.
*: Initial setting: 300

Setting: RX Echo
Sets the time to send the NSF, CSI or DIS signal after the CED signal is received. Execute when an error
occurs with echo at the receiver side.
Items Contents
500 Sends the NSF, CSI or DIS 500ms after receiving the CED.
75 Sends the NSF, CSI or DIS 75ms after receiving the CED.
Completion

Contents
Purpose
Sets the transmission and reception of ECM
Sets the CED frequency
6-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Method
Items Contents
ECM TX Sets ECM transmission.
ECM RX Sets ECM reception.
CED Freq The frequency of CED is set up.
Setting: ECM TX
Set to OFF when the reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality.
*: Do not set it to Off when connecting to the IP telephone line.
Items Contents
On ECM transmission is enabled.
Off ECM transmission is disabled.
Setting: ECM RX
Set to OFF when the reduction of transmission costs is of higher priority than image quality.
*: Do not set it to OFF when connecting to the IP (Internet Protocol) telephone line.
Items Contents
On ECM reception is enabled.
Off ECM reception is disabled.
Setting: CED Freq

Set the frequency of CED. Execute it as one of the communication accuracy improvement measures for the
international communication.
Items Contents
2100 2100Hz
1100 1100Hz

Completion
6-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Contents
Purpose
Reducing the error communication when using a low quality line
Corresponds to field claims when automatic FAX/telephone switching
Method
Items Contents
DIS 4Byte Sets the DIS signal to 4 bytes.
Num OF CNG(F/T) Sets the number of the CNG detection in the automatic FAX/telephone
switching mode.
Setting: DIS 4Byte

Sets whether to send bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal.
Items Contents
On Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are not sent.
Off Bit 33 and later bits of the DIS/DTC signal are sent.

Setting: Num OF CNG(F/T)

Sets the CNG detection times in the automatic FAX/telephone switching mode.
Items Contents
1Time Detects CNG once.
2Time Detects CNG twice.
*: Initial setting: 1Time (100 V model)/2Time (Others)

Completion
6-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Contents
Purpose
Reducing the error communication when using a low quality line
Method
Items Contents
V.34 Enables or disables the V.34 communication.
V.34-3429Hz Sets the V.34 symbol speed (3429 Hz).
DIS 2Res Sets the number of times of DIS signal reception.
RTN Check Sets the reference for the RTN signal output.
Setting: V.34
Sets whether to enable/disable the V.34 communication individually for transmission and reception.
Items Contents
On V.34 communication is enabled for both transmission and reception.
TX V.34 communication is enabled for transmission only.
RX V.34 communication is enabled for reception only.
Off V.34 communication is disabled for both transmission and reception.
Setting: V.34-3429Hz
Sets if the V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.
Items Contents
On V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is used.
Off V.34 symbol speed 3429 Hz is not used.
6-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Setting: DIS 2Res

Sets the number of times to receive the DIS signal to once or twice. Execute it as one of the corrective
measures for transmission errors and other problems.
Items Contents
Once Responds to the first signal.
Twice Responds to the second signal.
*: Initial setting: Once

Setting: RTN Check

Sets the error line rate to be a reference to the RTN signal transmission. If transmission errors occur fre-
quently due to the line quality, lower this setting to reduce them.
Items Contents
5% Error line rate of 5%
*: Initial setting: 15%

Completion

Contents
Sets the maximum number of error bytes judged acceptable when receiving a TCF signal. Execute it as
one of measures to ease transmission conditions if transmission errors occur.
Purpose
*: Relax the communication conditions
Setting
2.Select [TCF Check].
Items Contents Setting range Initial

setting
TCF Check Sets the allowed error bytes when detecting 1 to 255 0
the TCF signal
6-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Completion
U640 Communication time setting 1

(Message: Communication Time 1)
Contents
Sets the detection time when one-shot detection is selected for remote switching.
Sets the detection time when continuous detection is selected for remote switching.
Purpose
Sets the remote switching conditions according to the user's telephone type, preference, etc.
Method
Items Contents Setting Initial

range setting
Time(One) Sets the one-shot detection time for 0 to 255 7
remote switching.
1 (New Zealand)
Time (Cont) Sets the continuous detection time for 0 to 255 80
remote switching.

Completion
U641 Communication time setting 2

(Message: Communication Time 2)
Contents
Sets the time-out time for the fax communication.
Purpose
Mainly, executed to improve the accuracy of communication for international communication
Method
Items Contents
T0 TIME OUT Sets the T0 time-out time.
Ta TIME OUT Sets the Ta time-out time.
6-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Items Contents
Tb1 TIME OUT Sets the Tb1 time-out time.
Tb2 TIME OUT Sets the Tb2 time-out time.
Tc TIME OUT Sets the Tc time-out time.
Td TIME OUT Sets the Td time-out time.
Setting: T0 Time Out

Sets the time before detecting a CED or DIS signal after a dialing signal is sent.
Sets to prevent disconnection of a line that occurs depending on the quality of the exchange, or when the
destination unit sets the auto switching function.
Contents Setting Initial

range setting
Sets the T0 time-out time. 30 to 90 s 56
58 (100 V model)


Sets the time before receiving the correct signal after call reception.
*This setting is usually unnecessary.

range setting
Sets the T1 time-out time. 30 to 90 s 36
38 (100 V model)


The T2 time-out time is specified as follows.
From CFR signal output to image data reception
From image data reception to the next signal reception
In ECM, from RNR signal detection to the next signal reception

range setting
Sets the T2 time-out time. 1 to 255 69

Setting: Ta Time Out

Sets the time to start ringing for an operator through the external telephone after receiving a call in the FAX/
telephone automatic switching mode. (See figure 1-3-18). If either receiving a FAX signal within this time or
6-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
passing this time, the mode automatically switches to the FAX reception mode. Execute when a reception
error occurs when in the automatic FAX/telephone switching.

range setting
Sets the Ta time-out time. 1 to 255 s 30

Start of fax recept

as a fax machine
Line connection
Ring back tone

Ring detection
send start
Rings
Tb1 Ta
Tb2
Figure 6-20 Ta/Tb1/Tb2 time-out time
Setting: Tb1 Time Out

Sets the time to start sending the ring back tone after receiving a call as a fax machine in the FAX/tele-
phone automatic switching mode, (See figure 1-3-18). Execute when a reception error occurs when in the
automatic FAX/telephone switching.

range setting
Sets the Tb1 time-out time. 1 to 255 20

Setting: Tb2 Time Out

Sets the time to start ringing for an operator through the external telephone after receiving a call in the FAX/
telephone automatic switching mode. (See figure 1-3-27). Execute when a reception error occurs when in
the automatic FAX/telephone switching.

range setting
Sets the Tb2 time-out time. 1 to 255 80

Setting: Tc Time Out

In the TAD mode, set the time to check if there are any triggers for shifting to FAX reception after a con-
nected handset receives a call. Unless switched to FAX reception during this period, operated as a normal
phone after this.
6-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
In the TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a
call.

range setting
Sets the Tc time-out time. 1 to 255 s 60

Setting: Td Time Out

Sets the length of time to determine silent status, one of the triggers for Tc time check.
In the TAD mode, change the setting when fax reception is unsuccessful or a telephone fails to receive a
call. Be sure not to set too short, otherwise the mode may be switched to fax while the unit is being used as
a telephone.

range setting
Sets the Td time-out time. 1 to 255 6
30 (100 V model)
9 (120V model)

Completion
U650 Modem 1
(Message: Modem 1)
Contents
Sets the G3 cable equalizer. Sets the modem detection level.
Purpose
Adjusts the equalizer to be compatible with the line characteristics
Set to Improve the accuracy of communication when using a low quality line
Method
Items Contents
Reg G3 TX Eqr Sets the G3 transmission cable equalizer.
Reg G3 RX Eqr Sets the G3 reception cable equalizer.
RX Mdm Level Sets the modem detection level.
6-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Setting: Reg G3 TX Eqr

1.Select [0dB], [4dB], [8dB] or [12dB].
*: Initial setting: 0dB
Setting: Reg G3 RX Eqr

1.Select [0dB], [4dB], [8dB] or [12dB].
*: Initial setting: 0dB
Setting: RX Mdm Level

1.Select [-33dBm], [-38dBm], [-43dBm] or [-48dBm].
*: Initial setting: -43dBm
Completion
U651 Modem 2
(Message: Modem 2)
Contents
Sets the modem output level.
Purpose
Adjust to make the equalizer compatible with the line characteristics when installing the main unit
Setting
Items Contents Setting Initial

range setting
Sgl LVL Modem Sets the modem output level -15 to 0 11
10 (100 V model)
12 (Australia)
DTMF LEV DTMF output level (center value) -15.0 to 0.0 -8
(Cent) -9 (100 V model)
-7 (Australia)
-6 (120V model)
DTMF LEV (Diff) Sets the DTMF output level (level 0 to 5.5 2
difference)
1.5 (Australia)
1 (New Zealand)

6-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Completion
U660 Ring setting

(Message: Set Calls)
Contents
Sets the NCU (network control unit).
Purpose
Execute as required
Method
Items Contents
Exchange Setting the PBX/PSTN connection
Dial Tone Sets the PSTN dial tone detection.
Busy Tone Sets the busy tone detection.
PBX Setting Setting the PBX connection
DC Loop Sets the loop current detection before dialing.
Setting: Exchange
Selects if the FAX is connected to either a PBX or public switched telephone network.
Items Contents
PSTN Connected to the public switched telephone network.
PBX Connecting to the PBX
*: Initial setting: PSTN

Setting: Dial Tone

Selects whether or not to check for a dial tone to check if the telephone is off the hook when a fax is con-
nected to a public switched telephone network.
Items Contents
On The dial tone is detected.
Off The dial tone is not detected.
6-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Setting: Busy Tone

Sets whether the line is disconnected immediately after a busy tone is detected, or the busy tone is not
detected and the line remains connected until T0 time-out time, when a FAX signal is sent.
FAX transmission may fail due to incorrect busy tone detection. When setting it to OFF, this problem may
be improved. However, the line is not disconnected within the T0 time-out time even if the destination line is
busy.
Items Contents
On Detects the busy tone.
Off Does not detect the busy tone.
*: Initial setting: On/Off (Australia)

Setting: PBX Setting

Selects the mode to connect an outside call when connected to a PBX.
*According to the type of the PBX connected, select the mode to connect an outside call.
Items Contents
Flash Flashing mode
Loop Code number mode
*: Initial setting: Loop

Setting: DC Loop
Sets if the loop current is detected before dialing.
Items Contents
On Detects the loop current before dialing.
Off Detects the loop current before dialing.
Completion
6-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U670 List output

(Message: Output List)
Contents
Outputs the list of fax communication data.
*: Printing a list is disabled either when a job is remaining in the buffer or when [Pause All Print Jobs] is
pressed to halt printing.
Purpose
Check conditions of use, settings and transmission procedures of the FAX.
Method
4.Output selected list.
Items Contents
Sys Conf Report Prints the list of software switches, local telephone number, confidential
boxes, firmware versions and other information.
Action List Prints the list of the error logs and communication lines.
Self Sts Report Prints the list of FAX communication settings only in the maintenance
mode (self-status report).
Protocol List Outputs a list of communication procedures.
Error List Output the error list.
Addr List(No.) Outputs address book in the IDs order
Addr List(Idx) Outputs address book in the order of names.
One-touch List Outputs a list of one-touch.
Group List Outputs the group list.
Completion
U695 FAX function customization

(Message: Customize FAX Function)
Contents
FAX package transmission is set up. Changes print size priority when receiving small size.
Purpose
Execute as required
Method
Items Contents
FAX Bulk TX FAX batch transmission is set up.
A5 Pt Pri Chg Change of print size priority at the time of small size reception.
Setting: FAX Bulk TX
6-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
1.By using [◄] [►] keys, select [On] or [Off].
Items Contents
On FAX batch transmission is enabled.
Off FAX batch transmission is disabled.
Setting: A5 Pt Pri Chg

1.By using [◄] [►] keys, select [On] or [Off].
Items Contents
On At the time of A5 size reception: A5 >B5 >A4 >B4 >A3
Off At the time of A5 size reception: A5 >A4 >B5 >A3 >B4
2.Initial setting: Off

Completion
U699 Software switch: Set

(Message: Set: Soft SW)
Contents
Sets the software switches on the FAX PWB individually.
Purpose
Change the setting when a problem such as split output of received originals occurs
*: Since the communication performance is largely affected, normally this setting need not be changed.
Method
2.Select [SW No.].
3.Enter the desired software switch number (3 digits) using the numeric keys and press the [Start] key.
Items Contents
SW No. Specifies the software switch number (2 to 3 digits)
4.Press the keys of bit 0 to 7 to switch each bit between 0 and 1.
Items Contents
Bit Set the software switch bit (8bit).

Completion
List of software switches which can be configured
6-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Communication control procedures
No. Bit Contents

36 7654 Coding format in transmission
3210 Coding format in reception
37 5 33600bps/V34
4 31200bps/V34
3 28800bps/V34
2 26400bps/V34
1 24000bps/V34
0 21600bps/V34
38 7 19200bps/V34
6 16800bps/V34
5 14400bps/V34
4 12000bps/V34
3 9600bps/V34
2 7200bps/V34
1 4800bps/V34
0 2400bps/V34
41 3 FSK detection in V.8
42 4 4800 bps transmission when low-speed setting is active
2 FIF length when transmitting DIS/DTC signal 4 times or

more
Communication time setting
No. Bit Contents

53 76543210 T3 timeout setting
54 76543210 T4 timeout setting (auto transmission)
55 76543210 T5 timeout setting
60 76543210 Time before transmission of CNG (1100 Hz) signal
63 76543210 T0 timeout setting (manual transmission)
64 7 Phase C timeout in ECM reception
66 76543210 Timeout 1 in countermeasures against echo
68 76543210 Timeout for FSK detection start in V.8
Modem setting
No. Bit Contents

89 76543 RX gain adjust
NCU setting
No. Bit Contents

121 7654 Dial tone/busy tone detection pattern
122 7654 Busy tone detection pattern
6-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
No. Bit Contents

1 Busy tone detection in FAX/TEL automatic switching
125 76543210 Registering the access code for connection to PSTN
126 7654 Ring back tone ON/OFF cycle for the automatic FAX/
telephone switching
68 76543210 Timeout for FSK detection start in V.8
Calling time setting
No. Bit Contents

133 76543210 DTMF signal transmission time
134 76543210 DTMF signal pause time
141 76543210 Ringer detection cycle (minimum)
142 76543210 Ringer detection cycle (maximum)
143 76543210 Ringer ON time detection
144 76543210 Ringer OFF time detection
145 76543210 Ringer OFF time undetected
147 76543210 Dial tone detection time (continuous tone)
148 76543210 Allowable dial tone interruption time
149 76543210 Time for transmitting selection signal after closing the
DC circuit
151 76543210 Ringer frequency detection invalid time
U910 Black rate data

(Message: Clr Coverage Dat)
Contents
Clears the accumulated data for the print coverage per A4 size paper and its period of time (as shown on
the service status page).
Purpose
Clears data as required at the time such as maintenance
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Clears the print coverage data.
3.Press the [Start] key to clear the print coverage data.
Completion
6-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U917 Read/Write Backup Data

(Message: R/W Bkup Data)
Contents
Retrieves the backup data to a USB drive from the main unit, or writes the data from the USB drive to the
main unit.
Purpose
Makes a back up of the main unit information, and import or export to restore the main unit information
Setting
1.Turn the power switch off.
3.Turn the power switch on.
*: Wait for about 10 seconds until the main unit recognizes a USB drive.
Items Contents
Import Imports data from the USB drive to the main unit.
Export Retrieving data from the main unit to the USB drive.
Method: Import/Export
Items Contents Depending data*

Address Address book -
information
Job Accnt Job accounting -
information
One Touch One-touch key Address book information
information
User User management Job accounting information
information
Document Document box Job accounting, User information
information
Fax Fwd FAX forward information Job accounting, User, Document Box information
System System setting -

information
Network Network setting -
information
Job Set Job setting information -
Printer Printer setting -

information
Fax Set FAX setting information -
Program Program information Information of Address book, Job accounting, User

management, Document box, FAX transfer and FAX
setting
Panel Set Panel setting Information of Address book, Job accounting, User
information management, Document box, FAX transfer, FAX
setting and Program
2.Press the [Start] key. Starts reading or writing.
6-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
*: The progress of selected item is displayed in %.

*: When an error occurs, the operation is canceled and an error code appears.
3.[Finish] appears after normal completion.
4.When selecting [Import], turn the power switch off then on, after completing writing. Wait more than 5 sec-
onds between the power off and on.
Error codes
Codes Contents
e000 Unspecified error
e0001 Parameter error
e0002 Generating a dummy file has failed.
e0003 The XML file to import does not exist
e0004 The exported file does not exist
e0100 to e01ff Error in handling addressbook
e0200 to e02ff Error in handling One-touch
e0300 to e03ff Error in handling user management
e0400 to e04ff Error in handling panel program data
e0500 to e05ff Error in handling forwarding FAX data
e0600 to e06ff Error in handling the system configuration
e0700 to e07ff Error in handling network parameters
e0800 to e08ff Error in handling job accounting
e0900 to e09ff Error in handling short-cuts
e0a00 to e0aff Error in handling job information
e0b00 to e0bff Error in handling FAX data
e0c00: toe0cff Error in handling printer data
e0d00 to e0dff Error in handling panel data
e0e00 to e0eff Error in handling document boxes
e1000 to e1fff Error in the device-related process
e2000 to e2fff Error in handling SOAP IF
e3000 to e3fff Error in handling KM-WSDL IF
e4000 to e4fff Error in process for import

(e4002) A file mandatory for importing is missing
(e4008) Invalid file header
e5000 to e5fff Error in the SOAP data rewriting process
Completion
U920 Billing counter

(Message: Chg Cnt)
Contents
Displays the billing count.
6-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Purpose
Execute to check the current billing counts
Method
2.Select the item to display.
*: Switched to each display screen.
Items Contents
Col Copy H Color copy counts (Coverage: High)
Col Copy M Color copy counts (Coverage: Middle)
Col Copy L Color copy counts (Coverage: Low)
B/W Copy B/W copy count is displayed.
Col Prn H Color print counts (Coverage: High)
Col Prn M Color print counts (Coverage: Middle)
Col Prn L Color print counts (Coverage: Low)
B/W Prn B/W print count is displayed
B/W FAX FAX count
Simplex Simplex print count is displayed
Duplex Duplex print count is displayed
Comb(Off) Combine print counts (Off) is displayed
Comb(2in1) Combine print counts (2in1) is displayed
Comb(4in1) Combine print counts (4in1) is displayed
Completion
U927 Clearing all the billing/life counters

(Message: Clear All Charge/Life Counter (one time only))
Contents
Clears all charge counts and machine life counts.
Supplement
The total charge counts and the machine life counts can be cleared only once if all count values are 1000 or
less.
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Initializes the billing count and machine life count.

*: Clears all charge counts and machine life counts.
Completion
6-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

U928 Machine life counter

(Message: Machine Life Counter)
Contents
The current machine life counts is displayed.
Purpose
Executed to check the machine life count
Method
*: The current machine life counts is displayed.
Items Contents
Cnt Displays the machine life count
Color Cnt Displays the color machine life count
Completion
U964 Log check
Contents
Transfer the log files save in the internal memory to a USB drive.
*: Transfer screenshots at log and log acquisition.
Purpose
Transfer the log file saved in the internal memory to a USB drivey for investigation when a failure occurs.
Method
1.Check the LED display is off and turn the power switch off.
3.Turn the power switch on.
5.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Transfer the log file.

*: Starts transferring the log files saved in the HDD to a USB drive.
[Processing] is displayed. (About 3 to 5 minutes)
7.[Completed] appears after normal completion.
*: An error code appears when there is an error.
6-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Supplement
How to retrieve the log when the operation panel freezes
Log retrieving starts when pressing four keys on the operation panel (*, 8, 6, Clear) for 3 to 6 seconds.
The memory lamp is blinking during retrieving and turns off when completed.
The log retrieved this way can be saved in a USB drive.
Error codes
Display Contents
No USB Storage The USB drive is not installed
No File No file
Mount Error USB drive mount error
File Delete Error Failed to delete existing files in the USB drive
Copy Error HDD to USB drive copy failure
Unmount Error USB drive unmount error
Other Error Other error
Completion
U977 Setting the data capture mode

(Message: Set Data Capture)
Contents
Stores the data sent to the main unit into a USB drive.
Purpose
Store the data sent to the main unit into a USB drive to check it.
Method
2.Select [Execute].
Items Contents
Execute Stores data in a USB drive.

*: When the operation is completed abnormally, an error code is displayed.
Error codes
Items Contents
1 USB drive is broken. USB drive was disconnected during data
processing or is write-protected.
4 USB drive is full.
50 Other error occurs
Completion
6-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
6-2 Service modes

The machine is equipped with a maintenance function which can be used to maintain and service the machine.
6-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(1) Executing the service mode
[Message Display]
Ready to copy
1. Press the System Menu Key.
Report
Counter
System/Network
User Login/Job Accounting

Common Setting
Copy
Printer
Send
FAX
Document Box
Application
Edit Distination 3. Select [Service Setting] using
the [▲] [▼] keys.
Adjust/Maint. Adjust/Maint.:
Copy Denst. Adj.
Send/Box Density
2. Select [Adjustment/Maintenance]
using the [▲] [▼] keys. Contrast
Color Calibration
Color Regist.
4. Select the item to be set
Correct. Bk Line Service Status
Service Setting Network Status
Test Page
Developer Setting
Laser Scanner Cln
Drum Refresh
Altitude Adj.
MC
FAX Country Code
Remote Diag.Set.
Remote Diag. ID
Memory Diagnostics
6-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Service settings
Items Contents page

Service Status Outputs the service status page. P.6-92
Network Status Outputs the network status page. P.6-92
Test Page Outputs the test page formed in halftone P.6-92
DEV-CLN Execute developer refreshing. P.6-93
LaserScanner Cln Cleans the dust proof glass of the laser scanner. P.6-94
Drum Refresh Cleans the drum surface. P.6-94
Altitude Adj. Sets the altitude adjustment mode. P.6-94
MC Sets the main charger output. P.6-95
FAX Country Code Initializes all data and image memory. P.6-95
Remote Diag.Set. Sets the remote diagnostics P.6-96
Remote Diag. ID Sets the remote diagnostics ID P.6-96
Mem.Diagnostics Diagnose memory at power-up (whether reading and writing P.6-96

are executable).
(1-1) Descriptions of service modes

Service Status
Contents
Output the service status page.
Purpose
Use to retrieve the information of the environmental setting and service data.
Method
1.Enter the Service Setting menu.
2.Using the [▲] [▼] key, select [Service Status].
3.Press the [OK] key.
4.Select [Yes] by the [Left select] key.
Output the service status page.
*: Refer to maintenance mode U000 for detailed contents. (see page P.6-24)
Completion
Select [Exit] by the [Right select] key.
Network Status
Contents
Outputs the network status page.
Purpose
Acquires the network setting information.
Method
2.Using the [▲] [▼] key, select [Network Status].
6-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Outputs the network status page.
Completion
Test Page
Contents
Outputs the test page in each of 4 colors formed in 3-level halftone.
Purpose
Outputs the test page to judge the cause is at the engine or scanner when an image failure occurs.
Method
2.Using the [▲] [▼] key, select [Test Page].
4.Select [Yes] by the [Left select] key. Outputs the test page.
16/256
Density*2 24/256 Black
32/256
Cyan
Magenta
Green*1
(Yellow)
Figure 6-21
*1: It is hard to identify the focus on the single yellow and cyan is mixed to make green.
*2: Formed in each color in 3-level halftone. If the focus shift is large, dots are not formed in 16/256 part and
the image density becomes uneven. Also, the white or black vertical line appears in 24/256 or 32/256 part.
Completion
DEV-CLN
Contents
The laser output of the image data, exposure, developing and primary transfer is executed for ten pages
equivalent. (Paper is not fed)
Purpose
Execute when the image failure or problem in the developer unit occurs
Method
6-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
2.Using the [▲] [▼] key, select [DEV-CLN].

5.Execute developer refreshing.
Completion
LaserScanner Cln
Contents
The cleaning pad is operated by the LSU cleaning motor and cleans the LSU dust-proof glass.
Purpose
Execute if vertical lines appears on image.
Method
2.Using the [▲] [▼] key, select [LaserScanner Cln].
4.Select [Yes] by the [Left select] key. Executes the laser scanner cleaning.
Completion
Drum Refresh
Contents
Toner is thinly spread to the entire drum and it is rotated about 2 minutes. The cleaning blade inside the
drum unit scrapes off toner to clean the drum surface.
Purpose
Cleans the drum surface if an image failure occurs from the drum factor. Effective to execute when conden-
sation occurs on the drum.
Method
2.Using the [▲] [▼] key, select [Drum Refresh].
4.Select [Yes] by the [Left select] key. Execute Drum refreshing.
Completion
Altitude Adj.
Description
Sets the altitude adjustment mode.
Purpose
Execute when print quality deteriorates in the installation at the altitude of 1,500 meters or higher
6-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Method
2.Using the [▲] [▼] key, select [Altitude Adj.].
4.Using the [▲] [▼] keys, select [Normal], [1001 - 2000m], [2001 - 3000m] or [3001 - 3500m].
5.Press the [OK] key to set the setting value.
Completion
MC
Description
Sets the main charger output.
Purpose
Execute when the image density declines, dirt of a background or an offset has occurred.
Method
2.Using the [▲] [▼] key, select [MC].
4.Using the [▲] [▼] key, select the setting "1" to "7".
Completion
FAX Country Code
Contents
Initializes software switches, and all data and image memory in the backup data on the FAX PWB accord-
ing to the destination and OEM setting.
Purpose
To initialize the FAX PWB.
Method
2.Using the [▲] [▼] key, select [FAX Country Code].
4.Enter the country code using the numeric keys.
6.Press the [OK] key. Data initialization starts.
Country code list

code code
6-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

code code
181 North America*2
Completion
Remote Diag.Set.
Contents
Sets the remote diagnostics
Purpose
Executed to remotely diagnose the main unit from the service center when a problem arises.
Method
2.Using the [▲] [▼] key, select [Remote Diag.Set.].
4.Select [On].
Completion
Remote Diag. ID
Contents
Sets the remote diagnostics ID
Purpose
An ID is registered to remotely diagnose the main unit from the service center when a problem arises.
Method
2.Using the [▲] [▼] key, select [Remote Diag. ID].
3.Press the numeric keys to input the pre-designated remote diagnostic ID (0000-9999).
Completion
6-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Mem.Diagnostics
Contents
Diagnose memory at power-up (whether reading and writing are executable).
Purpose
Check if the memory device is defective that may cause an unresolvable F-code error, locking or abnormal
images. Checks the memory failure.
Method
2.Using the [▲] [▼] key, select [Mem. Diagnostic].
4.Select [Start] by the [Left] key.
Completion
6-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
7 Troubleshooting
7 - 1 Image formation failure
Isolate the place of the image failure occurrence.
<How to isolate the cause>
Print Test Page to check an image failure.
[System Menu] > [Adjustment/Maintenance] > [Service Setting]
Yes: engine factor
No: Scanner factor
Check if image failure is enlarged or reduced in the zoom mode.
Yes: Scanner factor
1. Scanner factor: Refer to [Image failure at Copy or Send](see page7-2).

(LED lamp for originals on the contact glass --> CIS failure at scanning factor)
Isolate with the original scanning position.

a. DP surface, on the contact glass (scan by the main unit CIS)
b. DP back side (scan by DPCIS)
2. Refer to image failure with engine factor (see page7-38).

(Main charge --> Drum --> LSU --> Developer --> Primary transfer image formation process failure)
<Image data flow>
Copying :
APC PWB
LED lamp CCD Main/Engine PWB
(LSU)
Sending :
LED lamp CCD Main/Engine PWB PC
Printing data from PC :

APC PWB
Printer driver Main/Engine PWB
(LSU)
7-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
(1)Scanner Factors (When scanning the front side through the DP)
No. Contents Image sample

(2-1) Abnormal image
(2-2) Background is colored
(2-3) Black dots or color dots
(2-4) Blurred characters
(2-5) Center of the original and output image is

inconsistent
(2-6) Horizontal black streaks
(2-7) Vertical streaks or bands (black, color)
7-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

(2-8) Regular inconsistence in the leading edge
image between the original and output
(2-9) Vertical streaks or bands (white)
(2-10) Moire
(2-11) Entire blank image (white or black)
(2-12) A part of the image is dark or light
(2-13) Image is blurred
(2-14) Part of the image is not copied
7-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

(2-15) Color shift
(2-16) Skewed image
(2-17) The entire image is light
7-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
Content of Scanner Factors (when scanning from DP)

(1-1)Abnormal image
(When scanning the front side through the DP)
Step Check description Assumed cause Measures Reference

1 Checking the connection The FFC is not properly Reconnect the following FFC.
connected, or it is faulty. When the FFC terminals are
peeled off, deformed or the
FFC is broken, replace the
FFC.
• CIS - Main/engine PWB
(YC18)
2 Checking the scanner The CIS is faulty. Replace the scanner carriage
carriage and execute U411
[Table(ChartA)] and [DP
FU(ChartA)].
3 Main/engine PWB The main/engine PWB is Replace the main/engine
replacement faulty. PWB.
(1-2)Background is colored

1 Setting Background The Background Density Set [Manual] at [Copy] >
Density Adjustment Adjustment is not set. [Functions] > [Background
Density Adj.] and adjust the
background density.
2 Setting Background The original background Set [Manual] at [Copy] >
Density Adjustment density is dark. The [Functions] > [Background
background density Density Adj.] and adjust the
adjustment is dark. background density.
3 Checking the original The original is raised at Set the original during
scanning. pressing.
4 Checking the contact glass The shading plate is dirty. Clean the shading plate at the
backside of the contact glass.
5 Executing U411 The image is not adjusted. When the same phenomenon
occurs at the table scanning
too, execute U411
[Table(ChartA)].
6 Checking the home The home position sensor Reattach the home position
position sensor is not properly attached. sensor.
FFC.
(YC18)
8 Checking the slit glass The slit glass is dirty or not Reattach or clean the slit
properly attached. glass.
9 DP replacement The DP frame is deformed Replace the document
or the DP hinges are faulty. processor.
7-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

10 Scanner carriage The LED or CIS is faulty. Replace the scanner carriage
replacement and execute U411
FU(ChartA)].
(1-3)Black dots or color dots


1 Checking the original The original is dirty. Replace the original.
2 Checking the slit glass The slit glass is dirty. Clean the slit glass.
3 Checking the scanner Dust adheres on the Clean the scanner carriage.
carriage scanner carriage.
4 Checking the main/engine The main/engine PWB is Reconnect the wires on the
PWB faulty. main/engine PWB. At that
time, repair or replace them if
pinched by another part if
damaged. When not repaired
after that, replace the main/
engine PWB.
(1-4)Blurred characters

1 Checking the original The originals out of Explain users to use the
specification are used. original within the
(They are thick, thin, or specifications.
smooth.)
2 Checking the original The leading edge of the Stretch the bending or the
original is bent. paper creases of the original.
3 Checking the DP The DP conveying roller A, Clean the DP conveying roller
conveying roller A, B and B or the bushings are dirty. A, B and the bushings.
the bushings
4 Checking the DP The original conveying Reattach the DP conveying
conveying pulley pulley does not rotate pulleys and the pressure
smoothly. springs.
5 Checking the DP drive The DP drive components Reattach the DP drive
components are not properly attached. components.
6 Checking the scanning The scanning guide is Replace the scanning guide.
guide deformed.
7 Checking the DP The document processor is Check the positioning of the
not properly installed on the document processor and
main unit. tighten the screws again.
7-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
(1-5)Center of the original and output image is inconsistent


1 Checking the original The originals are not Reset the originals.
properly set on the original
tray.
2 Executing U072 The center line when Adjust U072 [Front].
scanning the front page of
the originals at the
document processor is not
adjusted.
3 Executing U411 The auto scanner Execute U411 [DP FU(Chart
adjustment when DP B)].
scanning is not executed.
(1-6)Horizontal black streaks


3 Executing U072 Adjust U072 [Back]. Adjust U072 [Front].
4 Executing U411 The image at the backside Execute U411
of the size indication plate [Table(ChartA)].
is scanned.
(The adjustment value of
[Table(ChartA)] at U411 is
incorrect.)
FFC.
(YC18)
FU(ChartA)].
engine PWB.
7-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
(1-7)Vertical streaks or bands (black, color)


1 Checking the slit glass The slit glass is dirty. Clean the slit glass and the
DP original conveying guide.
2 Checking the contact glass The contact glass or the Clean the contact glass and
shading plate is dirty. the shading plate at the
5 Checking the settings Actual original size and Set the original paper size.
detected original size are
mismatched.
6 Checking the original mat The original mat is dirty. Clean the original mat.
7 Executing U067 The center line settings are Adjust U067 [Front].
incorrect. (The streaks or
bands appear out of the
original image.)
8 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411
incorrect. (Streaks or bands [Table(ChartA)].
appear out of the original.)
9 Executing U068 The starting position for Adjust U068 [DP Read].
scanning an original on the
DP is incorrect.
original image.)
11 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [DP FU(Chart
incorrect. (Streaks or bands B)].
12 Checking the CIS The CIS is faulty. Replace the scanner carriage
and execute U411
FU(ChartA)].
13 Checking the main/engine The wires on the main/ Reconnect the wires on the
PWB engine PWB are not main/engine PWB. At that
properly connected. Or, the time, repair or replace them if
wires or the main/engine pinched by another part if
PWB are faulty. damaged. When not repaired
engine PWB.
7-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
(1-8)Regular inconsistence in the leading edge image between the original and output

1 Executing U071 The timing of scanning the Adjust [Front Head] at U071.
original leading edge at the
document processor is not
properly set.
2 Executing U411 The starting position for Execute U411 [DP FU(Chart
scanning an original on the B)].
DP is incorrect.
conveying roller A, B B or the bushings are dirty. A, B and the bushings.
4 Checking the DP The DP conveying roller A, Replace the corresponding
conveying roller A, B B are worn down. roller.
5 Applying the grease Excessive load is applied Apply the grease to the DP
to the drive gear as the DP drive gears.
feed motor rotates
irregularly.
6 Checking the DP feed The DP feed motor is faulty Reattach and reconnect the
motor and it rotates irregularly. DP feed motor. Then, replace
it if it is not fixed.
(1-9)Vertical streaks or bands (white)


2 Checking the scanner Dust adheres on the Remove dust in the laser path
carriage scanner carriage. of the scanner carriage.
3 Scanner carriage The CIS is faulty. Replace the scanner carriage
FU(ChartA)].
5 Checking the main/engine The wire is not properly Reconnect the wires on the
PWB connected. Or, the wire or main/engine PWB. At that
the main/engine PWB is time, repair or replace them if
faulty. pinched by another part if
engine PWB.
7-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
(1-10)Moire

1 Checking the settings The original imaging quality Set the image quality
is not properly set. (Moire according to the originals.
changes depending on the
print quality.)
2 Reloading the original The original is not properly Rotate the originals in 90
set. (Moire appears in the degrees and reset them.
original scanning direction.)
(1-11)Entire blank image (white or black)


1 Checking the original The originals were set Reset the original to correct
upside down. the front and back direction.
2 Checking the slit glass The slit glass is not Reattach the slit glass.
properly attached.
DP is incorrect.
FFC.
(YC18)
6 Checking the scanner drive The scanner drive belt Reattach the scanner drive
belt comes off. belt.
7 Checking the scanner drive The scanner drive gear is Reattach the scanner drive
gear not properly attached. gear.
FU(ChartA)].
engine PWB.
7-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
(1-12)A part of the image is dark or light


1 Checking the situation The table scanning of Perform the measures for the
originals is faulty. abnormal images at the table
scanning.
2 Cleaning the slit glass The slit glass is dirty. Clean the slit glass.
3 Checking the slit glass The slit glass is bent. Reattach the slit glass.
4 Checking the scanning The scanning guide is not Reattach the scanning guide.
guide properly attached.
(1-13)Image is blurred

1 Checking the original The original is wavy. Make the originals flat, or
replace it if possible.
2 Checking the slit glass The slit glass has Remove condensation on the
condensation. slit glass.
3 Checking the scanner The lens has condensation. Remove condensation on the
carriage lens of the scanner carriage.
4 Executing U411 Each auto adjustment of Execute U411
the scanner is incorrect. [Table(ChartA)].
engine PWB.
7-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
(1-14)Part of the image is not copied


1 Checking the original The original is not set Reset the originals.
properly.
2 Checking the settings The original size and the Set the original size manually.
paper side do not match on
the operation panel. (The
setting is incorrect.)
properly attached.
FFC.
(YC18)
(1-15)Color shift

1 Checking the original The originals out of Explain users to use the
specification are used. original within the
(They are thick, thin, or specifications.
smooth.)
2 Checking the original The leading edge of the Stretch the bending or the
original is bent. paper creases of the original.
conveying roller A, B B or the bushings are dirty. A, B and the bushings.
4 Checking the DP The original conveying Reattach the DP conveying
conveying pulley pulley does not rotate pulleys and the pressure
smoothly. springs.
5 Checking the DP drive The DP drive components Reattach the DP drive
components are not properly attached. components.
6 Checking the scanning The scanning guide is Replace the scanning guide.
guide deformed.
7 Checking the DP The document processor is Check the positioning of the
not properly installed on the document processor and
main unit. tighten the screws again.
8 Checking the DP hinges The DP hinges are faulty. Replace the DP hinges.
(The hinge's vertical motion
is unsmooth, the opened
DP cannot be held, and the
DP is skewed horizontally.)
7-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
(1-16)Skewed image

1 Correcting the original The originals are bent or Stretch the bending or the
creased. paper creases of the original.
2 Checking the DP original The original skews. Relocate the DP original width
width guides guides.
3 Checking the DP feed roller The DP feed roller is dirty. Clean the DP feed roller.
(It can be removed by
cleaning.)
4 Checking the DP feed roller The DP feed roller is dirty. Replace the DP feed roller.
(It cannot be removed by
cleaning.)
conveying roller A, B B are dirty. A, B.
(1-17)The entire image is light


DP is incorrect.
properly attached.
4 Checking the settings The density is not properly Set the image quality
adjusted. (The original type according to the originals.
and image quality differs.)
5 Checking the settings The density is not properly Set to [Off] at [System Menu/
adjusted. ([EcoPrint] is set Counter] > [Common Setting]
to 'On'.) > [Function Defaults] >
[EcoPrint].
6 Checking the settings The density is not properly Set the density setting to be
adjusted. (The density dark.
setting is too light.)
7 Checking the settings The density is not properly Set [Manual] in the
adjusted. ([Background Background Density
density] is set to 'Off'.) Adjustment to make dark.
8 Executing U411 The scanner image is not Execute U411 [DP
adjusted. FU(ChartA)].
FFC.
(YC18)
7-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

10 Checking the scanner The LED is faulty. Replace the scanner carriage
carriage and execute U411 if the LED
lamp does not lit.
FU(ChartA)].
engine PWB.
7-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
(2)Scanner Factors (When scanning the back side through the DP)


inconsistent
7-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

(2-10) Moire
7-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

(2-15) Color shift
(2-16) Skewed image
7-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
Content of Scanner Factors (when scanning from DP)

(2-1)Abnormal image
(When scanning the back side through the DP)

FFC.
• DPCIS - Main/engine PWB
(YC4)
2 Replacing the DPCIS The DPCIS is faulty. Replace the DPCIS, and then
execute U411 [DP
FD(ChartA)].

2 Executing U411 The CIS image adjustment Execute U411 [DP
(U411 [DP FU(ChartA)]) is FD(ChartA)].
not executed.
3 Checking the DP The DP conveying roller A Clean the DP conveying roller
conveying roller A is dirty. A.
4 Checking the DP The DP conveying roller A Reattach the DP conveying
conveying roller A does not properly rotate. roller A drive section.
execute U411 [DP
FD(ChartA)].
6 Main/engine PWB The wires on the main/ Reconnect the wires on the
replacement engine PWB are not main/engine PWB. At that
engine PWB.
7-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >


execute U411 [DP
FD(ChartA)].

1 Measures when scanning (Causes assumed when Perform the measures for the
the front side through DP scanning the front side abnormal image when
through DP) scanning the front side
through DP.
2 Checking the DP The originals are conveyed Reattach the DP conveying
conveying roller A, B without contacting the DP roller A, B.
conveying roller A, B.
3 Checking the DPCIS The originals are away Reattach the DPCIS.
from the DPCIS contact
glass.


1 Reloading the original The originals are not Reload the original properly.
tray.
2 Executing U072 The DP scanning position Adjust U072 [Back].
is not adjusted.
3 Executing U411 The DP scanning position Execute U411 [DP
is not adjusted. FD(ChartB)].
7-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >


2 Checking the contact glass The contact glass is dirty. Clean the contact glass and
the DP conveying guide.
execute U411 [DP
FD(ChartA)].


1 Executing U072 The leading edge timing is Adjust U072 [Back].
improperly adjusted.
(Streaks or bands appear
on the image outside the
original.)
2 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411.
improperly adjusted.
original.)
3 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411 [DP
improperly adjusted. FD(ChartB)].
original.)
4 Cleaning the DPCIS The DPCIS contact glass is Clean the DPCIS contact
contact glass dirty. glass and the DP conveying
guide.
5 Cleaning the DP conveying The DP conveying guide is Clean the DP conveying
guide dirty. guide.
execute U411 [DP
FD(ChartA)].
7-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

1 Executing U072 The DP scanning position Adjust U072 [Back].
is not adjusted.
2 Executing U411 The DP scanning position Execute U411.
is not adjusted.
3 Executing U411 The DP scanning position Execute U411 [DP
is not adjusted. FD(ChartB)].


2 Checking the DPCIS The DPCIS contact glass is Clean the DPCIS contact
guide.
execute U411 [DP
FD(ChartA)].
(2-10)Moire

1 Changing the image quality The image quality mode is Change the image quality
mode set improperly. mode.
2 Reloading the original The original is not properly Rotate the originals in 90
3 Executing U411 The automatic scanner Execute U411 [DP
adjustment is not executed. FD(ChartA)].
7-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >


execute U411 [DP
FD(ChartA)].
engine PWB.


1 Checking the image quality Image quality is not Set the image quality
mode properly adjusted. (Original according to the originals.
type and image quality are
mismatched.)
2 Replacing the original The original is dirty. Replace the original.
3 Correcting the original The originals are bent or Stretch the bending or the
4 Checking the DP The DP conveying roller A Reattach the DP conveying
conveying roller A does not properly rotate. roller A drive section.
guide.
execute U411 [DP
FD(ChartA)].
7-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

1 Checking the DPCIS The DPCIS contact glass Remove condensation on the
contact glass has condensation. DPCIS contact glass.
guide.
3 Checking the DPCIS The DPCIS contact glass is Reattach the DPCIS contact
contact glass bent. glass.
4 Replacing the DPCIS The DPCIS contact glass Replace the DPCIS contact
contact glass has some scratches. glass.
5 Checking the DP The DP conveying roller A, Reattach the corresponding
conveying roller A, B B do not properly rotate. roller drive section.
6 Executing U411 The automatic scanner Execute U411 [DP
adjustment is not executed. FD(ChartA)].
7 Checking the DPCIS The DPCIS is not properly Reattach the DPCIS.
attached.
execute U411 [DP
FD(ChartA)].


1 Reloading the original The originals are not Reload the original properly.
tray.
2 Setting the original size Actual original size and Set the original size manually.
mismatched.
execute U411 [DP
FD(ChartA)].
engine PWB.
7-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
(2-15)Color shift

through DP.
2 Checking the DP The originals are conveyed Reattach the DP conveying
conveying roller A, B without contacting the DP roller A, B.
conveying roller A, B.
3 Checking the DPCIS The originals are away Reattach the DPCIS.
from the DPCIS contact
glass.
(2-16)Skewed image

through DP.
attached.
7-24
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >


1 Measures when scanning The table scanning of Perform the measures for the
on the table originals is faulty. abnormal images at the table
scanning.
2 Executing U411 U411 [DP FD(ChartA)] is Execute U411 [DP
not executed. FD(ChartA)].
3 Cleaning the DP conveying The DP conveying roller A, Clean the DP conveying roller
roller A, B B are dirty. A, B.
4 Checking the DP The DP conveying roller A, Reattach the DP conveying
conveying roller A, B B do not properly rotate. roller A, B drive section.
attached.
execute U411 [DP
FD(ChartA)].
FFC.
(YC4)
7-25
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
(3)Scanner Factors (when scanning on the contact glass)

(3-4) Blurred characters / Color Shift

inconsistent
7-26
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

(3-10) Moire
7-27
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

(3-15) Skewed image
7-28
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
Content of Scanner Factors (when scanning on the contact glass)

(3-1)Abnormal image
FFC.
(YC18)
FU(ChartA)].
2 Checking the original The original is raised at Set the original during
scanning. pressing.
3 Checking the contact glass The shading plate is dirty. Clean the shading plate at the
4 Executing U411 The image is not adjusted. Execute U411
[Table(ChartA)].
FFC.
(YC18)
7-29
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

2 Checking the contact glass The contact glass is dirty. Clean the contact glass.
FFC.
(YC18)
FU(ChartA)].
5 Main/engine PWB The main/engine PWB is Reconnect the wires on the
replacement faulty. main/engine PWB. At that
engine PWB.
(3-4)Blurred characters / Color Shift

1 Checking the ISU shaft There is a load on the Remove foreign material on
scanner movement since the ISU shaft.
the foreign material
adheres on the ISU shaft.
2 Checking the scanner There is a load on the Reattach the scanner
carriage scanner movement since carriage.
the scanner carriage is not
properly attached.
3 Checking the scanner A load is applied to the Adjust the scanner motor belt
motor belt tension scanner movement since tension properly.
the belt tension is improper.

1 Checking the original The original is not properly Reset the originals.
set on the contact glass.
2 Checking the contact glass The contact glass is not Reattach the contact glass.
properly attached.
3 Executing U067 The scanner center line is Adjust U067 [Front].
not adjusted.
4 Executing U411 The automatic table Execute U411
scanning adjustment is not [Table(ChartA)].
executed.
7-30
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

3 Executing U066 The image at the backside Adjust U066 [Front].
of the size direction plate is
scanned.
[Front] at U066 is
incorrect.)
4 Executing U411 The image at the backside Execute U411
of the size indication plate [Table(ChartA)].
is scanned.
[Table(ChartA)] at U411 is
incorrect.)
FFC.
(YC18)

2 Checking the settings Actual original size and Set the original paper size.
mismatched.
3 Checking the original mat The original mat is dirty. Clean the original mat.
original image.)
5 Executing U411 The leading edge timing is Execute U411
incorrect. (Streaks or bands [Table(ChartA)].
6 Checking the contact glass The contact glass or the Clean the contact glass and
shading plate is dirty. the shading plate at the
FU(ChartA)].
7-31
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
placed.
(The original leading edge
is not aligned to the contact
glass properly.)
2 Executing U066 The scanner leading edge Adjust U066 [Front].
timing is incorrect
3 Executing U411 The scanner leading edge Execute U411
timing is incorrect [Table(ChartA)].
5 Checking the scanner drive The scanner drive belt is Reattach the scanner drive
belt loose. belt.
6 Checking the scanner drive The attachment of the Retighten the screw of the
gear scanner drive gear is loose. scanner drive gear.
7-32
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

2 Checking the scanner Dust adheres on the Remove dust in the laser path
carriage scanner carriage. of the scanner carriage.
FU(ChartA)].
(3-10)Moire
1 Checking the settings The original imaging quality Set the image quality
is not properly set. (Moire according to the originals.
changes depending on the
print quality.)
2 Checking the original The original is not properly Rotate the originals in 90
3 Executing U411 Each adjustment of the Execute U411
scanner section is incorrect [Table(ChartA)].
7-33
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

1 Checking the original The originals were set Reset the original to correct
upside down. the front and back direction.
FFC.
(YC18)
4 Checking the scanner drive The scanner drive belt Reattach the scanner drive
belt comes off. belt.
5 Checking the scanner drive The scanner drive gear is Reattach the scanner drive
gear not properly attached. gear.
FU(ChartA)].
7-34
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

1 Checking the settings Image quality is not Set the image quality
properly adjusted. (Original according to the originals.
type and image quality are
mismatched.)
3 Checking the original The originals are bent or Stretch the bending or the
4 Checking the original mat The original mat shifts. Reattach the original mat.
properly attached.
7 Checking the contact glass Original is scanned on the Set the booklet original while
bent contact glass. not bending the contact glass.
8 Checking the scanner A part of the LEDs does not Replace the scanner carriage
carriage turn on. and execute U411
FU(ChartA)].
9 Checking the scanner The part of the scanner Replace the scanner carriage
carriage carriage where the ISU and execute U411
shaft contacts is deformed. [Table(ChartA)] and [DP
FU(ChartA)].
FU(ChartA)].
11 Checking the main/engine The main/engine PWB is Replace the main/engine
PWB faulty. PWB.
1 Checking the original The original is wavy. Make the originals flat, or
replace it if possible.
2 Checking the contact glass The contact glass has Remove the condensation on
condensation. the contact glass.
3 Checking the scanner The scanner carriage has Remove condensation on the
carriage condensation. scanner carriage.
4 Executing U411 Each auto adjustment of Execute U411
the scanner is incorrect. [Table(ChartA)].
FU(ChartA)].
7-35
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

1 Checking the settings Marked part by highlighter Set [Highlight] to [On] at
pen on the original cannot [System Menu/Counter] key >
be scanned. [Common Settings] >
[Function Defaults] >
[Original Image]
2 Checking the original A part of the original is not Remove the part reflecting the
printed out where the light light from the original, and
is reflected. copy it.
3 Checking the original The original is not set Reset the originals.
properly.
4 Checking the settings The original size and the Set the original size manually.
paper side do not match on
the operation panel. (The
setting is incorrect.)
5 Checking the contact glass The original scanning side Clean the original scanning
of the contact glass is dirty. side of the contact glass.
properly attached.
FFC.
(YC18)
8 Checking the scanner The scanner carriage is not Reattach the scanner
carriage properly attached. carriage.
9 Replacing the DP original The original size and the Replace the DP original
detection sensor paper size do not match detection sensor.
with the display on the
operation panel.
(Misdetection of the DP
original detection sensor)
FU(ChartA)].
(3-15)Skewed image
set. (The original is
skewed.)
2 Checking the scanner The scanner carriage is not Reattach the scanner
carriage properly attached. carriage.
7-36
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

1 Checking the settings The density is not properly Set the image quality
adjusted. (The original type according to the originals.
and image quality differs.)
2 Checking the settings The density is not properly Set to [Off] at [System Menu/
adjusted. ([EcoPrint] is set Counter] > [Common Setting]
to 'On'.) > [Function Defaults] >
[EcoPrint].
3 Checking the settings The density is not properly Set the density setting to be
adjusted. (The density dark.
setting is too light.)
4 Checking the settings The density is not properly Set [Manual] in the
adjusted. ([Background Background Density
density] is set to 'Off'.) Adjustment to make dark.
5 Executing U411 The image is not adjusted. Execute U411
[Table(ChartA)].
FFC.
(YC18)
8 Checking the scanner The LED is faulty. Replace the scanner carriage
carriage and execute U411 if the LED
lamp does not lit.
FU(ChartA)].
engine PWB.
7-37
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
(4)Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation)

(4-3) The image is not partly printed (blank or

white spots)
(4-4) Entire blank image (white)

inconsistent
(4-6) Color shift in the main scanning direction
(4-7) Color shift in the sub scanning direction
7-38
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

(4-8) Paper creases
(4-9) Toner smudge at the paper edge
(4-10) Dirty reverse side
(4-12) Horizontal streaks or bands
(4-13) Irregular error in the leading edge between

the original and output image (variation in
the paper leading edge timing)
7-39
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

(4-15) Offset image
(4-16) Color reproduction is poor
(4-17) Fusing failure
(4-18) Paper skew
(4-19) Uneven transfer
7-40
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

7-41
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
Content of Engine Factors (Paper conveying cause: Transfer, Fuser and Separation)
1 Checking the primary The primary transfer belt When the image failure
transfer unit surface is dirty. appears at the long cycle
spreading over the sheets in
the primary transfer belt
interval, clean the primary
transfer belt and execute
Calibration. If it is not
resolved, replace the primary
transfer unit.
2 Checking the primary The primary transfer bias Correct the primary transfer
transfer bias contact contact is deformed. bias contact so that it grounds
securely.
3 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer Correct the secondary
transfer bias contact bias contact is deformed. transfer bias contact so that it
grounds the shaft of the
secondary transfer roller
securely.
4 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer When the image failures
transfer unit roller is dirty. appear in the secondary
transfer roller diameter
interval, clean the secondary
transfer roller. If it is not
resolved, replace the
secondary transfer unit.

1 Checking the primary There are smudges or When the image failure
transfer unit scratches on the primary appears in the primary
transfer belt surface at long transfer belt interval (the long
period in the belt interval cycle spreading over the
that spans between the sheets), clean the primary
sheets). transfer belt. If not repaired,
replace the primary transfer
unit.
transfer unit roller is dirty or has some appear in the secondary
scratches. transfer roller diameter
3 Checking the fuser unit The heat roller is dirty, or When the image failure
has scratches. appears in the heat roller
diameter interval, clean the
heat roller. If it is not fixed,
replace the fuser unit.
7-42
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
(4-3)The image is not partly printed (blank or white spots)

1 Checking the paper The paper is damp. Replace with the dry paper.
2 Checking the paper The paper is stored in the Ask users to store paper in a
storage place high humidity environment. dry place.
3 Setting the media type The media type is not Set the proper media type
properly set. from [Media Type Settings] in
the System Menu.
transfer unit surface is dirty, or has appears in the primary
some scratches. transfer belt interval (the long
cycle spreading over the
sheets), clean the primary
transfer belt. If not repaired,
unit.
(4-4)Entire blank image (white)

1 Opening and closing the The rear cover (conveying Open and close the rear
rear cover unit) is not closed cover (conveying unit).
completely.
2 Main/engine PWB The secondary transfer Replace the main/engine
replacement high voltage ON signal PWB.
(3.3V to 0V) is not output
from the main/engine PWB.
3 Replacing the high voltage The secondary transfer Replace the high voltage
PWB bias output from the high PWB.
voltage PWB is faulty.

1 Checking the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width
guides or the MP paper width guides or the MP guides or the MP paper width
width guides paper width guides do not guides to match the paper
match the paper size. size.
2 Executing U034 The center line when Adjust the center line at U034
image writing the data is [LSU Out Left].
incorrect.
7-43
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
(4-6)Color shift in the main scanning direction

1 Adjusting the color Color Registration is First, execute Calibration.
registration executed without executing Then, execute Color
Calibration. Registration.
2 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor is dirty or the Check the opening / closing
and the ID sensor shutter ID sensor shutter is not operation of the ID sensor
opened. shutter and fix it if necessary.
And, clean the ID sensor.
3 LSU replacement The LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU.
(4-7)Color shift in the sub scanning direction

1 Adjusting the color Color Registration is First, execute Calibration.
registration executed without executing Then, execute Color
Calibration. Registration.
2 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor is dirty or the Check the opening / closing
and the ID sensor shutter ID sensor shutter is not operation of the ID sensor
opened. shutter and fix it if necessary.
And, clean the ID sensor.
3 Checking the primary The primary transfer belt is Check if the color registration
transfer unit deteriorated. patch appears twice on the
both ends of the primary
transfer belt. If it does not
appear twice, replace the
primary transfer unit.
engine PWB.
7-44
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
(4-8)Paper creases
guides or the MP paper width guides or the MP guides to fit them with the
width guides paper width guides do not paper size.
match the paper size.
2 Checking the paper The paper curls or is wavy. Replace the paper.
3 Checking the paper Paper is stored in the high Ask users to store paper in a
storage place humidity environment. dry place. Put the dry paper
into the plastic bag and seal
the bag to prevent moisture
from getting in.
storage place humidity environment. dry place.
5 Checking the pressure The pressure springs are Reattach the pressure springs
spring not attached properly at at both sides of the
both ends of the registration roller.
registration roller, so the
pressure balance is
uneven.
6 Checking the fuser unit The pressure springs at the Check the pressure balance
machine front and rear of both ends of the fuser unit
ends of the fuser unit are by checking the nipped
not properly attached. pressure on the solid image. If
the balance is uneven,
replace the fuser unit.
(4-9)Toner smudge at the paper edge

1 Cleaning the conveying The conveying guide is Clean the conveying guide,
guide dirty with toner. developer unit and the
developer duct.
(4-10)Dirty reverse side

2 Checking the press roller The pressure roller is dirty Clean the press roller. Then,
due to the media type set the proper media type at
setting. [Media Type Settings] in the
System Menu.
3 Checking the conveying The conveying guide or the Clean the conveying guide
guide and the developer developer unit is dirty. and developer unit.
unit
7-45
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

1 Checking the paper The paper is damp. Replace the paper.
3 Opening and closing the The transfer current cannot Open and close the rear
rear cover be impressed since the cover (conveying unit).
rear cover (conveying unit)
is not closed completely.
4 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer When the secondary transfer
transfer unit roller does not contact the roller shifts, correct the
primary transfer belt or the pressure position.
contact is not enough.
5 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer Clean the secondary transfer
transfer bias contact bias cannot be impressed bias contact. Or, correct its
since the secondary shape so that it is grounded
transfer bias contact is dirty securely.
or deformed.
6 Replacing the high voltage The secondary transfer Replace the high voltage
PWB bias output from the high PWB.
voltage PWB is faulty.
(4-12)Horizontal streaks or bands

1 Cleaning the primary The primary transfer belt When the image failures
transfer belt surface is dirty. appear at the long cycle
transfer belt.
2 Cleaning the heat roller The heat roller is dirty. When the image failure
appears in the heat roller
heat roller.
3 Checking the rear cover Only one side of the rear Open and close the rear
cover (conveying unit) is cover (conveying unit).
closed, or the pressure
spring is deformed.
4 Checking the secondary The pressure spring is not Reattach the pressure spring.
transfer unit properly attached or If it is not fixed, replace the
deformed. secondary transfer unit.
5 Checking the primary The primary transfer belt Replace the primary transfer
transfer unit surface is faulty. unit.
6 Checking the fuser unit The heat roller surface has Replace the fuser unit.
scratches.
7-46
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
(4-13)Irregular error in the leading edge between the original and output image (variation in
the paper leading edge timing)
1 Executing U034 The leading edge timing is Adjust the leading edge timing
not properly adjusted. at U034 [LSU Out Top].
2 Checking the connection The paper feed clutch or Reconnect the connectors of
the registration clutch do the paper feed clutch and the
not operate smoothly since registration clutch.
the connectors are not
properly connected.
3 Checking the clutch The paper feed clutch or Reattach the paper feed
the registration clutch do clutch and the registration
not operate smoothly since clutch.
they are not properly
attached.
4 Replacing the clutch The paper feed clutch or Replace the corresponding
the registration clutch do clutch.
not operate smoothly since
they are faulty.
1 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are Replace with the paper within
used. the specification.
2 Checking the settings The media type is not Set the proper media type
the System Menu.
3 Applying the grease The conveying motor drive Apply the grease to the gear.
is not smoothly transmitted.
4 Checking the conveying The conveying guide is Replace the conveying guide.
guide deformed.
5 Checking the fuser unit The fuser front guide is Replace the fuser unit.
deformed or the fuser
pressure is uneven.
7-47
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
(4-15)Offset image
1 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are Replace with the paper within
used. the specification, or change to
the media type setting closest
to the specified paper.
2 Checking the settings The media type is not Change the settings
properly set. according to the media type
(paper weight).
3 Checking the primary The primary transfer belt When the image failures
transfer unit surface is dirty. appear at the long cycle
transfer belt.
4 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer When the image failure
transfer unit roller is dirty. appears with the secondary
transfer roller pitch, clean the
secondary transfer roller.
5 Checking the fuser unit The heat roller is dirty. When the image failure
appears in the heat roller
heat roller.
6 Primary transfer unit Transfer cleaning voltage is Replace the primary transfer
replacement not applied due to the unit.
broken wire in the primary
transfer unit.
7 Replacing the high voltage The high voltage PWB is Replace the high voltage
PWB faulty. PWB.
8 Checking the fuser unit The heat roller surface has Replace the fuser unit.
scratches.
7-48
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
(4-16)Color reproduction is poor

3 Checking the paper Rough paper for Use the color paper with
monochrome print is used. smooth surface that fits for
color print.
4 Checking the settings Installation environment is Execute [Altitude Adjustment]
high altitude. at [System Menu/Counter]
key > [Adjustment/
Maintenance] > [Service
Settings] to set the proper
mode.
5 Adjusting the image The half tone image cannot Execute [Calibration] at
be reproduced. [Adjustment/Maintenance] in
the System Menu.
6 Checking the developer The developer powder in Isolate the abnormal color
unit the developer unit is and execute Developer
deteriorated. Refresh for that color.
7 Checking the drum unit and The drum unit or the main Reattach the charger roller
the developer unit charger roller unit is not unit or the drum unit that has
properly installed. poor reproduction.
8 Checking the settings The proper color Change [Color reproduction]
reproduction mode is not in the [Imaging] tab in the print
selected in the [Imaging] settings at the PC.
tab in the print settings at
the PC.
9 Checking the settings Printer data is CYMK, but Change [Color conversion
not RGB. processing] of Print quality in
KPDL to Image Quality prior
mode.
(4-17)Fusing failure
1 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are Replace with the proper
used. paper.
2 Checking the paper The media type is not Set the proper media type
the System Menu.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the Upgrade the firmware to the
latest version. latest version.
4 Checking the fuser unit The nipped pressure Replace the fuser unit.
(width) to the solid image is
low and fuser pressure
setting (spring) is too weak.
7-49
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
(4-18)Paper skew
guides or the MP paper width guides or the MP guides or the MP paper width
2 Checking the paper width The paper width guides or If the paper width guides or
guides or the MP paper the MP paper width guides the MP paper width guides
width guides are not properly attached. are not attached at the correct
position, reattach them.
3 Checking the paper width The paper width guides or Replace the paper width
guides or the MP paper the MP paper width guides guides or the MP paper width
width guides are faulty. guides.
(4-19)Uneven transfer
1 Checking the conveying The rear cover (conveying Open and close the rear
section unit) is not closed cover (conveying unit).
completely.
2 Checking the primary The primary transfer belt When the image failures
transfer unit surface is dirty. appear at the long cycle
transfer belt.
3 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer When the image failure
transfer unit roller is dirty. appears with the secondary
transfer roller pitch, clean the
secondary transfer roller.
4 Checking the secondary The secondary transfer Correct the pressure spring
transfer unit roller is faulty. Or, the deformed. If it is not fixed,
pressure spring is replace the secondary
deformed. transfer unit.
5 Checking the primary The primary transfer belt Replace the primary transfer
transfer unit surface has some unit.
scratches.
6 Replacing the high voltage The high voltage contact of Replace the high voltage
PWB the high voltage PWB is PWB.
deformed or damaged.
7 Checking the fuser unit The roller, or the parts in Replace the fuser unit.
the drive section or the
fuser press-release section
are deformed or worn
down.
7-50
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
1 Checking the paper The paper is damp. Replace with the new dry
paper.

unit.
3 Checking the feed-shift The paper is hitting the Check the paper loop when
guide feed-shift guide strongly. ejecting the paper, and
reattach the exit guide.
7-51
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

1 Checking the fuser unit The separation claws are Clean the separation claws.
dirty with toner.
2 Checking the settings The media type is not Set the proper media type
the System Menu.
3 Checking the feed-shift There is toner dirt or Clean the feed-shift guide.
guide welding on the feed-shift
guide.
4 Checking the separation The separation needles are Clean the separation needles
needles dirty with paper dust or by using the cleaning brush,
toner. etc.
unit.
transfer unit roller is dirty, is deformed or appear in the secondary
is worn down. transfer roller diameter
7-52
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
(5)Engine Factors (Image forming cause)

(5-2) Entire blank image (white)
(5-3) Entire blank image (black)
(5-4) Black dots
(5-5) Horizontal streaks or bands (white or black)
(5-6) Irregular horizontal streaks and dots (white)
(5-7) Horizontal uneven density
7-53
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

(5-9) A part of the image is missing
(5-10) Offset image
(5-11) Poor grayscale reproduction
(5-13) Vertical streaks and bands (black)
(5-14) Vertical uneven density
7-54
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

7-55
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
Content of Engine Factors (Image forming cause)

1 Performing the items to Uncharged toner increases Execute [Developer Refresh]
improve the image quality due to the continuous high at [System Menu/Counter]
coverage printing in the key > [Adjustment/
high temperature Maintenance] > [Service
environment. Or the Settings]. Then, execute
developer bias in controlled [Calibration] at [Adjustment/
at the higher level since the Maintenance].
calibration was executed
when the density was too
light.
2 Checking the developer The developer bias contact Clean the developer bias
bias contact is dirty or deformed. contact, or correct its shape
so that it grounds securely.
3 Checking the T/C sensor The T/C sensor is faulty. Replace the developer unit.
4 Checking the temperature Temperature is low in the When the in-machine
inside the main unit installation environment. temperature is 16°C / 60.8°F
or less, request the user to
change the installation
environment where the room
temperature is warmer than
16°C / 60.8°F.
5 Checking the drum unit and The drum unit does not Reattach the main charger
the developer unit ground. roller unit to the drum unit and
reinstall the drum unit into the
main unit to ensure secure
contact .
6 Checking the main charger The main charger roller Clean the main charger roller
roller unit surface is dirty. surface. Replace the main
charger roller unit if not
improved.
7 Checking the connection The wire is not properly Reconnect the following FFC.
connected or is faulty. When the FFC terminals are
FFC.
• high voltage PWB (YC1) -
Main/engine PWB (YC3)
8 Checking the toner The wire is not properly Reconnect the following wire
solenoid connected or is faulty. connectors and reconnect the
FFC. Replace the wire when it
has no continuity. Then,
replace the FFC when the
FFC terminals are deformed
or the FFC is broken.
• Toner solenoid - Container
relay PWB (YC3)
• Container relay PWB (YC1)
- Main/engine PWB (YC2)
9 Checking the toner The toner solenoid is faulty. Reattach the toner solenoid
solenoid and reconnect the connector.
If not repaired, replace it.
7-56
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

10 Replacing the container The container relay PWB is Replace the container relay
relay PWB faulty. PWB.
11 Replacing the high voltage The high voltage contact of Replace the high voltage
PWB the high voltage PWB is PWB.
deformed or damaged.
(5-2)Entire blank image (white)

2 Developer unit The developer drive gear is Replace the developer unit.
replacement faulty.
3 Checking the connection The wire is not properly Reconnect the FFC on the
connected. high voltage PWB.
4 Checking the color The color developer drive Reattach the color developer
developer drive solenoid solenoid is not linked, drive solenoid and reinsert the
properly connected or it is connector. If the issue is
faulty. Or, the drive parts resolved, replace it.
such as the gear or the
coupling are faulty.
PWB faulty. PWB.
6 Checking the connection The FFC is not properly Reconnect the FFC to the
connected, or it is faulty. LSU. If the FFC is broken,
replace it.
7 LSU replacement The APC PWB or the PD Replace the LSU.
PWB in the LSU is faulty.
engine PWB.
7-57
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
(5-3)Entire blank image (black)

1 Checking the drum unit and The drum unit or the main Reattach the main charger
the developer unit charger roller unit is not roller unit to the drum unit and
properly installed. reinstall the drum unit into the
main unit to ensure secure
contact .
roller contact contact is dirty or contact and correct its shape
deformed. so it is grounded securely.
4 Checking the high voltage The high voltage contact of Clean the high voltage
contact the high voltage PWB is contact and correct it so that it
dirty or deformed. grounds securely. Or, reattach
the high voltage PWB.
5 Checking the connection The FFC for the high Reinsert the FFC into the high
voltage PWB is not voltage PWB. When the FFC
properly connected, or it is terminals are peeled off,
faulty. deformed or the FFC is
broken, replace the FFC.
PWB faulty. PWB.
7 LSU replacement The APC PWB or the PD Replace the LSU.
PWB in the LSU is faulty.
engine PWB.
(5-4)Black dots
1 Checking the drum The drum surface is dirty or Execute the drum refresh. If
has some scratches. not repaired, replace the drum
unit.
2 Checking the main charger The main charger roller Replace the main charger
roller unit surface is dirty. roller unit.
3 Checking the settings Developer bias leaks. Execute [Altitude Adjustment]
at [System Menu/Counter]
key > [Adjustment/
mode.
4 Checking the developer The developer roller or the Clean the developer roller. Or,
unit magnet roller is dirty, or is replace the developer unit if
faulty. not repaired after cleaning.
7-58
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
(5-5)Horizontal streaks or bands (white or black)

1 Specifying the faulty color (Judgment of the abnormal Execute [Test Page] at
color) [System Menu/Counter] key >
[Adjustment/Maintenance] >
[Service Settings] to specify
the faulty color with the test
page. (Go to the next step.)
2 Checking the developer Both ends of the developer Clean both ends of the
unit roller are dirty and it causes developer roller and the
the developer bias leakage. developer bias contact.
3 Executing Developer The last image remains on Execute the developer
refresh the developer roller refresh.
surface.
4 Developer unit Both ends of the developer Replace the developer unit.
replacement roller and the developer
bias contact are
deteriorated and it causes
the developer bias leakage.
5 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface is dirty. Execute Drum refresh.
6 Drum unit replacement There are some scratches Replace the drum unit.
on the drum surface.
7 Replacing the main charger The main charger roller When the image failure
roller unit surface is dirty or has some appears in the main charger
scratches. roller circumference interval,
replace the main charger
roller unit.
8 Changing the output value The electric charge Execute [MC] at [System
remains on the drum Menu/Counter] key >
surface due to insufficient [Adjustment/Maintenance] >
discharging. [Service Settings] to reduce
the main charger output
value.
9 Checking the primary The primary transfer bias Clean the primary transfer
transfer bias contact contact is dirty or bias contact. Or, correct its
deformed. shape so that it grounds
certainly. If it is not fixed,
unit.
10 Checking the connection The bias voltage is Reconnect the FFC on the
irregularly generated from high voltage PWB.
the high voltage PWB due
to the contact failure.
11 Replacing the high voltage The bias voltage is Replace the high voltage
PWB generated unevenly from PWB.
the high voltage PWB since
the PWB is faulty.
7-59
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
(5-6)Irregular horizontal streaks and dots (white)

1 Checking the installation The settings do not match Execute [Altitude Adjustment]
environment the installation environment at [System Menu/Counter]
(High altitude exceeding key > [Adjustment/
1,500m above sea-level). Maintenance] > [Service
mode.
2 Checking the main charger The main charger roller Correct the main charger
roller contact contact does not ground. roller contact so that it
grounds securely.
3 Checking the drum unit and The drum unit is not Reinstall the drum unit.
the developer unit properly installed, so it
does not ground the drum
drive shaft.
4 Checking the paper Paper with the high surface Replace with the
resistance is used. recommended paper.
(5-7)Horizontal uneven density

1 Checking the main charger The main charge roller Reattach the main charger
roller unit rotates irregularly. roller unit.
2 Replacing the main charger The charger cleaning roller Replace the main charger
roller unit is deformed. roller unit.
3 Checking the developer The DS pulleys are dirty. Clean the DS pulleys at both
unit ends of the developer unit.
4 Developer unit The DS pulleys are faulty. Replace the developer unit.
replacement
5 Checking the developer The conduction is not Clean the developer bias
bias contact stabilized due to the dirty contact.
developer bias contact.
6 Checking the developer The developer powder in Execute the developer
unit the developer unit is refresh. If not repaired,
deteriorated. replace the developer unit.
7 Executing Drum refresh Toner smudges in the Execute Drum refresh.
shape of a streak are on
both ends of the drum
surface.
8 Changing the output value The electric charge Execute [MC] at [System
remains on the drum Menu/Counter] key >
surface due to insufficient [Adjustment/Maintenance] >
discharging. [Service Settings] to reduce
the main charger output
value.
9 Drum unit replacement The drum surface is worn Replace the drum unit.
down.
10 LSU replacement The laser emission is Replace the LSU.
uneven.
7-60
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

1 Reinstalling the toner Toner is collected on one Sufficiently shake the toner
container side. container and reinstall it to the
main unit.
2 Checking the toner supply The toner supply opening Replace the toner container.
opening does not open.
3 Performing the items to Toner is deteriorated due to Execute [Developer Refresh]
improve the image quality frequent low coverage at [System Menu/Counter]
printing. key > [Adjustment/
Settings]. Then, execute
[Calibration] at [Adjustment/
Maintenance].
4 Checking the drum unit and The drum unit or the Reinstall the drum unit and
the developer unit developer unit is not the developer unit.
properly attached, so that
the developer roller does
not contact the drum.
5 Checking the developer The developer bias contact Correct the developer bias
bias contact is deformed. contact so that it surely
grounds.
6 Checking the developer The DS pulleys are dirty. Clean the DS pulleys at both
unit ends of the developer unit.
7 Developer unit The DS pulleys are faulty. Replace the developer unit.
replacement
8 Checking the drum unit and The drum surface has Execute the drum refresh. If
the developer unit condensation or is worn not repaired, replace the drum
down. unit.
9 Checking the main charger The voltage applied to the Correct the main charger
roller contact main charger roller contact roller contact so that it
is too high. grounds securely.
10 Cleaning the eraser The eraser is dirty. Clean the eraser.
11 Checking the eraser The eraser is faulty. Insert the unit all the way to
reconnect the connector. If
the issue is not resolved,
replace the drum unit.
PWB faulty. PWB.
13 Checking the LSU The LSU is dirty, or is Check the wire/FFC
faulty. connection and replace the
LSU.
14 Checking the primary The primary transfer roller When the primary transfer
transfer unit is not properly attached. roller comes off, replace the
primary transfer unit.
15 Checking the primary The primary transfer bias Correct the primary transfer
transfer bias contact contact is deformed. bias contact so that it grounds
securely.
16 Primary transfer unit The primary transfer belt is Replace the primary transfer
replacement deteriorated. unit.
7-61
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >

17 Checking the high voltage The high voltage PWB is Check the connection
PWB faulty. between the main/engine
PWB and the high voltage
PWB and replace the high
voltage PWB if necessary.
18 Checking the connection The wire is not properly Clean the terminal and
connected or is faulty. reinsert the connector all the
way after checking the wire of
the toner solenoid connection.
And in case if the wire is
broken, short-circuited or has
a ground fault, or the wire
terminals are peeled off,
replace the toner solenoid.
19 Checking the toner The toner solenoid is faulty. Reattach the toner solenoid
solenoid and reconnect the connector.
engine PWB.
(5-9)A part of the image is missing

2 Primary transfer unit The primary transfer roller Replace the primary transfer
replacement is dirty or deformed. unit.
(5-10)Offset image
1 Checking the drum unit and The drum surface is dirty. Execute Drum refresh.
the developer unit
down or has some
scratches.
3 Checking the developer The developer roller is dirty Clean the developer roller.
unit
4 Developer unit The developer roller Replace the developer unit.
replacement surface is worn down or
has scratches.
7-62
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
(5-11)Poor grayscale reproduction

1 Adjusting the image Calibration is not executed. Execute [Calibration] at
[Adjustment/Maintenance] in
the System Menu.
1 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface has Execute Drum refresh.
condensation.
2 Executing the Laser The LSU glass is dirty. Execute Laser Scanner
Scanner Cleaning Cleaning.
3 LSU replacement The LSU glass is Replace the LSU.
deteriorated.
(5-13)Vertical streaks and bands (black)

down.
3 Checking the main charger The main charge roller Clean the main charge roller
roller unit surface is dirty in the shape surface.
of a streak.
4 Replacing the main charger The main charge roller Replace the main charger
roller unit surface is deteriorated in roller unit.
the streak shape.
5 Checking the developer Foreign objects are on the Clean the developer roller. Or,
unit developer roller surface. replace the developer unit if
not repaired after cleaning.
7-63
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting >
(5-14)Vertical uneven density

1 LSU replacement LSU emits the laser Replace the LSU.
unevenly. (Inner mirror
comes off.)
2 Checking the primary The primary transfer belt Reattach the primary transfer
transfer unit does not contact the drum. unit.
(The primary transfer roller
does not evenly press the
primary transfer belt to the
drum.)
3 Primary transfer unit The primary transfer belt Replace the primary transfer
replacement contacts the drum unit.
unevenly.
4 Executing Drum refresh The drum surface has Execute Drum refresh.
condensation.
5 Checking the main charger The main charge roller Clean the main charger roller
roller unit surface is dirty in the shape surface. Replace the main
of a streak. charger roller unit if not
improved.
down.
7 Checking the developer The toner layer on the Execute the developer
unit developer roller is uneven. refresh. If not repaired,
replace the developer unit.

1 Executing the Laser The LSU glass is dirty. Execute Laser Scanner
Scanner Cleaning Cleaning.
2 Checking the developer Foreign objects are in the Replace the faulty developer
unit developer unit. unit.
3 Checking the laser path There are foreign objects Remove foreign objects on
on the laser path of the the frame or sealing material
LSU. between the developer unit
and the drum unit.
4 Checking the drum unit and The drum surface is dirty or Execute the drum refresh. If
the developer unit has some scratches. not repaired, replace the drum
unit.
roller unit surface is dirty or has some surface. Replace the main
scratches. charger roller unit if not
improved.
6 Cleaning the eraser The eraser is dirty. Clean the eraser.
7-64
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Feeding/Conveying Failures
7 - 2 Feeding/Conveying Failures
(1)Prior standard check items
No. Contents
(1-1) Paper jam due to the cover-open detection
(1-2) Paper jam due to the wave or curl in the fuser section of the damp paper
(1-3) Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or the paper curl
(1-4) Paper jam caused by the conveying guide, paper entry guide or the feed-shift guide
(1-5) Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette
(1-6) Paper jam due to the inferior paper
(1-7) Paper jam caused by the conveying rollers or the paper feed pulleys
(1-8) Paper jam due to the sensor
(1-9) Paper jam due to the setting / detection failure
(1-10) Paper jam due to the static electricity
(1-11) Paper jam caused by the installation environment (Papers inside the cassette are always
damp.)
7-65
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Content of Feeding/Conveying Failures

(1-1)Paper jam due to the cover-open detection
1 Opening and reclosing the The paper conveying unit is Open and close the rear
paper conveying unit not aligned to the other cover (conveying unit).
exterior covers.
2 Resetting the rear cover The rear cover is not Open and close the rear
aligned to the other exterior cover (conveying unit).
covers
3 Checking the paper The paper fanning is not Fan the paper well and load it
enough or the cutting edge by reversing the paper
of loaded paper is direction. Correct or replace
damaged. paper if a dog-ear is found.
4 Checking the paper The paper is wavy. Correct or replace paper. If
you cannot get user
agreement about the paper
replacement, relocate the
leading end of paper and the
trailing end or reload paper
upside down.
5 Checking the paper Unspecified paper is used Ask a user to use the
or foreign objects are on specified paper type. Or,
the paper. remove the paper with foreign
objects.
6 Checking the paper The paper is not properly Reload paper in the cassette.
loaded.
(1-2)Paper jam due to the wave or curl in the fuser section of the damp paper
1 Checking the paper The paper curls. Reload paper upside down.
2 Checking the paper The paper fanning is not Fan the paper well and load it
enough. by reversing the paper
direction
(1-3)Paper jam due to the dog-ear, paper skew, paper creases, fusing failure or the paper curl
1 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a When the dog-ear occurs,
and the paper piece of paper, etc. Or the check if a piece of torn paper,
leading edge of the sheet is foreign objects or the burrs on
bent. the part do not exist on the
paper path, and remove them.
2 Fuser temperature setting The paper curls since the Set the proper media type
fuser temperature is when paper curls.
improper.
7-66
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-4)Paper jam caused by the conveying guide, paper entry guide or the feed-shift guide
1 Checking the paper path The paper is caught with a Remove any paper or foreign
piece of paper, etc. objects on the paper path and
remove the burrs on the parts
such as the guide or the
actuator.
2 Checking the guide The guide is dirty. If the guide or the separation
needles are dirty with toner or
paper dust, etc., clean them
with a dry cloth or a brush.
3 Checking the guide The guide does not Check the guide, and remove
properly operate due to the any burrs. Also, if the guide
incorrect attachment or a does not operate smoothly
fault. manually, reattach the guide.
Then, replace the guide if it is
not fixed or if there is
deformation or frictional wear.
4 Checking the solenoid The solenoid does not Check the guide operation
operate properly. with the operation sounds
during test print. When the
guide does not move, or does
not operate smoothly,
reattach the guide. If not
repaired, replace the
solenoid.
(1-5)Paper jam caused by improperly loaded paper in the cassette

1 Relocating the paper width The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width
guides width guides do not fit with guides or the MP paper width
the paper size. guides along the paper size
when the paper skew or the
paper creases occur.
2 Checking the paper The paper fanning is not Fan paper and reload it in the
enough. paper source. If a part of the
paper is bent, remove it.
(1-6)Paper jam due to the inferior paper

1 Checking the paper Unspecified papers are Explain to the user to use the
used. paper within the
specifications.
7-67
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-7)Paper jam caused by the conveying rollers or the paper feed pulleys
1 Cleaning the roller The roller is dirty. Check if the conveying rollers
or the pulleys have no paper
dust, toner, foreign objects,
diameter change or frictional
wear and clean their surface.
If they have a diameter
change or frictional wear,
replace the parts.
2 Checking the clutch The clutch does not Check if the related motor
operate properly. properly operates by
executing the test print. Then,
check the clutch operation.
When the clutch does not
properly operate, go to the
next step. (If the motor does
not properly operate, perform
the measures by each jam
code.)
3 Checking the clutch The clutch is not properly Check if the connector is
attached, is not properly securely connected to the
connected, or the foreign clutch, the clutch is properly
objects adhere on the attached, and there are no
clutch. foreign objects on the clutch.
Then, perform the proper
measures if necessary.
4 Replacing the clutch The clutch is faulty. If the clutch does not operate
properly after reattaching and
reconnecting, or if the clutch
is rusted, replace it. (Use the
individual clutch or the unit
containing the clutch.)
5 Checking the bushing The bushing is dirty. Clean the roller's shaft or the
bushing when the load is
applied to the rotation of the
conveying rollers due to dirt
on them.
6 Checking the spring The spring comes off. Check if the spring came off,
or if it adequately presses the
roller or the pulley, and
reattach it if necessary.
7-68
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-8)Paper jam due to the sensor

1 Checking the sensor The sensor is faulty. Reattach the actuator or the
return spring for the sensor if
the actuator is caught up or
comes off.
2 Checking the sensor The sensor is dirty. When the sensor surface or
photoreceptor black felt is
dirty by paper dust, etc., clean
them.
3 Checking the sensor The sensor is faulty. Check the sensor operation
by executing the test print.
When the sensor does not
properly operate, clean or
replace the sensor.
(1-9)Paper jam due to the setting / detection failure

1 Checking the paper leading The leading edge margin is When there is no margin from
edge margin not enough. the paper leading edge to
4.0mm(+1.5/-0.0mm),
and, when the fuser jam
occurs while there is no check
line on 20mm(+/-1mm) from
the paper leading edge of the
test pattern that is output at
U034,
adjust the leading margin by
executing [Lead] at U402.
2 Relocating the paper width The paper size is Relocate the paper width
guides misdetected. guides or the MP paper width
guides along the paper size to
properly detect the paper
size.
3 Checking the settings The media type is not If the media type does not
properly set. match to the actual paper
weight (the paper jam occurs
due to the paper separation
failure), set the proper media
type at [Media Type Settings]
in the System Menu.
7-69
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(1-10)Paper jam due to the static electricity

1 Checking the ground The static electricity When the main unit is
accumulates. installed in the low humidity
environment where the static
electricity easily accumulates
on the conveying guide during
the continuous printing,
check if the discharge sheet
in the eject section and the
metal guide in the transfer
section are grounded
securely. If necessary,
reattach the parts.
(1-11)Paper jam caused by the installation environment (Papers inside the cassette are
always damp.)
1 Checking the paper Papers have been stored in Ask users to store paper in a
storage place the improper place. dry place.
(1-12)Paper jam indication

When a paper jam occurs, the machine immediately stops printing and displays the paper jam message on the oper-
ation panel. To remove paper misfed in the machine, pull out the cassette, open the front cover, and open the rear
cover 1 or 2.
The locations and clearing methods are displayed on the operation panel when a paper jam has occurred.
7-70
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Jam location indication
Paper E
jammed in
Cassette 1. F
1 JAM****
Help C
2
1 Shows the location of a paper jam. A
2 Displays the Help screen.
B
Figure 7-1
7-71
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Paper jam detection condition

Main unit + Document processor + Paper feeder (Option)
D
9 7 6
8
G
5
F
E
2 4
C
1
A
Figure 7-2
1. Paper sensor 6. DP original detection sensor

2. MP paper sensor 7. DP feed sensor
3. PF paper sensor 8. DP backside timing sensor *1
4. Registration sensor 9. DP front side timing sensor
5. Eject sensor
7-72
[CONFIDENTIAL]
List of JAM Code
Code JAM Code JAM Code JAM Code JAM

Position Position Position Position
0 - 211 - 4201 19 9002 -
100 - 501 A 4202 20 9009 -
101 - 502 B 4208 21 9010 -
104 - 508 F 4209 22 9061 -
105 - 509 C 4211 23 9110 D
106 - 511 E 4212 24 9300 D
107 - 512 E 4218 25 9310 D
110 - 518 E 4219 26 9400 D
111 - 519 E 9000 27 9410 D
7-73
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)Jam Codes
Error code Contents note

J0000 Power ON jam
J0107 Fuser temperature
stabilization time-out
J0100/J0101/J0104/ Paper jam caused by the
J0105/J0106 firmware factor
J0110/J0111 Cover open detection J0110: Rear cover open detection jam (by the
interlock switch)
J0111: Right cover open detection jam (by the
right cover switch)
J0211 PF rear cover open detection
J0501/J0502 No paper feed from cassette Condition: The paper stops at the paper feed
1/2 roller.
J0501/J0502 No paper feed from cassette Condition: The paper does not arrive at the paper
1/2 feed roller.
J0501/J0502/J0508/ No paper feed Condition: The paper does not arrive at the
J0509 registration section
J0501/J0502/J0508/ No paper feed Advance checkpoints at no paper feed from the
J0509 cassette
J0508 No paper feed from the
duplex section
J0509 No paper feed from the MP
tray
J0511 Multi-feeding from cassette 1
J0512 Multi-feed jam from cassette 2
J0518 Multi-feeding from the duplex
section
J0519 Multi-feeding from the MP tray
J4201/J4202/J4208/ Eject sensor non-arrival jam Condition: Paper jam before the fuser unit
J4209
J4201/J4202/J4208/ Eject sensor non-arrival jam Condition: Paper jam in the fuser section
J4209
J4201/J4202/J4208/ Eject sensor non-arrival jam Condition: Paper jam due to paper rolled up
J4209 around the fuser roller (The paper leading margin
is less than 4.0mm.)
J4201/J4202/J4208/ Eject sensor non-arrival jam Condition: Paper jam due to paper rolled up
J4209 around the fuser roller (The paper leading margin
is 4.0mm or more.)
J4211/J4212/J4218/ Eject sensor stay jam Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper
J4219 leading margin is less than 4.0mm.)
J4211/J4212/J4218/ Eject sensor stay jam Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper
J4219 leading margin is 4.0mm or more.)
J4211/J4212/J4218/ Eject sensor stay jam Condition: Paper jam in the eject unit
J4219
J9000 No original feed from the DP
J9002 Paper jam detected when
starting the paper conveying
7-74
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Error code Contents note

J9009 DP original jam caused by the
image scanning
J9010 Document processor open
detection
J9061 DP feed motor rotation error
J9110 DP feed sensor multi-feeding
jam
J9300 DP backside timing sensor
non-arrival jam
J9310 DP backside timing sensor
stay jam
J9400 DP timing sensor non-arrival
jam
J9410 DP timing sensor stay jam
7-75
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Content of Jam Code

J0000: Power ON jam
The power was turned on while the unspecified conveying sensor turns on.

actuator.
2 Cleaning the sensor The sensor is dirty. Clean the registration sensor
or the exit sensor (in the fuser
unit).
3 Checking the connection The sensor is not properly Reconnect the connector of
connected. the registration sensor or the
fuser unit (with the exit
sensor).
4 Replacing the sensor The sensor is faulty. Replace the registration
sensor or the fuser unit (with
the exit sensor).
J0107: Fuser temperature stabilization time-out

The fuser temperature does not achieve to the paper feed-able temperature within the specified time.

1 Resetting the main power The controller does not Turn off the power switch and
activate properly. unplug the power cord. After
5s passes, reconnect the
power cord and turn on the
power switch.
2 Checking the installation The electric power supply Plug the power cord into
environment fluctuates or the electric another wall outlet.
voltage reduces.
3 Checking the settings The actual paper and the Set the proper media type
paper settings (media type, from [Media Type Settings] in
paper size) do not match. the System Menu.
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware does not Upgrade the firmware to the
properly activate. latest version.
5 Checking the fuser unit The fuser heater is faulty. Replace the fuser unit.
J0100/J0101/J0104/J0105/J0106: Paper jam caused by the firmware factor

The firmware does not properly activate.

power switch.
7-76
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J0110/J0111: Cover open detection

J0110: Rear cover open detection jam (by the interlock switch)
J0111: Right cover open detection jam (by the right cover switch)
The cover-open is detected during print.

1 Checking the cover The covers are not fitted. Check if the cover is securely
closed, and reattach it if
necessary. Fix or replace it if it
is deformed.
2 Checking the cover switch The cover switch is not Reconnect the cover switch.
properly connected.
3 Checking the cover switch The cover switch does not Reattach the cover switch if it
operate properly. is off.
4 Replacing the cover switch The cover switch is faulty. Replace the cover switch.
J0211: PF rear cover open detection

The PF rear cover open is detected when printing the paper fed from cassette 2.

1 Checking the PF rear cover The PF rear cover is not Check if the PF rear cover is
aligned. closed securely, and reattach
it if necessary. When it cannot
be closed due to the
deformation, repair or replace
it.
2 Checking the PF rear cover The PF rear cover switch is Reconnect the connector of
switch not properly connected. the PF rear cover switch.
3 Checking the PF rear cover The PF rear cover switch Reattach the PF rear cover
switch does not properly operate. switch if it comes off.
4 Checking the PF rear cover The PF rear cover switch Replace the PF rear cover
switch does not properly operate. switch if it is faulty.
J0501/J0502: No paper feed from cassette 1/2

Condition: The paper stops at the paper feed roller.
After the paper feed clutch turns on at paper feed from cassette 1, 2, the next sensor does not turn on since the paper
stops at the paper feed roller.

actuator.
2 Checking the paper feed The conveying function of Clean the paper feed roller
roller the paper feed roller is not surface. If worn down, replace
enough. it.
7-77
[CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Checking the clutch The paper feed clutch is Reattach the paper feed
not connected, so the clutch or the PF paper feed
paper feed roller does not clutch, and reconnect the
rotate. connectors. If it is not fixed,
replace the clutch.
J0501/J0502: No paper feed from cassette 1/2

Condition: The paper does not arrive at the paper feed roller.
The leading edge does not come out from the cassette after the paper feed clutch turns on at paper feed from cassette
1, 2.

guides width guides do not fit with guides to fit them with the
the paper size. paper size.
2 Checking the pressure The conveying function of Reattach the spring for the
spring for the pickup roller the pickup roller is not pickup roller if it comes off. If
enough. deformed, replace it.
3 Checking the pickup roller The conveying function of Clean the pickup roller
the pickup roller is not surface. If worn down, replace
enough. it.
4 Checking the retard holder The load increases since Remove the retard holder and
the retard holder is caught reattach it while the cassette
up. is inserted. Or, replace the
retard holder.
5 Checking the paper feed The paper feed roller does Reattach the paper feed
shaft not rotate since the paper shaft. If deformed, replace it.
feed shaft for the roller is
not properly attached.
6 Checking the paper feed The paper feed clutch is Reattach the paper feed
clutch not connected, so the clutch and reconnect the wire.
paper feed roller does not Then, replace them if they are
rotate. not fixed.
7 Removing the foreign The cassette bottom plate Remove a piece of paper or
objects and checking the does not reach the upper foreign objects. Check if the
operation of the actuator limit position even if the lift cassette bottom plate reaches
solenoid turns on. the upper limit position by
lifting it up.
J0501/J0502/J0508/J0509: No paper feed

Condition: The paper does not arrive at the registration section
The registration sensor does not turn on at paper feed from cassette 1, 2, the duplex section or the MP tray.

1 Checking the paper feed The conveying function of Clean the paper feed roller
roller the paper feed roller is not surface. If worn down, replace
enough. it.
2 (When the paper skew The locations of the paper Relocate the paper width
occurs) Relocating the width guides do not fit with guides to fit them with the
paper width guides the paper size. paper size.
7-78
[CONFIDENTIAL]

3 (When the paper skew The actuator does not The actuator or the spring is
occurs) Checking the operate properly. deformed. If the actuator does
actuator and the spring not properly operate, replace
it.
4 (When the original is The paper is caught with Reattach the conveying
skewed) Checking the DP the conveying guide. guide. Remove the burrs on
original conveying guide the conveying guide surface
or replace the conveying
guide if there are burrs on it.
5 (When the paper skew The paper is caught with a Remove any paper or foreign
occurs) Checking the paper piece of paper, etc. objects on the paper path and
path remove the burrs on the parts
actuator.
6 Checking the connection The wire is not properly Check the following wire
connected. connection, and correct the
terminals and reconnect the
connectors all the way.
If the wire has no continuity or
the drawer connector is faulty,
replace them.
• PF paper detection sensor -
PF PWB (YC4)
• PF PWB (YC1) - Drawer
connector
• Drawer connector - Main/
engine PWB (YC47)
7 Checking the connection The drawer connector is Reinstall the paper feeder. If
not properly connected. the foreign objects are in the
drawer connector or there are
some damage, repair or
replace the drawer connector.
engine PWB.
J0501/J0502/J0508/J0509: No paper feed

Advance checkpoints at no paper feed from the cassette
The registration sensor does not turn on when passing the certain time at paper feed from the duplex section or the MP
tray.

1 Checking the paper The cut-end of the paper is Fan the paper well and load it
crushed. by reversing the paper
direction
2 Checking the paper The paper leading edge is Remove the bent paper.
bent.
7-79
[CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Checking the paper The paper is curled Correct or replace paper. If
downward or wavy. you cannot get user
upside down.
specifications.
5 Checking the paper foreign objects are on the Remove the paper with
paper. foreign objects.
J0508: No paper feed from the duplex section

The registration sensor does not turn on after turning the exit/duplex clutch on (after the paper switch-back).

1 Performing the prior There is a mechanical Perform the prior standard
standard check items cause such as the dirty check items.
guide, etc.
actuator.
3 Checking the paper The paper curls or is wavy. Replace the paper if it is
damp.
4 Checking the eject sensor The exit sensor does not Check the exit sensor
properly operate. operation. When it does not
properly operate, reattach the
sensor and reconnect the
connector. If not repaired,
replace the sensor.
5 Checking the exit/duplex The exit/duplex clutch does Check the exit/duplex clutch
clutch not properly operate. operation. When it does not
clutch and reinsert the
replace the clutch.
6 Checking the connection The wire is not properly Reconnect the following wire
connected. connectors and the FFC.
Replace the wire when it has
no continuity. Then, replace
the FFC when the FFC
terminals are deformed or the
FFC is broken.
• Exit sensor - Main/engine
PWB (YC15)
• Exit/duplex clutch -
Container relay PWB (YC2)
7-80
[CONFIDENTIAL]

7 Checking the conveying The conveying motor drive Reattach the conveying
motor is not transmitted to the motor.
duplex conveying roller.
engine PWB.
J0509: No paper feed from the MP tray

The registration sensor does not turn on during paper feed from the MP tray.

direction
bent.
upside down.
specifications.
actuator.
7 Checking the cam The cam to lift up the MP When the MP bottom plate
bottom plate does not does not lift up, adjust the
operate properly. position of the cam and
reattach it.
8 Checking the MP bottom The MP bottom plate is not When the MP bottom plate
plate properly attached. does not lift up, reattach it.
9 Checking the MP feed The MP feed solenoid does When the MP bottom plate
solenoid not operate properly. does not lift up, reattach the
MP feed solenoid and
reconnect the wire. If not
repaired, replace the
solenoid.
7-81
[CONFIDENTIAL]

10 Checking the MP paper The paper conveying Clean the MP paper feed
feed roller performance of the MP roller surface. If worn down,
feed roller is not enough. replace it.
11 Checking the actuator and The actuator does not The actuator or the spring is
the spring operate properly. deformed. If the actuator does
not properly operate, replace
it.
12 Checking the registration The registration sensor Check the registration sensor
sensor does not operate properly. operation. When it does not
replace it.
connected. connectors, and replace the
wire when it has no continuity.
• Registration sensor - Main/
engine PWB (YC16)
14 Checking the MP feed The MP feed solenoid does Reattach the MP feed
solenoid not operate properly. solenoid and reconnect the
replace it.
engine PWB.
J0511: Multi-feeding from cassette 1

The registration sensor does not turn off.

direction
bent.
5 Checking the retard pulley The paper separation force Clean the retard roller
of the retard roller is not surface. If worn down, replace
enough. it.
6 Checking the retard holder The retard holder comes Reattach the retard holder.
off.
7 Checking the retard The retard pressure spring Reattach the retard pressure
pressure spring comes off. spring.
7-82
[CONFIDENTIAL]

8 (When there is a paper The registration clutch Check the registration clutch
loop mark) Checking the does not engage and so operation. When it does not
registration clutch the registration roller does properly operate, reattach the
not rotate. clutch and reinsert the
replace it.
FFC is broken.
• Registration clutch -
engine PWB.
J0512: Multi-feed jam from cassette 2

The registration sensor does not turn off.

direction
bent.
5 Checking the retard pulley The paper separation force Clean the retard roller
of the retard roller is not surface. If worn down, replace
enough. it.
6 Checking the retard holder The retard holder comes Reattach the retard holder.
off.
7 Checking the retard The retard pressure spring Reattach the retard pressure
pressure spring comes off. spring.
8 (When there is a paper The registration clutch Check the registration clutch
loop mark) Checking the does not engage and so operation. When it does not
registration clutch the registration roller does properly operate, reattach the
replace it.
7-83
[CONFIDENTIAL]

FFC is broken.
engine PWB.
J0518: Multi-feeding from the duplex section

The registration sensor does not turn off during paper feed from the duplex section.

direction
bent.
4 Checking the paper The paper is wavy or curls Correct or replace paper. If
due to the moisture. you cannot get user
upside down.
5 (When the paper is at the The registration clutch Check the registration clutch
registration section and the does not engage and so operation. When it does not
paper loop mark is on the the registration roller does properly operate, reattach the
paper) Checking the not rotate. clutch and reinsert the
registration clutch connector. If not repaired,
replace it.
6 Checking the conveying The conveying motor drive Reattach the conveying motor
motor is not transmitted to the and the drive parts.
duplex conveying roller.
7-84
[CONFIDENTIAL]

engine PWB.
J0519: Multi-feeding from the MP tray

The registration sensor does not turn off during paper feed from the MP tray.

direction
bent.
4 Checking the paper The paper curls or is wavy. Correct or replace paper. If
you cannot get user
upside down.
5 Checking the MP feed The paper separation force Clean the MP paper feed
roller and the MP of the MP separation pad is roller and the MP separation
separation pad insufficient. pad. Or, replace them.
it.
7 Checking the registration The registration sensor Check the registration sensor
sensor does not operate properly. operation. When it does not
replace it.
• Registration sensor - Main/
engine PWB (YC16)
9 Checking the registration The registration clutch Check the registration clutch
clutch does not engage and so operation. When it does not
the registration roller does properly operate, reattach the
replace it.
7-85
[CONFIDENTIAL]

FFC is broken.
engine PWB.
J4201/J4202/J4208/J4209: Eject sensor non-arrival jam

Condition: Paper jam before the fuser unit
The eject sensor does not turn on due to the paper jam before the fuser rollers at paper feed from cassette 1/2, the
duplex section or the MP tray.

actuator.
3 (When the paper skew The conveying function of Clean the paper feed roller
occurs) Checking the paper the paper feed roller is not surface. If worn down, replace
feed roller enough. it.
it.
bent.
7-86
[CONFIDENTIAL]

you cannot get user
upside down.
specifications.
10 Checking the paper The paper curls. Replace the paper if it is
damp. (Replace with long
grain paper.)
11 Checking the settings The actual paper and the Set the proper media type
paper settings (media type, from [Media Type Settings] in
paper size) do not match. the System Menu.
12 Checking the conveying The conveying motor is not Reattach the conveying motor
motor properly attached or and reconnect the connector.
connected. Or, it is faulty. If not repaired, replace it.
engine PWB.

Condition: Paper jam in the fuser section
The eject sensor does not turn on when feeding paper from cassette 1, 2, the duplex section or the MP tray.

actuator.
it.
7-87
[CONFIDENTIAL]

6 (When the paper conveying The conveying function of Clean the paper feed roller
was delayed) Checking the the paper feed roller is not surface. If worn down, replace
paper feed roller enough. it.
7 (When the paper conveying The PF rear cover is Check if the PF rear cover is
delays) Checking the PF deformed. closed securely, and reattach
rear cover it if necessary. When it cannot
be closed due to the
deformation, repair or replace
it.
direction
bent.
upside down.
specifications.
13 Checking the registration The registration sensor is Reattach the registration
sensor not properly attached or the sensor and reconnect the
wire is not properly connector. Replace it if it is
connected. Or, the wire is not fixed.
faulty.
14 Checking the registration The registration clutch Reattach the registration
clutch does not engage or is not clutch and reconnect the
properly attached. Or, the connector. Then, check the
wire is not properly registration clutch operation.
connected or it is faulty. If it does not properly operate,
replace it.
engine PWB.
7-88
[CONFIDENTIAL]

Condition: Paper jam due to paper rolled up around the fuser roller (The paper leading
margin is less than 4.0mm.)
The eject sensor does not turn on due to the paper that is rolled up around the fuser roller at paper feed from cassette 1/
2, the duplex section or the MP tray.

1 Adjusting the paper leading The margin at the paper If each margin is not uneven,
edge timing leading edge is incorrect. adjust the leading margin in
U034 [LSU Out Top].
actuator.
it.
7 (When the paper skew The paper conveying force Clean the registration roller. If
occurs) Checking the of the conveying rollers is the surface is worn down,
conveying rollers insufficient. replace it.
bent.
you cannot get user
upside down.
specifications.
12 Checking the press roller Foreign material adheres Clean the press roller or
and heat roller on the press roller or the replace the fuser unit.
heat roller.
7-89
[CONFIDENTIAL]

13 Checking the fuser Foreign objects such as Replace the fuser unit.
separation plate toner are on the fuser
separation plate. Or, the
fuser separation plate is
deformed or improperly
attached.
14 Cleaning the machine The machine inside is Clean the machine inside.
inside contaminated with toner.
15 Checking the paper The paper curls. Replace with long grain
paper.
16 Checking the eject sensor The eject sensor is not Reattach the eject sensor and
properly attached, or the reconnect the wire. If it is not
wire is not properly fixed, replace it.
connected or faulty.
engine PWB.

Condition: Paper jam due to paper rolled up around the fuser roller (The paper leading
margin is 4.0mm or more.)
The eject sensor does not turn on due to the paper that is rolled up around the fuser roller at paper feed from cassette 1/
2, the duplex section or the MP tray.

heat roller.
attached.
paper.
7-90
[CONFIDENTIAL]

engine PWB.
J4211/J4212/J4218/J4219: Eject sensor stay jam

Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper leading margin is less than 4.0mm.)
The eject sensor does not turn off due to the paper jam in the fuser unit at paper feed from cassette 1/2, the duplex
section or the MP tray.

1 Adjusting the paper leading The margin at the paper If each margin is not uneven,
edge timing leading edge is incorrect. adjust the leading margin in
U034 [LSU Out Top].
actuator.
it.
7 (When the paper skew The paper conveying force Clean the registration roller. If
occurs) Checking the of the conveying rollers is the surface is worn down,
conveying rollers insufficient. replace it.
bent.
you cannot get user
upside down.
specifications.
7-91
[CONFIDENTIAL]

heat roller.
attached.
paper.
engine PWB.

Condition: Paper jam in the fuser unit (The paper leading margin is 4.0mm or more.)
The eject sensor does not turn off due to the paper jam in the fuser unit at paper feed from cassette 1/2, the duplex

heat roller.
attached.
paper.
7-92
[CONFIDENTIAL]

engine PWB.

Condition: Paper jam in the eject unit
The exit sensor does not turn off due to the paper jam in the exit section at paper feed from cassette 1 2, the duplex

1 Checking the paper tray There is an obstacle on the Remove an obstacle.
tray.
2 Checking the paper tray The paper eject stopper on Store the paper eject stopper.
the tray is not stored.
actuator.
it.
7 Checking the eject guide Foreign objects such as Clean the eject guide, or
toner are on the eject replace the eject unit.
guide.
8 Checking the eject roller The eject roller does not Replace the eject/fuser
rotate. pressure release unit if the
drive gear is deformed, the
torque limiter is faulty, or the
bushing is worn down.
9 Checking the exit/duplex The exit/duplex clutch is Check the exit/duplex clutch
clutch not properly attached or operation. When it does not
connected. Or, it is faulty. properly operate, reattach the
clutch and reinsert the
replace the clutch.
7-93
[CONFIDENTIAL]

11 Checking the actuator The actuator is not properly Reattach the actuator.
attached. (The attached
locations of it and the
actuator are mistakenly
interchanged.)
12 (When the sensor does not The fuser unit or the eject/ Check the installation
turn on while the paper fuser pressure release unit condition of the fuser unit and
stays in) Checking the is not properly installed. the eject/fuser pressure
fuser unit or the eject/fuser release unit, and reattach the
pressure release unit units if necessary.
engine PWB.
J9000: No original feed from the DP

The DP feed sensor does not turn on even after trying to feed again.

1 Checking the original The leading edge of the Remove the folded original.
original is bent.
2 Checking the original The original curls Correct or replace the
downward, or is wavy. original. If the original cannot
be replaced, relocate the
leading end of the original and
the trailing end.
3 Checking the original The original out of Explain users to use the
specification is used. original within the
specifications.
4 Checking the original Foreign objects adhere on Remove the original with the
the original. foreign objects.
5 Checking the paper path The original is caught up by Remove any paper or foreign
a piece of paper. objects on the paper path and
actuator.
6 Checking the DP feed roller The paper conveying force Clean the DP feed roller
of the DP feed roller is surface. If worn down, replace
insufficient. it.
it.
8 Checking the DP feed The DP feed sensor is Reattach and reconnect the
sensor faulty. DP feed sensor. Then,
replace it if it is not fixed.
7-94
[CONFIDENTIAL]

9 Checking the DP feed The DP feed motor is not Reattach and reconnect the
motor properly attached or DP feed motor. Then, replace
connected. Or, it is faulty. it if it is not fixed.
J9002: Paper jam detected when starting the paper conveying

The unspecific conveying sensor turns on when starting the paper conveying.

1 Checking the paper path The foreign objects such as Remove any paper or foreign
a piece of paper are on the objects on the paper path and
paper path. remove the burrs on the parts
actuator.
2 Cleaning the sensor The sensor is dirty. Clean the DP sensors on the
original path.
DP feed sensor, DP timing
sensor
3 Checking the connection The connector is not Reconnect the connector of
properly connected to the the DP sensors on the original
sensor. path.
sensor
4 Replacing the sensor The sensor is faulty. Replace the DP sensors on
the original path.
sensor
J9009: DP original jam caused by the image scanning

The next original is in standby during the image scanning.

1 Resetting the main power The controller does not Remove the originals and
activate properly. check the sensors. Then, turn
the power switch and unplug
the power cord. After 5s
passes, reconnect the power
cord and turn the power
switch on.
3 Executing [Memory The memory on the main/ Execute [Memory
Diagnostics] engine PWB is faulty. Diagnostics] at [System
Menu/Counter] key >
[Adjustment/Maintenance] >
[Service Settings].
7-95
[CONFIDENTIAL]
J9010: Document processor open detection

The document processor open is detected during the original conveying.

1 Checking the DP The document processor is Check if the document
not properly installed, or it processor is securely closed,
is faulty. and reinstall it if necessary.
Fix or replace the DP covers if
it is deformed.
2 Checking the DP opening/ The DP opening/closing Reconnect the DP opening/
closing sensor sensor is not properly closing sensor.
connected.
3 Checking the DP opening/ The DP opening/closing Reattach the DP opening/
closing sensor sensor does not operate closing sensor if it is off.
properly.
4 Replacing the DP opening/ The DP opening/closing Replace the DP opening/
closing sensor sensor is faulty. closing sensor.
J9061: DP feed motor rotation error

The DP feed motor keeps rotating. Or, the firmware does not properly operate.

1 Resetting the main power The controller does not Remove a piece of paper from
activate properly. the conveying section and
check the sensors. Then, turn
off the power switch and
unplug the power cord. When
power cord and turn the
power switch on.
J9110: DP feed sensor multi-feeding jam

The DP feed sensor does not turn off.

original is bent.
the trailing end.
specifications.
5 (When the original is The paper conveying force Clean the DP feed roller
skewed) Checking the DP of the DP feed roller is surface. If worn down, replace
feed roller insufficient. it.
7-96
[CONFIDENTIAL]

6 (When the original is The position of the DP Align the DP original width
skewed) Relocating the DP original width guides does guides to the original size.
original width guides not match to the original
size.
7 (When the original is The original is hooked with Reattach the DP feed guide. If
skewed) Checking the DP the DP feed guide. the burrs are on the original
feed belt conveying side of the DP feed
guide, remove them or
replace the DP feed guide.
8 Checking the DP feed The DP feed sensor is dirty, Clean the DP feed sensor.
sensor is not properly attached, is Then, reattach and reconnect
not properly connected, or the DP feed sensor.
it is faulty.
J9300: DP backside timing sensor non-arrival jam

The DP CIS does not turn on when passing the certain pulse since the DP feed sensor turned on.

actuator.
size.
4 (When the original is The original is caught up Reattach the conveying
skewed) Checking the DP with the DP original guide. Remove the burrs on
original conveying guide conveying guide. the conveying guide surface
5 (When the original The original conveying Clean the DP conveying roller
conveying delays) force of the DP conveying A surface. If worn down,
Checking the DP roller A is not enough. replace it.
conveying roller A
6 (When the original The DP top cover is Check if the DP top cover is
conveying delays) deformed. securely closed. If it cannot
Checking the DP top cover be closed due to the
deformation, replace it.
original is bent.
the trailing end, or reload the
original upside down at the
duplex scan.
7-97
[CONFIDENTIAL]

specifications.
11 Checking the DPCIS DP CIS sensor is not Reattach the DPCIS, and
properly attached, the reconnect the connector. If
connector is not properly not repaired, replace it.
connected, or it is faulty.
J9310: DP backside timing sensor stay jam

The DP backside timing sensor does not turn off after passing the certain pulse since the DP feed sensor turned off.

actuator.
size.
conveying delays) force of the DP conveying A, B surface. If worn down,
Checking the DP roller A, B is not enough. replace them.
conveying roller A, B
original is bent.
duplex scan.
specifications.
7-98
[CONFIDENTIAL]

10 Checking the DP backside The DP backside timing Reattach and reconnect the
timing sensor sensor is not properly DP backside timing sensor.
attached, or the wire is not Then, replace it if it is not
properly connected. Or fixed.
they are faulty.
J9400: DP timing sensor non-arrival jam

The DP timing sensor does not turn on when passing the certain pulse since the DP CIS sensor turned on.

actuator.
size.
conveying delays) force of the DP conveying A surface. If worn down,
Checking the DP roller A is not enough. replace it.
conveying roller A
original is bent.
duplex scan.
specifications.
7-99
[CONFIDENTIAL]

11 Checking the DP timing The DP timing sensor is not Reattach and reconnect the
sensor properly attached, or the DP timing sensor. Replace it if
wire is not properly it is not fixed.
connected. Or they are
faulty.
J9410: DP timing sensor stay jam

The DP timing sensor does not turn off when passing the certain pulse since the DP feed sensor turned off.

original is bent.
duplex scan.
specifications.
actuator.
size.
conveying delays) force of the DP conveying A, B surface. If worn down,
Checking the DP roller A, B is not enough. replace them.
conveying roller A, B
7-100
[CONFIDENTIAL]

11 Replacing the DP base The DP base is deformed Replace the DP base if the
and it contacts the DP DP base is deformed and
timing sensor. contacts the DP timing
sensor.
12 Checking the DP timing The DP timing sensor is not Reattach and reconnect the
sensor properly attached, or the DP timing sensor. Replace it if
wire is not properly it is not fixed.
connected. Or they are
faulty.
7-101
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Troubleshooting > Self diagnostic
7 - 3 Self diagnostic
(1)Self diagnostic function
This machine is equipped with a self-diagnostic function. When a problem is detected, the machine stops operating
and displays an error message on the operation panel. An error message consists of a message prompting a contact
to service personnel and a four-digit error code indicating the type of error.
If the part causing the problem was not supplied, use the unit including the part for replacement.
*: Before attempting to check the fuser unit and the low voltage power supply PWB, be sure to turn the power switch
off and unplug the machine from power. (Allow at least 5 s before starting to conduct service until the capacitors on
the circuit boards have been completely discharged.)
7-102
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(2)Self diagnostic codes

Error code Contents
C0030 FAX PWB system error
C0070 FAX PWB incompatible detection error
C0100 Backup memory device error
C0120 MAC address data error
C0130 Backup memory reading/writing error
C0140 Backup memory data error
C0150 EEPROM error
C0160 EEPROM data error
C0170 Charger count error
C0180 Machine serial number mismatch
C0190 Backup memory device error (Engine)
C0800 Image processing error
C0830 FAX PWB flash program area checksum error
C0840 RTC error ('Time for maintenance T' appears)
C0870 Image data transmission error (FAX PWB - Main/engine PWB)
C0920 FAX file system error
C0970 Power interruption detection
C1810 Paper Feeder communication error
C2200 Main motor steady-state error
C2500 Conveying motor steady-state error
C3100 Carriage error
C3200 CIS lamp error
C3210 DPCIS lamp error
C3300 CIS AGC error
C3310 DPCIS AGC error
C3500 Communication error between the scanner and the ASIC
C4000 Polygon motor startup error
C4010 Polygon motor steady-state error
C4101 Laser (K) error
C4102 Laser (C) error
C4103 Laser (M) error
C4104 Laser (Y) error
C4600 LSU cleaning motor error
C4700 VIDEO ASIC device error
C6000 Broken fuser heater
C6020 Fuser heater high temperature error
C6030 Broken fuser thermistor wire
C6050 Fuser heater low temperature error
C6400 Zero-cross signal error
C6610 Fuser press-release sensor error
C7101 T/C sensor (K) error
C7102 T/C sensor (C) error
C7103 T/C sensor (M) error
7-103
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Error code Contents

C7104 T/C sensor (Y) error
C7200 Internal thermistor broken (Developer)
C7210 Inner thermistor short-circuited (developer)
C7220 Broken LSU thermistor
C7230 LSU thermistor short-circuited
C7401 Developer unit K type mismatch error
C7402 Developer unit C type mismatch error
C7403 Developer unit M type mismatch error
C7404 Developer unit Y type mismatch error
C7601 ID sensor (L) error
C7602 ID sensor (R) error
C7611 Bias calibration read value error K
C7612 Bias calibration read value error C
C7613 Bias calibration read value error M
C7614 Bias calibration read value error Y
C7620 Automatic color registration failure
C7800 Outer thermistor broken
C7810 Outer thermistor short-circuited
C7901 Drum unit K EEPROM error
C7902 Drum unit C EEPROM error
C7903 Drum unit M EEPROM error
C7904 Drum unit Y EEPROM error
C7911 Developer unit K EEPROM error
C7912 Developer unit C EEPROM error
C7913 Developer unit M EEPROM error
C7914 Developer unit Y EEPROM error
C9540 Backup data error
C0030: FAX PWB system error

The FAX processing cannot be continued due to the malfunction of the FAX PWB.

1 Checking the FAX PWB The FAX PWB does not Turn off the power switch and
operate properly. pull out the power plug. After
passing 5s, reattach the FAX
PWB and reinsert the power
plug. Then, turn on the power
switch.
2 Replacing the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is faulty. Replace the FAX PWB.
7-104
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error

Abnormal detection of FAX control PWB incompatibility in the initial communication with the FAX control PWB, any
normal communication command is not transmitted.

1 Checking the FAX PWB The incompatible FAX Install the FAX PWB for the
PWB is installed. applicable model.
C0100: Backup memory device error

An abnormal status is output from the flash memory.

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM does not Turn off the power switch and
operate properly. unplug the power cord. After
power switch.
2 Checking the EEPROM The EEPROM is not Reattach the EEPROM on the
properly attached. main/engine PWB.
engine PWB.
C0120: MAC address data error

The MAC address data is incorrect.

1 Resetting the main power The flash memory does not Turn off the power switch and
power switch.
2 Checking the MAC address The MAC address is Replace the main/engine
incorrect. PWB when the MAC address
is not indicated on the
network status page.
7-105
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C0130: Backup memory reading/writing error

The reading or writing into the flash memory is unavailable.

power switch.
engine PWB.
C0140: Backup memory data error

The data read from the flash memory is judged as abnormal at the startup.

power switch.
2 Executing U021 The flash memory does not Execute U021.
operate properly.
engine PWB.
C0150: EEPROM error

1. The write value and read value after writing in the EEPROM do not match 8 times consecutively.
2. The values read from the same area immediately after reading the data from the EEPROM do not match 8 times
consecutively.

power switch.
2 Checking the EEPROM on The EEPROM is not Reattach the EEPROM on the
the main/engine PWB properly attached. main/engine PWB.
7-106
[CONFIDENTIAL]

engine PWB.
C0160: EEPROM data error

The data read from the EEPROM is judged as abnormal.

power switch.
2 Executing U021 The data stored in the Execute U021.
EEPROM on the main/
engine PWB is faulty.
C0170: Charger count error

The values in one of the billing counters, life counter or the scanner counter mismatch between the main side and the
engine side.

1 Checking the machine The main/engine PWB for Check the machine serial Nos
serial number in the the different main unit is of the main / engine PWB at
EEPROM on the main/ installed. U004, and install the correct
engine PWB main/engine PWB if the main
No. differs.
2 Checking the machine The EEPROM for the Check the machine serial Nos
serial number in the different main unit is of the main / engine PWB at
engine PWB EEPROM to the main/engine
PWB if the engine No. differs.
3 Checking the main/engine The main/engine PWB is When the main machine
PWB faulty. serial No. differs at U004,
replace the main/engine PWB
and execute U004.
4 Checking the EEPROM on The EEPROM is faulty. When the machine serial No.
the main/engine PWB in the engine PWB differs at
U004, reattach the EEPROM
on the main/engine PWB.
7-107
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C0180: Machine serial number mismatch

The machine serial Nos. in the main PWB and the EEPROM on the engine PWB mismatch when turning the power on.

1 Checking the machine The main/engine PWB for Check the machine serial Nos
serial number in the the different main unit is of the main / engine PWB at
engine PWB main/engine PWB if the main
No. differs.
2 Checking the machine The EEPROM for the Check the machine serial Nos
serial number in the different main unit is of the main / engine PWB at
engine PWB EEPROM to the main/engine
PWB if the engine No. differs.
3 Checking the main/engine The main/engine PWB is When the main machine
PWB faulty. serial No. differs at U004,
replace the main/engine PWB
and execute U004.
4 Checking the EEPROM on The EEPROM is faulty. When the machine serial No.
the main/engine PWB in the engine PWB differs at
U004, reattach the EEPROM
on the main/engine PWB.
C0190: Backup memory device error (Engine)

The data is not read from the EEPROM when turning the power on. (3 retries)

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM is not Turn off the power switch and
properly read. unplug the power cord. After
power switch.
engine PWB.
3 Replacing the EEPROM The data is not properly Contact the service support to
read since the EEPROM is acquire the new EEPROM,
faulty. and install it on the main/
engine PWB.
C0500: Engine soft drive lick detection

When the main motor is kept rotating on a regular cycle and the motor is unintentionally kept rotating.
(Also monitored in maintenance mode)
7-108
[CONFIDENTIAL]

1 Checking the image data The image data is faulty. When this issue occurs only
when handling the certain
image data, check if the
image data is faulty.
2 Checking the situation The printing operation of Acquire the job's log if the
the certain file is faulty. phenomenon can be
reproduced by specifying the
job when the error was
detected.
engine PWB.
C0510: High voltage remote error

While drum motor was stopped, the high voltage remote or main charged DC bias was turned on continuously
for more than 270[ms].

switch.
2 Checking the connection The flash memory on the Reconnect the wires or the
FAX PWB is not properly FFCs on the main/engine
read. PWB.
3 Initializing the fax The data in the FAX PWB Execute U600 to initialize the
is faulty. FAX.
C0520: Backup task error

While the main charging bias was turned off, the developing bias was turned on continuously for 3263[ms] or more..

1 Setting the RTC RTC is not properly set. Set the RTC in the System
Menu.
2 Checking the main/engine The main/engine PWB is Re-tighten the screws for the
PWB not correctly attached. PWB.
engine PWB.
7-109
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C0530: Solenoid always ON

Cyclic writing to EEPROM was locked for 30[s].
(High priority processing is occupied, EEPROM write control was not processed for 30[s].).

1 Resetting the main power The FAX PWB does not Turn off the power switch and
switch.
2 Checking the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is not Reconnect the connectors of
connected properly. the following wire.
• Main/engine PWB (YC12) -
FAX PWB
C0550: 2 component development restriction monitoring

The main motor is driven at a drum surface potential of 0 V and a developing bias of 0 V.
The drum surface potential is biased higher than the intermediate potential 1 of the drum, and the main motor is driven
at a developing bias of 0 V.

1 Initializing the fax FAX control values are Execute U600 to initialize the
incorrect FAX.
switch.
FAX PWB
C0560: AD conversion error

No AD-Translation Interrupt for 2 [s]

1 Checking the interlock The interlock switch does Check if the interlock switch
switch not turn on. turns on by opening and
closing the rear cover. If it
does not turn on, reattach the
interlock switch.
7-110
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Checking the low voltage The connectors on the low Reconnect the connectors on
PWB voltage PWB are not the low voltage PWB. If the
properly connected. wire is pinched up or
damaged, fix or replace the
wire.
3 Checking the main/engine The main/engine PWB Turn off the power switch and
PWB does not correctly operate. unplug the power cord. After
power switch.
4 Replacing the low voltage The low voltage PWB is Replace the low voltage
PWB faulty. PWB.
C0800: Image processing error

The print sequence jam (J010x) was detected 2 times continuously.

1 Checking the image data The image data is faulty. When this issue occurs only
when handling the certain
image data, check if the
image data is faulty.
2 Checking the situation The printing operation of Acquire the job's log if the
the certain file is faulty. phenomenon can be
reproduced by specifying the
job when the error was
detected.
engine PWB.
C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error

The program stored in the flash memory on the FAX PWB is broken so it cannot perform.

switch.
read. PWB.
is faulty. FAX.
7-111
[CONFIDENTIAL]

C0840: RTC error ('Time for maintenance T' appears)

[Check at start-up]
• RTC values are old.
• Power has not been turned on for over 5 years.
• RTC value is older than 2000/1/1 00:01.
[Periodic check per 5 minutes after start-up]
• RTC values are older than the ones at the last check.
• Partial operation by power reset after C840 error and 'Time for Maintenance T' is indicated.

1 Setting the RTC RTC is not properly set. Set the RTC in the System
Menu.
2 Checking the main/engine The main/engine PWB is Retighten the screws for the
PWB not correctly attached. PWB.
engine PWB.
C0870: Image data transmission error (FAX PWB - Main/engine PWB)

Data was not properly transmitted even if the specified times of retries were made when large volume data is transmitted
between the FAX PWB and the main/engine PWB.

switch.
FAX PWB
C0920: FAX file system error

The backup data could not be stored since the file system of the flash memory is faulty.

incorrect FAX.
7-112
[CONFIDENTIAL]

switch.
FAX PWB
C0970: Power interruption detection

1 Checking the interlock The interlock switch does Check if the interlock switch
switch not turn on. turns on by opening and
closing the rear cover. If it
does not turn on, reattach the
interlock switch.
2 Checking the low voltage The connectors on the low Reconnect the connectors on
PWB voltage PWB are not the low voltage PWB. If the
properly connected. wire is pinched up or
damaged, fix or replace the
wire.
3 Checking the main/engine The main/engine PWB Turn off the power switch and
PWB does not correctly operate. unplug the power cord. After
power switch.
4 Replacing the low voltage The low voltage PWB is Replace the low voltage
PWB faulty. PWB.
C1810: Paper Feeder communication error

No paper feeder is detected after the paper feeder installation is detected when turning the power on.

1 Checking the connection It is not properly connected Reconnect to the main unit.
to the main unit.
7-113
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Checking the connection The wire is not properly Check the following wire
connected. connection, and correct the
terminals and reconnect the
connectors all the way.
If the wire has no continuity or
the drawer connector is faulty,
replace them.
• PF PWB (YC1) - Drawer
connector
• Drawer connector - Main/
engine PWB (YC47)
3 Checking the PF PWB. The PF PWB is faulty. Reconnect the connectors on
the PF PWB. Then, repair or
replace the wires if they are
pinched by the other part or if
they have any damage. If not
repaired, replace the PF
PWB.
engine PWB.
C2200: Main motor steady-state error

The ready signal turns off for 1s consecutively after the motor is stabilized.

1 Checking drum unit K Drum unit K locks up. Check if the drum is rotated
manually. If it locks up,
replace drum unit K.
2 Checking the connection of The connector is not Reconnect the connector.
the connector properly connected.
3 Checking the connection The wire is faulty. Reconnect the following wire
connectors, and replace the
• Main motor - Main/engine
PWB (YC11)
4 Checking the main motor The main motor drive parts Check the rotation of the
drive transmission parts do not properly operate. coupling and the gear. When
they do not rotate smoothly,
clean the gear and apply
grease to the gear.
Also, replace them if they are
damaged.
5 Checking the main motor The main motor is faulty. Replace the main motor.
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-114
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C2500: Conveying motor steady-state error

The ready signal does not turn on for 1s consecutively after the conveying motor is stabilized.

connected or is faulty. connectors and the FFC.
FFC is broken.
• Conveying motor - Container
relay PWB (YC11)
2 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the engine firmware
to the latest version
C3100: Carriage error

The position of the home position sensor (turning on / off) mismatches when turning the main power on or finishing the
original scan by the scanner.

1 Checking the scanner A load is applied to the If there is an excessive load to
movement scanner movement. the scanner movement when
manually shifting the scanner
carriage, check if foreign
material is on the scanner
drive belt. Then, clean the
scanner drive belt and apply
the grease to the ISU shaft.
2 Checking the tension of the A load is applied to the Adjust the drive belt tension
drive belt scanner movement since properly.
the drive belt tension is
improper.
FFC is broken.
• Scanner motor - Main/
engine PWB (YC19)
(YC18)
7-115
[CONFIDENTIAL]

connected or is faulty. connectors, and replace the
• Home position sensor -
6 Checking the home The home position sensor Replace the home position
position sensor is faulty. sensor.
7 Checking the scanner The scanner motor is faulty. Reattach the scanner motor
motor and reconnect the wire.
Replace it if it is not fixed.
FU(ChartA)].
9 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the engine firmware
to the latest version
engine PWB.
C3200: CIS lamp error

The white reference data retrieved by lighting the lamp at the initial operation is at the specified value or less.

FU(ChartA)].
C3210: DPCIS lamp error

The input data when the CIS lamp is lit at the initial operation is at the specified value or less.

1 Checking the connection of The connector is not Reconnect the following FFC.
the connector properly connected. When the FFC terminals are
FFC.
(YC4)
2 Replacing the DPCIS The CIS lamp does not Replace the DPCIS, and then
light. execute U411 [DP
FD(ChartA)].
7-116
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C3300: CIS AGC error

The DPCIS could not acquire the correct white reference value while AGC process was executed.

FFC.
(YC18)
FU(ChartA)].
C3310: DPCIS AGC error

The DPCIS could not acquire the correct white reference value while AGC process was executed.

1 Checking the connection of The connector is not Reconnect the following FFC.
the connector properly connected. When the FFC terminals are
FFC.
(YC4)
2 Replacing the DPCIS The CIS lamp does not Replace the DPCIS, and then
light. execute U411 [DP
FD(ChartA)].
C3500: Communication error between the scanner and the ASIC

The communication error was detected during the communication between the scanner ASIC and the engine CPU.

FFC.
(YC18)
2 Checking the scanner The scanner carriage is Replace the scanner carriage
carriage faulty. and execute U411
FU(ChartA)].
PWB faulty. PWB.
7-117
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C4000: Polygon motor startup error

The polygon motor drive is not stabilized for 10s or more after start.

1 Checking the connection The FFC is not properly Reconnect the following wire
connected, or it is faulty. connectors and reconnect the
• LSU - Main/engine PWB
(YC20, YC21)
2 Checking the polygon The polygon motor does Check the rotation sound of
motor not rotate properly. the polygon motor, and
reattach or replace the LSU if
it does not rotate properly.
C4010: Polygon motor steady-state error

The ready signal turns off for 1s consecutively after the polygon motor is stabilized.

1 Checking the connection The FFC is not properly Reconnect the following wire
connected, or it is faulty. connectors and reconnect the
(YC20, YC21)
2 Checking the polygon The polygon motor does Check the rotation sound of
motor not rotate properly. the polygon motor, and
reattach or replace the LSU if
it does not rotate properly.
C4101: Laser (K) error

The laser is not received for 1s since the light emission of the laser (K) was started.

connected or is faulty. connectors and reconnect the
(YC20, YC21)
2 Checking the LSU The laser diode is faulty. Reinstall or replace the LSU
while paying attention to the
static electricity.
7-118
[CONFIDENTIAL]

3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is faulty. Upgrade the firmware to the
latest version.
C4102: Laser (C) error

The laser is not received for 1s since the light emission of the laser (C) was started.

(YC20, YC21)
latest version.
C4103: Laser (M) error

The laser is not received for 1s since the light emission of the laser (M) was started.

(YC20, YC21)
latest version.
7-119
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C4104: Laser (Y) error

The laser is not received for 1s since the light emission of the laser (Y) was started.

(YC20, YC21)
2 Checking the LSU The LSU is faulty. Replace the LSU.
latest version.
C4600: LSU cleaning motor error

The excessive electric current is detected for 5s consecutively during the LSU cleaning motor operation.

1 Checking the LSU The LSU cleaning drive Clean the LSU cleaning drive
gear and the cleaning pad gear and the cleaning pad.
have the load and so they
are not shifted smoothly.
2 Checking the LSU cleaning The LSU cleaning motor is Reattach the LSU cleaning
motor not properly attached, or it motor and reconnect the
is faulty. connector. If not repaired,
replace it.
FFC is broken.
• LSU cleaning motor -
4 LSU replacement The LSU cleaning drive Replace the LSU.
gear or the cleaning pad
are deformed, or they are
faulty.
7-120
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C4700: VIDEO ASIC device error

1. The communication with VIDEO ASIC failed 5 times continuously.
2. After writing the data to VIDEO ASIC, the value mismatching error repeated 8 times continuously by trying to read the
data from the same address.

1 Resetting the main power The ASIC operation on the Turn off the power switch and
PWB is faulty. unplug the power cord. After
power switch.
2 Checking the connection The wire is not properly Reconnect the wires or the
connected. FFCs on the main/engine
PWB.
3 Checking the main/engine The main/engine PWB is Upgrade the main firmware
PWB faulty. and the engine firmware to
the latest version.
C6000: Broken fuser heater

1. The fuser thermistor does not detect 100°C / 212°F when passing 20s during the warm-up.
2. The fuser thermistor does not detect the ready display temperature when passing 40s since it detected 100°C / 212°F
during the warm-up.

1 Checking the fuser unit The thermistor cannot Remove a piece of paper
detect the correct remaining in the fuser unit.
temperature since a piece
of paper remains in the
fuser unit.
• Fuser unit - Main/engine
PWB (YC23)
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the Upgrade the engine firmware
latest version. to the latest version
• Low voltage PWB (YC2) -
5 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser thermistor cannot Replace the fuser unit.
detect the correct
temperature due to the
failure of the fuser unit such
as the broken fuser heater
(broken thermostat) or the
faulty fuser thermistor.
6 Replacing the low voltage The low voltage PWB is Replace the low voltage PWB
PWB faulty. when the fuser heaters
always turn on.
7-121
[CONFIDENTIAL]

C6020: Fuser heater high temperature error

The fuser thermistor detects 220°C / 428°F or more for 1s.

1 Reinstalling the fuser unit The drawer connector of Reinstall the fuser unit so that
the fuser unit is not inserted the drawer connector is
securely. connected securely.
PWB (YC23)
detect the correct
latest version.
C6030: Broken fuser thermistor wire

The AD value of the fuser thermistor which is averaged with 10 values taken in every 2ms (after erasing the maximum
and minimum values), is monitored in every 100ms. Then, the value is detected as the broken wire level (1020 or more).

1 Removing a piece of paper The thermistor cannot Remove a piece of paper.
detect the correct
fuser unit.
2 Checking the drawer The terminals of the drawer Clean, or correct the terminals
connector connectors between the of the drawer connector at the
main unit and the fuser unit fuser unit, and reconnect it.
have foreign objects or are
deformed.
PWB (YC23)
7-122
[CONFIDENTIAL]

detect the correct
latest version.
C6050: Fuser heater low temperature error

The fuser thermistor detects 80°C / 176°F or less for 1s during the standby or printing.

1 Checking the power supply The power supply voltage Connect the power cord to a
voltage reduces. different wall outlet if the
power supply voltage
descends by 10% or more of
the rated voltage, or multiple
devices use the same outlet.
fuser unit.
PWB (YC23)
4 Checking the fuser unit The fuser thermistor cannot Replace the fuser unit.
detect the correct
latest version.
7 Replacing the low voltage The low voltage PWB is Replace the low voltage PWB
PWB faulty. when the fuser heaters
always turn on.
7-123
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C6400: Zero-cross signal error

The zero-cross signal is not input for 1s continuously when the fusers heater turns on.

3 Checking the low voltage The low voltage PWB is Replace the low voltage
PWB faulty. PWB.
C6610: Fuser press-release sensor error

1. The fuser pressure release sensor does not turn on when passing 10s since the pressure operation is started.
2. The fuser pressure release sensor does not turn off when passing 10s since the release operation is started.

fuser unit.
2 Checking the fuser The fuser press-release Check if the pressure can be
pressure release operation does not operate properly. reduced by reverse-rotating
the fuser gear
3 Checking the fuser The fuser press-release Check if the fuser press-
pressure release sensor sensor is not properly release sensor is interrupted
attached. by the actuator at the fuser
pressure decrease operation.
If it is not interrupted, reattach
the parts.
wires when they have no
continuity.
• Fuser press-release sensor
- Main/engine PWB
7-124
[CONFIDENTIAL]

5 Checking the fuser The fuser pressure release Reconnect the following wire
pressure release clutch clutch is not properly connectors and the FFC.
attached. Replace the wire when it has
FFC is broken.
• Fuser pressure-release
clutch - Container relay PWB
(YC2)
6 Replacing the fuser The fuser pressure release Replace the fuser pressure
pressure release clutch does not properly operate. release clutch.
8 Checking the fuser unit The internal parts of the Replace the fuser unit.
fuser unit such as the fuser
press-release sensor are
faulty.
C7101: T/C sensor (K) error

The sensor output value was less than the specified value for a certain time, or exceeded it.

1 Checking toner container K The toner container is not Reinstall toner container K.
properly installed.
2 Checking toner container K The toner supply opening Replace toner container K.
of the toner container
cannot open.
3 Checking the drive The drive gear or the Clean the toner supply drive
transmission to toner coupling do not properly gear and the coupling, and
container K rotate or the excessive load apply grease to them.
is applied to them.
4 Checking the connection The wire is not properly Insert developer unit K all the
connected or is faulty. way and reconnect the
connector.
And, reconnect the following
wires. When there is no
continuity in the following
wires, replace them.
• Developer unit K (T/C
sensor (K)) - Unit relay PWB
(YC9)
• Unit relay PWB (YC1) -
7-125
[CONFIDENTIAL]

5 Checking developer unit K The gears or the spiral in Replace developer unit K.
the developer unit don't
rotate, or the T/C sensor
(K) is faulty.
connected. connectors and reconnect the
• Toner solenoid (K) -
7 Checking the toner The toner solenoid does Reattach the toner solenoid
solenoid not properly operate. (K) and reconnect the
replace it.
8 Replacing the unit relay The unit relay PWB is Replace the unit relay PWB.
PWB faulty.
engine PWB.
C7102: T/C sensor (C) error


1 Checking toner container C The toner container is not Reinstall toner container C.
properly installed.
2 Checking toner container C The toner supply opening Replace toner container C.
cannot open.
transmission into toner coupling do not properly gear and the coupling, and
container C rotate or the excessive load apply grease to them.
is applied to them.
7-126
[CONFIDENTIAL]

4 Checking the connection The wire is not properly Insert developer unit C all the
connector.
Reconnect the following
• Developer unit C (T/C
sensor (C)) - Unit relay PWB
(YC7)
5 Checking developer unit C The gears or the spiral in Replace the developer unit C.
the developer unit do not
(C) is faulty.
FFC is broken.
• Toner solenoid (C) -
7 Checking the toner The toner solenoid (C) Reattach the toner solenoid
solenoid (C) does not properly operate. (C) and reinsert the
replace it.
PWB faulty.
engine PWB.
C7103: T/C sensor (M) error


1 Checking toner container M The toner container is not Reinstall toner container M.
properly installed.
7-127
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Checking toner container M The toner supply opening Replace toner container M.
cannot open.
container M rotate or the excessive load apply grease to them.
is applied to them.
4 Checking the connection The wire is not properly Insert developer unit M all the
connected or is faulty. way to reconnect the
connector.
• Developer unit M (T/C
sensor (M)) - Unit relay PWB
(YC8)
5 Checking developer unit M The gears or the spiral in Replace the developer unit M.
(M) is faulty.
FFC is broken.
• Toner solenoid (M) -
7 Checking the toner The toner solenoid (M) Reattach the toner solenoid
solenoid (M) does not properly operate. (M) and reconnect the
replace it.
PWB faulty.
engine PWB.
7-128
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7104: T/C sensor (Y) error


1 Checking toner container Y The toner container is not Reinstall toner container Y.
properly installed.
2 Checking toner container Y The toner supply opening Replace toner container Y.
cannot open.
container Y rotate or the excessive load apply grease to them.
is applied to them.
4 Checking the connection The wire is not properly Insert developer unit Y all the
connector.
• Developer unit Y (T/C
sensor (Y)) - Unit relay PWB
(YC6)
5 Checking developer unit Y The gears or the spiral in Replace the developer unit Y.
(Y) is faulty.
FFC is broken.
• Toner solenoid (Y) -
7 Checking the toner The toner solenoid (Y) Reattach the toner solenoid
solenoid (Y) does not properly operate. (Y) and reconnect the
replace it.
PWB faulty.
7-129
[CONFIDENTIAL]

engine PWB.
C7200: Internal thermistor broken (Developer)

The input sampling value of the sensor exceeds the reference value. (It is controlled at 25°C / 77°F after detection.)

connector.
(YC9)
2 Checking developer unit K The T/C sensor (in- Replace developer unit K.
machine thermistor) is
faulty.
PWB faulty.
engine PWB.
7-130
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7210: Inner thermistor short-circuited (developer)

The input sampling value of the sensor is less than the reference value.

connector.
(YC9)
2 Checking developer unit K The T/C sensor (in- Replace developer unit K.
machine thermistor) is
faulty.
PWB faulty.
engine PWB.
C7220: Broken LSU thermistor

The input sampling value of the LSU thermistor exceeds the reference value.

(YC20, YC21)
2 LSU replacement The LSU (LSU thermistor) Replace the LSU.
is faulty.
7-131
[CONFIDENTIAL]

engine PWB.
C7230: LSU thermistor short-circuited

The input sampling value of the LSU thermistor is less than the reference value.

(YC20, YC21)
2 LSU replacement The LSU (LSU thermistor) Replace the LSU.
is faulty.
engine PWB.
C7401: Developer unit K type mismatch error

Developer unit K does not conform with the main unit.

connector.
(YC9)
2 Checking developer unit K The different type of the Install the correct developer
developer unit is installed. unit.
7-132
[CONFIDENTIAL]

PWB faulty.
engine PWB.
C7402: Developer unit C type mismatch error

Developer unit C mismatches with the main unit.

connector.
(YC7)
2 Checking developer unit C The different type of the Install the correct developer
PWB faulty.
engine PWB.
7-133
[CONFIDENTIAL]
C7403: Developer unit M type mismatch error

Developer unit M mismatches with the main unit.

connector.
(YC8)
2 Checking developer unit M The different type of the Install the correct developer
PWB faulty.
engine PWB.
C7404: Developer unit Y type mismatch error

Developer unit Y mismatches with the main unit.

connector.
(YC6)
2 Checking developer unit Y The different type of the Install the correct developer
PWB faulty.
7-134
[CONFIDENTIAL]

engine PWB.
C7601: ID sensor (L) error

The sensor output value is out of the specified range.

1 Cleaning the ID sensor (L) The ID sensor (L) is dirty. Clean the ID sensor (L)
surface.
2 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor shutter does Open and close the ID sensor
shutter not operate properly. shutter manually. If it does not
operate properly, reattach it.
FFC.
• ID sensor (L) - Main/engine
PWB (YC24)
4 Checking the ID sensor (L) The ID sensor (L) is not Reattach the ID sensor (L).
properly attached.
5 Replacing the ID sensor (L) The ID sensor (L) is faulty. Execute [Calibration] at
the System Menu. If an error
is detected at that time,
replace the ID sensor (L).
C7602: ID sensor (R) error

The sensor output value is out of the specified range.

1 Cleaning the ID sensor (R) The ID sensor (R) is dirty. Clean the ID sensor (R)
surface.
2 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor shutter does Open and close the ID sensor
shutter not operate properly. shutter manually. If it does not
7-135
[CONFIDENTIAL]

FFC.
• ID sensor (R) - Main/engine
PWB (YC24)
4 Checking the ID sensor (R) The ID sensor (R) is not Reattach the ID sensor (R).
properly attached.
5 Replacing the ID sensor The ID sensor (R) is faulty. Execute [Calibration] at
(R) [Adjustment/Maintenance] in
the System Menu. If an error
is detected at that time,
replace the ID sensor (R).
C7611: Bias calibration read value error K

The ID sensors cannot properly read the patch density on the primary transfer belt when executing Calibration.

1 Resetting the main power The ID sensor does not Turn off the power switch and
power switch.
2 Checking the ID sensor The ID sensor shutter is not Open and close the ID sensor
shutter opened. shutter manually. If it does not
3 Cleaning the ID sensors The ID sensor is dirty. Clean the ID sensor surface.
FFC.
• ID sensor - Main/engine
PWB (YC24)
5 Re-executing Calibration The last calibration failed. Execute [Calibration] at
the System Menu.
6 Checking the primary The primary transfer belt Check the service call log on
transfer unit surface is dirty. the Event Log. If the service
call repeatedly appears, clean
surface.
7 (When the print is too light) The parts in the drum unit, Clean or replace the drum
Cleaning or replacing the developer unit or the LSU unit, developer unit and the
drum unit / developer unit / are dirty or worn down. LSU if the output image is too
LSU light.
7-136
[CONFIDENTIAL]

call repeatedly appears,
unit.
engine PWB.
C7612: Bias calibration read value error C


power switch.
FFC.
PWB (YC24)
the System Menu.
surface.
LSU light.
unit.
7-137
[CONFIDENTIAL]

engine PWB.
C7613: Bias calibration read value error M


power switch.
FFC.
PWB (YC24)
the System Menu.
surface.
LSU light.
unit.
7-138
[CONFIDENTIAL]

engine PWB.
C7614: Bias calibration read value error Y


power switch.
FFC.
PWB (YC24)
the System Menu.
surface.
LSU light.
unit.
7-139
[CONFIDENTIAL]

engine PWB.
C7620: Automatic color registration failure

1. The patch print position on the primary transfer belt is not within the readable area by the ID sensor.
2. The primary transfer belt surface is dirty, or the patch print density is too light.

power switch.
FFC.
PWB (YC24)
the System Menu.
surface.
LSU light.
unit.
9 (When the color The LSU or the drum unit is Reinstall the LSU and the
registration shifts) not installed in the correct drum unit to the correct
Reinstalling / replacing the position, or the LSU is positions when the color
LSU and the drum unit faulty. registration is shifted. If the
issue is not resolved, replace
the LSU.
7-140
[CONFIDENTIAL]

engine PWB.
C7800: Outer thermistor broken

The input sampling value of the temperature sensor (Outer thermistor) exceeds the reference value.

• Temperature sensor - Main/
engine PWB (YC35)
2 Replacing the temperature The temperature sensor is Replace the temperature
sensor faulty. sensor.
C7810: Outer thermistor short-circuited

The input sampling value of the temperature sensor (Outer thermistor) is less than the reference value.

• Temperature sensor - Main/
engine PWB (YC35)
2 Replacing the temperature The temperature sensor is Replace the temperature
sensor faulty. sensor.
C7901: Drum unit K EEPROM error

1. No response from the device is detected for 5ms or more 5 times continuously when reading / writing the data.
2. The reading data of 2 points mismatches 8 times continuously.
7-141
[CONFIDENTIAL]
3. The reading data and the writing data mismatch 8 times continuously.

1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM data in drum Turn off the power switch and
unit K is faulty. unplug the power cord. After
power switch.
2 Checking the connection The wire is not properly Insert drum unit K all the way
connected or is faulty. in and reconnect the
connector.
When there is no continuity in
the following wires, replace
them.
• Drum unit K - Unit relay
PWB
• Unit relay PWB - Main/
engine PWB
3 Drum unit replacement The EEPROM in drum unit Replace drum unit K.
K is faulty.
PWB faulty.
C7902: Drum unit C EEPROM error


unit C is faulty. unplug the power cord. After
power switch.
2 Checking the connection The wire is not properly Insert drum unit C all the way
connected or is faulty. and reconnect the connector.
them.
• Drum unit C - Unit relay
PWB
engine PWB
3 Drum unit replacement The EEPROM in drum unit Replace drum unit C.
C is faulty.
PWB faulty.
7-142
[CONFIDENTIAL]

C7903: Drum unit M EEPROM error


unit M is faulty. unplug the power cord. After
power switch.
2 Checking the connection The wire is not properly Insert drum unit M all the way
them.
• Drum unit M - Unit relay
PWB
engine PWB
3 Drum unit replacement The EEPROM in drum unit Replace drum unit M.
M is faulty.
PWB faulty.
C7904: Drum unit Y EEPROM error


unit Y is faulty. unplug the power cord. After
power switch.
7-143
[CONFIDENTIAL]

2 Checking the connection The wire is not properly Insert drum unit Y all the way
them.
• Drum unit Y - Unit relay
PWB
engine PWB
3 Drum unit replacement The EEPROM in drum unit Replace drum unit Y.
Y is faulty.
PWB faulty.
C7911: Developer unit K EEPROM error


1 Resetting the main power The EEPROM data in Turn off the power switch and
developer unit K is faulty. unplug the power cord. After
power switch.
connector.
(YC9)
3 Replacing developer unit K The EEPROM in developer Replace developer unit K.
unit K is faulty.
PWB faulty.
7-144
[CONFIDENTIAL]

engine PWB.
C7912: Developer unit C EEPROM error


developer unit C is faulty. unplug the power cord. After
power switch.
connector.
(YC7)
3 Replacing developer unit C The EEPROM in developer Replace the developer unit C.
unit C is faulty.
PWB faulty.
engine PWB.
C7913: Developer unit M EEPROM error

7-145
[CONFIDENTIAL]

developer unit M is faulty. unplug the power cord. After
power switch.
connector.
(YC8)
3 Replacing developer unit M The EEPROM in developer Replace the developer unit M.
unit M is faulty.
PWB faulty.
engine PWB.
C7914: Developer unit Y EEPROM error


developer unit Y is faulty. unplug the power cord. After
power switch.
7-146
[CONFIDENTIAL]

connector.
(YC6)
3 Replacing developer unit Y The EEPROM in developer Replace the developer unit Y.
unit Y is faulty.
PWB faulty.
engine PWB.
C9540: Backup data error

When multiple parts are replaced at the same time, the internal data is changed and it interferes with the machine
operation. Consequently, the main unit cannot recover.

1 Checking the PWB Multiple PWBs were Recover to the original, if 2 or
replaced at the same time. more of the following related
parts were replaced at the
same time.
• Related parts: Memory, each
PWB
2 Checking the unit Multiple units were Be sure not to perform the
replaced at the same time. following works at the same
time when the memory or
each PWB is replaced.
• Replacing the drum unit or
the developer unit
• Relocating the drum units to
other color's position inside a
main unit
7-147
[CONFIDENTIAL]
(3)System Error (Fxxxx) Outline
Error code Contents

F000 Communication error between the main unit and CPU
F010 Program read error (SSD)
F020 RAM read / write error
F040 Communication error between the main unit and CPU (Communication error between
the controller and the print engine)
F050 Engine main program error
Content of System Error (Fxxxx) Outline

F000: Communication error between the main unit and CPU
The panel cannot be detected since the CPU communication between the main/engine PWB and the operation panel
PWB is unavailable.

power switch.
connected. When the FFC terminals are
FFC.
Operation main PWB (YC1) -
3 Checking the DDR memory The DDR memory is not Clean the terminal of the DDR
properly connected. memory on the main/engine
PWB, and reinsert it.
4 Executing U021 The backup RAM data is Execute U021 to initialize the
faulty. backup RAM data.
engine PWB.
6 Replacing the operation The operation panel PWB Replace the operation panel
panel PWB is faulty. PWB.
7-148
[CONFIDENTIAL]
F010: Program read error (SSD)

The garbled 2bit data was detected during the program read from the flash memory.

1 Resetting the main power The program does not start Turn off the power switch and
up properly. unplug the power cord. After
power switch.
connected. When the FFC terminals are
FFC.
Operation main PWB (YC1) -
engine PWB.
F020: RAM read / write error

The error appears during the reading/writing check of the RAM for the CPU when the main unit starts up.

1 Resetting the main power The program does not start Turn off the power switch and
up properly. unplug the power cord. After
power switch.
engine PWB.
7-149
[CONFIDENTIAL]
F040: Communication error between the main unit and CPU (Communication error between
the controller and the print engine)
The communication between the controller and the print engine is faulty.

1 Resetting the main power The communication Turn off the power switch and
between the controller and unplug the power cord. After
the print engine is faulty. 5s passes, reconnect the
power switch.
engine PWB.
F050: Engine main program error

The engine program cannot start up.

1 Resetting the main power The print engine ROM Turn off the power switch and
checksum is faulty. unplug the power cord. After
power switch.
3 Checking the EEPROM The EEPROM is not Reattach the EEPROM.
properly attached.
engine PWB.
7-150
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation >
(4) System Error (Fxxxx) Outline

The document is described for the outline of the factors of the Fxxx errors that are not described in the self-diagnosis error c2NV/2NW/2PB/2PCode list.
Please utilize it as the measures when the system is not recovered after power off/on or it frequently occurs.
*: Please initially check the following when the error (Fxxx) is indicated.
- Check the DIMM (DDR memory) and neighboring parts: Check the contact on the control PWB by releasing and reinserting the DIMM.
If the error repeats after that, replace the DIMM.
*: Power is partially supplied to this machine when the power is turned off.
Unplug the power plug and check if the F-code error is not released when passing one minute or more after turning the power off and then on.
Numbe Contents Verification procedure & check point Remarks

r
- It locks on a Welcome screen.It locks on a (1) Check the harness of * (between Main board <=>HDD), and the connection *Note 60[s]
starting logo (Taskalfa/Ecosys) screen.(Even if state of a connector between Panel<=>Main boards, and perform an operation
DDR memory option is installed
time passes for a definite period of time in more check.
than * notes, a screen does not change)
(2) Check contact of a DDR memory (extracting) and perform an operation check.
If exchangeable, it will exchange and will perform an operation check.
(3) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of U024) *
(4) U021 Controller backup initialization is carried out and an operation check is
performed.
(5) Exchange a PanelMain board and perform an operation check.
(6) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
(7) It will get, if USBLOG is obtainable, and contact service headquarters.
* : only HDD standard model
F000 CF000 will be displayed if * notes progress is (1) Check the harness of * (between Main board <=>HDD), and the connection DDR memory is installed
carried out for a definite period of time with a state of a connector between Panel<=>Main boards, and perform an operation
Welcome screen.The communication fault check.
between Panel-Main boardsCommunication
(2) Check contact of a DDR memory (extracting) and perform an operation check.
fault between Panel Core-Main Core Notes 2
If exchangeable, it will exchange and will perform an operation check.
performed.
(6) Exchange a PanelMain board and perform an operation check.
(7) It will get, if USBLOG is obtainable, and contact service headquarters.
* : only HDD standard model
* Note 2 : Only Dual Core CPU model
7-156
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation >

r
F12X Abnormality detecting in a Scan control section (1) Check the harness between Scan/DP<=>Main boards, and the connection
state of a connector, and perform an operation check.
performed.
(4) Exchange a Scan/DP board and perform an operation check.
(6) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
* Only HDD standard model
F14X Abnormality detecting in a FAX control part (1) Check the harness between FAX<=>Main boards, and the connection state of
a connector, and perform an operation check.
performed.
(4) Perform a deed operation check for DIMM Clear by U671. * Notes(Since it
disappears when received data remain, cautions are required.)
(5) Exchange FAX_DIMM and perform an operation check. * Notes
(6) Exchange a FAX board and perform an operation check.
* Note Only model which has Flash for FAX data in a Main board
F15X Abnormality detecting in an authentication (1) Check the harness between authentication device <=>Main boards, and the Authentication device: IC card reader etc.
device control section connection situation of a connector, and perform an operation check.
(3) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check.
(5) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. *
F18X Abnormality detecting in a Video control section (1) Check the harness between Engine<=>Main boards, and the connection state
of a connector, and perform an operation check.
performed.
(3) Exchange an Engine board and perform an operation check.
7-157
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation >

r
F1DX Abnormality detecting of the image memory (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of U024) * * Poor arrangement of F1D4:Random Access
Management Department Memory
(1) Confirmation of U340
(2) Initialization of a set point (U021)
F21X, Abnormality detecting in an image-processing (1) Check contact of a DDR memory and perform an operation check.
F22X, part
F23X
F24X Abnormality detecting in the system (1) Check contact of a DDR memory and perform an operation check. * F248 is the abnormalities of a printer process.In
Management Department recurring by specific printer data, please give me
cooperation at acquisition of capture data and
(3) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. USBLOG.
(4) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check. [Controller failure]
(5) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. * Turn power on and off to clear USB log is required
for investigation
F25X Abnormality detecting in a network management (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of U024) * * It may occur according to a visitor's network
department environment.
(4) Get USBLOG and packet capture and contact service headquarters.
F26X, Abnormality detecting in the system (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of U024) * (SSM:F26X)
F27X, Management Department
F28X,
F29X, (3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F2AX
F2BX, Abnormality detecting in a network control part (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of U024) *
F2CX,
F2DX,
F2EX, (3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F2FX,
F30X,
F31X, (Depending on an analysis result, it is packet capture acquisition)
F32X
7-158
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation >

r
F33X Abnormality detecting in the Scan Management (1) Check the harness between Scan/DP<=>Main boards, and the connection
Department state of a connector, and perform an operation check.
performed.
(4) Exchange a Scan/DP board and perform an operation check.
F34X Abnormality detecting in the Panel Management (1) Check the harness between Panel<=>Main boards, and the connection state of Error in panel process (Command response
Department a connector, and perform an operation check. * Notes timeout, etc.)
(2) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of U024) * Not occurring with hardware factor
performed.
(4) Exchange a Panel board and perform an operation check. * Notes
* Note : A Dual Core CPU model and HyPAS model
F35X Abnormality detecting in the printing controlling (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of U024) *
Management Department
F37X Abnormality detecting in the FAX Management (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of U024) *
Department
(3) Perform a deed operation check for DIMM Clear by U671.(Since it disappears
when received data remain, cautions are required.) * notes
(4) Exchange FAX_DIMM and perform an operation check. * Notes
* Note Only model which has Flash for FAX data in a Main board
F38X Abnormality detecting in the authentication (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of U024) *
authorized Management Department
7-159
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation >

r
F3AX, Abnormality detecting in the Entity Management (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of U024) *
F3BX, Department
F3CX,
F3DX, (3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F3EX,
F3FX,
F40X, (5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters.
F41X,
F42X,
F43X,
F44X,
F45X
F46X Abnormality detecting of a printer rendering part (1) Exchange boards and perform an operation check. * F46F is the abnormalities of a printer process.In
recurring by specific printer data, please give me
(2) the acquisition wish of USBLOG -- carry out
cooperation at acquisition of capture data and
(Depending on the (2) case, it is print capture data acquisition) USBLOG.
F47X, Abnormality detecting of an image editing (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of U024) *
F48X processing part
F4DX, Abnormality detecting in the Entity Management (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of U024) *
F4EX Department
F4FX Abnormality detecting in the JOB Management (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of U024) * Since the USB log immediately after occurrence is
Department needed for analysis, please give me cooperation
of acquisition.
F50X Abnormality detecting in the FAX Management (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of U024) * Since the USB log immediately after occurrence is
Department needed for analysis, please give me cooperation
of acquisition.
No flash memory for FAX data HDD non-standard
7-160
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation >

r
F51X, Abnormality detecting in a JOB execution part (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of U024) * Since the USB log immediately after occurrence is
F52X, needed for analysis, please give me cooperation
F53X, of acquisition.
F55X, (3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F56X,
F57X
F58X, Abnormality detecting in the various-services (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of U024) * Since the USB log at the time of occurrence is
F59X, Management Department needed for analysis, please give me cooperation
F5AX, of acquisition.
F5BX, (3) Exchange a Main board and perform an operation check.
F5DX (especially X is 9, A, B, C or D) occurs at
F5CX,
(4) Exchange HDD and perform an operation check. * Fax reception or URDS related process.
F5DX,
F5EX (5) Get USBLOG and contact service headquarters. Check transmission data from PC
F5FX Abnormality detecting in a service execution (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of U024) * Since the USB log immediately after occurrence is
part needed for analysis, please give me cooperation
of acquisition.
F60X Abnormality detecting in the maintenance mode/ (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. In case of F60A:
Remote Service Management Department (FULL of U024) * 60A is occurred when device registered
(2) Carry out U021 Main backup initialization and perform an operation check. Remote Service detects off-line status with
external system.
Please check device Network Settings and
Network environment which device is used
(include Disconnection rule/status in night time
* Only HDD standard model and on weekends.)
F62X Abnormality detecting in a service execution (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of U024) * Since the USB log at the time of occurrence is
part needed for analysis, please give me cooperation
of acquisition.
F63X Abnormality detecting in a device control section (1) Initialize HDD and perform an operation check. (FULL of U024) *
7-161
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
7-1 FAX Related Errors

(1) FAX Related Errors
No. Contents
(1) C0030: FAX PWB system error
(2) C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error
(3) C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error
(4) C0870: Image data transmission error (FAX PWB - Main/engine PWB)
(5) C0920: FAX file system error
(6) When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted, all of it is transmitted as the A4 size
data.
(7) FAX cannot be sent
Content of FAX Related Errors

(1-1) C0030: FAX PWB system error
The FAX processing cannot be continued due to the malfunction of the FAX PWB.

switch.
(1-2) C0070: FAX PWB incompatible detection error

Abnormal detection of FAX control PWB incompatibility in the initial communication with the FAX control PWB, any
normal communication command is not transmitted.

1 Checking the FAX PWB The incompatible FAX Install the FAX PWB for the
PWB is installed. applicable model.
(1-3) C0830: FAX PWB flash program area checksum error

The program stored in the flash memory on the FAX PWB is broken so it cannot perform.

switch.
7-162
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

read. PWB.
is faulty. FAX.
(1-4) C0870: Image data transmission error (FAX PWB - Main/engine PWB)
Data was not properly transmitted even if the specified times of retries were made when large volume data is transmitted
between the FAX PWB and the main/engine PWB.

switch.
FAX PWB
(1-5) C0920: FAX file system error

The backup data could not be stored since the file system of the flash memory is faulty.

incorrect FAX.
switch.
FAX PWB
7-163
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(1-6) When the data of the A3 or B4 size originals is transmitted, all of it is transmitted as the
A4 size data.

1 Checking the settings The receivable size in the Select [B4] or [A3/Ledger]
destination unit is A4 / according to the receivable
Letter. size at the Address book
registration display > [i-FAX] >
[Paper size].
2 Checking the settings The receivable size in the Select the condition of the
destination unit is A4 / destination unit when
Letter. transmitting the data, choose
[B4] or [A3/Ledger] according
to the receivable sizes.
(1-7) FAX cannot be sent

1 Checking the connection of The modular cable Reconnect the modular cable.
the modular cable disconnects.
2 Changing the connection If the adapter and the Directly connect the main unit
switching device or the like to the telephone line.
is connected to the
telephone line, it is
affected.
3 Checking the settings The line settings are Correct the line settings.
incorrect. (Reduce the transmission
speed, etc.)
4 Checking the destination The destination unit is Wait a while and then redial
unit busy. the number if busy tones are
heard.
5 Checking the destination The modular cable is Request the destination unit
unit disconnected in the to reconnect the modular
destination unit if the cable.
destination unit does not
receive the calling.
6 Checking the setting in the The manual reception is Ask the destination unit to
destination unit set in the destination unit if change the reception settings.
the destination unit does
not receive the calling.
7 Checking the sending When transmitting the data Input a pause at the last of the
content to the other country, the destination FAX number.
communication line is
automatically cut.
7-164
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(2) Communication Errors

Error code Contents
U00000/E00000 No response or busy after the set times of redials.
U00100/E00100 Transmission was interrupted by a press of the stop/clear key.
U00200/E00200 Reception was interrupted by a press of the [Stop] key.
U00300/E00300 Recording paper on the destination unit has run out during transmission.
U00430/E00430 Polling request was received but interrupted because of a mismatch in permitted
number.Or, sub address-based bulletin board transmission request was received but
interrupted because of a mismatch in permitted ID in the transmitting unit.
U00431/E00431 An sub address bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the specified sub
address password was not registered.
U00432/E00432 A sub address bulletin board transmission was interrupted because the sub address
password did not match.
U00433/E00433 A sub address bulletin board transmission request was received but data was notpresent
in the sub address box.
U00440/E00440 Sub address confidential reception was interrupted because the specified sub address
password was not registered.
U00450/E00450 The reception was interrupted because the permitted ID and FAX number did not match
in the restricted transmission (password check transmission) in the destination unit.
U00460/E00460 The encryption reception was interrupted because the specified encryption box number
was not registered.
U00462/E00462 Encrypted reception was interrupted because the encryption key for the
specifiedencryption box was not registered.
U00601/E00601 1. The original feed jam occurs.
2. The original length exceeds the maximum allowed.
U00613/E00613 Image writing section error
U00656/E00656 The data was not transmitted due to an error in the modem.
U00690/E00690 System error
U00800/E00800 A page transmission error occurred because of the reception of an RTN or PIN signal.
U00811/E00811 A page reception error remained after retry of transmission in the ECM mode.
U00900/E00900 An RTN or PIN signal was transmitted because of a page reception error.
U01000/E01000 An FTT signal was received for a set number of times after TCF signal transmission at
2400 bps.
Or, an RTN signal was received in response to a Q signal (excluding EOP) after
transmission at 2400 bps.
U01001/E01001 Function as indicated by DIS signal is not consistent with the one of own machine.
U01016/E01016 T1 timeout occurs since MBF signal is received but DIS signal is not after sending EOM
signal.
U01019/E01019 Command send retrial times exceeds since significant signal is not received after
sending CNC signal. (between own machines)
sending CTC signal. (ECM)
U01021/E01021 Command send retry time has exceeded since message signal is not received after
sending EOR•Q signal. (ECM)
sending RR signal. (ECM)
U01028/E01028 T5 timeout is detected when sending in ECM (ECM)
U01052/E01052 DCN signal is received after sending RR signal (ECM)
U01080/E01080 PIP signal is received after sending PPS and NULL signals.
7-165
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Error code Contents

U01092/E01092 Communication is stopped since there are impossible combination of symbol speed and
communication speed at V.34 sending.
U01093/E01093 A DCN or other inappropriate signal was received during phase B of transmission.
U01094/E01094 DCS/NSS signal send retrial time is exceeded at phase B during transmission.
U01095/E01095 Command send retrial time is exceeded since significant signal is not received after
sending (PPS) Q signal at phase D during transmission.
U01096/E01096 DCN signal or invalid command is received at phase D during transmission.
U01097/E01097 The preset number of command retransfers was exceeded after transmission of an
RRsignal or no response.
U01100/E01100 Function indicated by DCS signal is not consistent with the one of own machine.
U01101/E01101 Function indicated by NSS signal except communication type is not consistent with the
one of own machine.
U01102/E01102 DTC (NSC) signal is received while own machine has no transmission data.
U01110/E01110 No response is received after sending DIS signal.
U01111/E01111 No response is received after sending DTC (NSC) signal.
U01113/E01113 No response after transmitting an FTT signal.
U01125/E01125 No response after transmitting a CNS signal. (Between the units of our make)
U01129/E01129 No response after transmitting an SPA signal. (Short protocol)
U01141/E01141 DCN signal is received after sending DTC signal.
U01143/E01143 DCN signal is received after sending FTT signal.
U01155/E01155 DCN signal is received after sending SPA signal. (simplified protocol)
U01160/E01160 Maximum transmission time per line is exceeded while receiving message.
U01162/E01162 Reception was aborted due to a modem malfunction during message reception.
U01191/E01191 Communication is stopped with error during image data receipt sequence at V.34.
U01193/E01193 No response, DCN signal or invalid command is received at phase C/D during reception.
U01194/E01194 DCN signal is received at phase B during reception.
U01195/E01195 No message is received at phase C during reception.
U01196/E01196 Error line control overflow and decoding error occurred in messages during reception.
U01400/E01400 An invalid one-touch key was specified during communication.
U01500/E01500 A communication error occurred when calling in V.8 mode.
U01600/E01600 A communication error occurred when called in V.8 mode.
U01700/E01700 A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).
U01720/E01720 The communication error appears at phase 4 (replacing the modem parameter).
U01721/E01721 The communication was interrupted because there is no communication speed
commonly used with the destination unit.
U01800/E01800 A communication error occurred in phase 2 (line probing).
U01810/E01810 A communication error occurred in phase 3 (primary channel equivalent device training).
U01820/E01820 The communication error appears at phase 4 (replacing the modem parameter).
U01821/E01821 The communication was interrupted because there is no communication speed
commonly used with the destination unit.
U03000/E03000 No document was present in the destination unit when polling reception started.
U03200/E03200 In interoffice sub address bulletin board reception, the data was not stored in the
boxspecified by the destination unit.
7-166
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Error code Contents

U03300/E03300 In polling reception from a unit of our own model, operation was interrupted due to a
mismatch in permitted ID or telephone number. Or, in interoffice sub address-based
bulletin board reception, operation was interrupted due to a mismatch in permitted ID or
telephone number.
U03400/E03400 Polling reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in individual numbers
(destination unit is either of our make or by another manufacturer).
U03500/E03500 In interoffice sub address bulletin board reception, the specified sub address password
was not registered in the destination unit.
U03600/E03600 An interoffice sub address bulletin board reception was interrupted because of a
mismatch in the specified sub address password.
U03700/E03700 Interoffice sub address bulletin board reception failed because the destination unit had
no sub address bulletin board transmission capability, or data was not stored in any sub
address box in the destination unit.
U04000/E04000 In interoffice sub address transmission mode, the specified sub address password was
not registered in the destination unit.
U04100/E04100 The destination unit had no sub address reception capability while the sub address
transmission was executed.
U04200/E04200 In encrypted transmission, the specified encryption box was not registered in the
destination unit.
U04300/E04300 The encryption transmission was carried out, but there is no encryption function at the
other machine.
U04400/E04400 Encrypted transmission was interrupted because encryption keys did not agree.
U04500/E04500 Encrypted reception was interrupted because of a mismatch in encryption keys.
U05100/E05100 The transmission was interrupted because the permitted ID and FAX number did not
match in the restricted transmission (password check transmission).
U05200/E05200 Restricted reception (Password check reception) was interrupted because the permitted
FAX number / ID did not match, the rejected FAX number matched, or the destination unit
did not return its phone number.
U05300/E05300 The destination unit set the restricted reception (Password check reception).
Consequently, the transmission was interrupted because the permitted FAX number / ID
did not match, the rejected FAX number matched, or the own unit did not return its phone
number.
U14000/E14000 Memory overflowed during the sub address confidential reception.
U14100/E14100 In interoffice sub address transmission, memory overflowed in the destination unit.
U19000/E19000 Memory overflowed during memory reception.
U19100/E19100 Memory overflowed in the destination unit while transmitting the data.
U19300/E19300 Transmission failed because an error appeared during JBIG encoding.
Content of Communication Errors

U00000/E00000
1 Resending The status is Busy. Check if the destination unit
can receive the data and
resend the data if there is no
particular problem.
7-167
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U00100/E00100
1 Resending Transmission was Resend.
interrupted by a press of
the stop/clear key.
U00200/E00200
1 Request for resending Reception was interrupted Suspend resending from the
by a press of the [Stop] key. destination unit or request the
destination unit to resend the
data.
U00300/E00300
1 Request to the destination Recording paper on the Request the destination unit
unit destination unit has run out to set the recording papers.
during transmission.
U00430/E00430
1 Checking the permitted Polling or sub address Register a valid permitted
number bulletin board transmission number
were requested, but the
communication was
interrupted because the
permitted ID did not match.
(It occurs in the
transmitting unit.)
U00431/E00431
1 Checking the destination An sub address bulletin Register the sub address
unit board transmission was password in the destination
interrupted because the unit.
specified sub address
password was not
registered.
7-168
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U00432/E00432
1 Checking the sub address A sub address bulletin Send by using correct the sub
password board transmission was address password.
interrupted because the
sub address password did
not match.
U00433/E00433
1 Checking the sub address A sub address bulletin Set data in the sub address
box board transmission request box.
was received but data was
notpresent in the sub
address box.
U00440/E00440
1 Checking the sub address Sub address confidential Register the sub address
password reception was interrupted password.
because the specified sub
address password was not
registered.
U00450/E00450
1 Checking the permitted The reception was Register the permitted
number interrupted because the number to be consistent at
permitted ID and FAX own machine side.
number did not match in
the restricted transmission
(password check
transmission) in the
destination unit.
U00460/E00460
1 Checking the encryption The encryption reception Register an encrypted box
key was interrupted because number.
the specified encryption
box number was not
registered.
7-169
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U00462/E00462
1 Checking the encryption Encrypted reception was Register an encryption key.
key interrupted because the
encryption key for the
specifiedencryption box
was not registered.
U00601/E00601
1 Checking the original Original jam Clear original feed jam and
resend.
2 Checking the original The original length exceeds Check if the original length
the maximum allowed. does not exceed 1.6 meter
and resend.
U00613/E00613
1 Checking the service call Image writing section error Check the service call error
error record record and perform the
corrective actions.
U00656/E00656
1 Resending Transmission was Resend.
interrupted because there
was an error in the modem.
2 Resetting the main power Transmission was Turn off the power switch and
and reinstalling the FAX interrupted because there pull out the power plug. After
PWB was an error in the modem. passing 5s, reattach the FAX
switch.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the Upgrade the fax firmware to
latest version. the latest version.
4 Initializing the fax The FAX initial value was Execute U600 to initialize the
changed. FAX.
5 Checking the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is faulty. Replace the FAX PWB.
7-170
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U00690/E00690
1 Resetting the main power System error Turn off the power switch and
unplug the power cord. After
power switch.
2 Measures for the system System error in the main Perform the corrective actions
error unit for the system error in the
main unit.
U00800/E00800
1 Checking the transmit start A page was not correctly In case pages are not
speed transmitted because of the properly sent and resending
receiving an RTN or PIN does not solve it, reduce
signal during transmit start speed and
communication. resend the data.
U00811/E00811
1 Resending A page reception error In case pages are not
remained after retry of properly sent and resending
transmission in the ECM does not solve it, reduce
mode. transmit start speed and
resend the data.
U00900/E00900
1 Resending An RTN or PIN signal was Resend the page if there is a
transmitted because of a page not transmitted properly.
page reception error.
7-171
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U01000/E01000
1 Resending An FTT signal was Resend.
received for a set number
of times after TCF signal
transmission at 2400 bps.
Or, an RTN signal was
received in response to a Q
signal (excluding EOP)
after transmission at 2400
bps.
2 Checking the transmit start Line condition is poor. Reduce transmit start speed
speed (Destination unit) by executing [TX Speed] at
U630, and then resend the
data.
3 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the transmit start
(Own machine) speed by executing U630 [TX
Speed].
U01001/E01001
1 Resending Function as indicated by Resend.
DIS signal is not consistent
with the one of own
machine.
data.
Speed].
U01016/E01016
1 Resending T1 timeout occurs since Resend.
MBF signal is received but
DIS signal is not after
sending EOM signal.
data.
Speed].
7-172
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U01019/E01019
1 Resending Command send retrial Resend.
times exceeds since
significant signal is not
received after sending
CNC signal. (between own
machines)
data.
Speed].
U01020/E01020
times exceeds since
received after sending CTC
signal. (ECM)
data.
Speed].
U01021/E01021
1 Resending Command send retry time Resend.
has exceeded since
message signal is not
EOR•Q signal. (ECM)
data.
Speed].
7-173
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U01022/E01022
times exceeds since
received after sending RR
signal. (ECM)
data.
Speed].
U01028/E01028
1 Resending T5 timeout is detected Resend.
when sending in ECM
(ECM)
data.
Speed].
U01052/E01052
1 Resending DCN signal is received Resend.
after sending RR signal
(ECM)
data.
Speed].
7-174
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U01080/E01080
1 Resending PIP signal is received after Resend.
sending PPS and NULL
signals.
data.
Speed].
U01092/E01092
1 Resending Communication is stopped Resend.
since there are impossible
combination of symbol
speed and communication
speed at V.34 sending.
data.
Speed].
U01093/E01093
1 Checking the settings The modem is not detected Set the modem detection
since the received signal is level at U650 [RX Mdm
attenuated with its Level]. (Initial setting: -
frequency response. 43dBm)
2 Checking the settings The modem is not detected Set the G3 reception cable
since the received signal is equalizer by executing U650
attenuated with its [Reg G3 RX Eqr]. (Initial
frequency response. value: 0dBm)
7-175
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U01094/E01094
1 Resending DCS/NSS signal send Resend.
retrial time is exceeded at
phase B during
transmission.
data.
Speed].
U01095/E01095
1 Resending Command send retrial time Resend.
is exceeded since
(PPS) Q signal at phase D
data.
Speed].
U01096/E01096
1 Resending DCN signal or invalid Resend.
command is received at
phase D during
transmission.
data.
Speed].
7-176
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U01097/E01097
1 Resending The preset number of Resend.
command retransfers was
exceeded after
transmission of an
RRsignal or no response.
data.
Speed].
U01100/E01100
1 Request for resending Function indicated by DCS Request resending.
signal is not consistent with
the one of own machine.
2 Changing the initial value Line condition is poor. Change the reception speed
(Own machine) by executing U630 [RX
Speed].
U01101/E01101
1 Request for resending Function indicated by NSS Request resending.
signal except
communication type is not
consistent with the one of
own machine.
Speed].
U01102/E01102
1 Request for resending DTC (NSC) signal is Request resending.
received while own
machine has no
transmission data.
Speed].
7-177
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U01110/E01110
1 Request for resending No response is received Request resending.
after sending DIS signal.
Speed].
U01111/E01111
1 Request for resending No response is received Request resending.
after sending DTC (NSC)
signal.
Speed].
U01113/E01113
1 Checking the settings The modem is not detected Set the modem detection
since the received signal is level at U650 [RX Mdm
attenuated with its Level]. (Initial setting: -
frequency response. 43dBm)
2 Checking the settings The modem is not detected Set the G3 reception cable
since the received signal is equalizer by executing U650
attenuated with its [Reg G3 RX Eqr]. (Initial
frequency response. value: 0dBm)
U01125/E01125
1 Request for resending No response after Request resending.
transmitting a CNS signal.
(Between the units of our
make)
Speed].
7-178
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U01129/E01129
1 Request for resending No response after Request resending.
transmitting an SPA signal.
(Short protocol)
Speed].
U01141/E01141
1 Request for resending DCN signal is received Request resending.
after sending DTC signal.
Speed].
U01143/E01143
1 Checking the settings DCN signal is received Set the G3 reception cable
after sending FTT signal. equalizer by executing U650
[Reg G3 RX Eqr]. (Initial
value: 0dBm)
U01155/E01155
1 Request for resending DCN signal is received Request resending.
after sending SPA signal.
(simplified protocol)
Speed].
U01160/E01160
1 Request for resending Maximum transmission Request resending.
time per line is exceeded
while receiving message.
Speed].
7-179
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U01162/E01162
1 Request for resending Maximum transmission Request resending.
time per line is exceeded
while receiving message.
Speed].
U01191/E01191
1 Request for resending Communication is stopped Request resending.
with error during image
data receipt sequence at
V.34.
Speed].
U01193/E01193
1 Checking the settings No response, DCN signal Extend T2 time-out time at
or invalid command is U641 [T2 Time Out]. (Change
received at phase C/D from the initial setting 69 to
during reception. 150.)
2 Checking the settings Line condition is poor. Set the corrective measures
for echoes at the reception in
U630 [RX Echo]. (Initial
setting: 75)
3 Changing the transmit start Line condition is poor. Change the reception starting
timing speed to '9600bps' or less.
U01194/E01194
1 Request for resending DCN signal is received at Request resending.
phase B during reception.
Speed].
7-180
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U01195/E01195
1 Checking the settings No message is received at Extend T2 time-out time at
phase C during reception. U641 [T2 Time Out]. (Change
from the initial setting 69 to
150.)
2 Checking the settings Line condition is poor. Set the corrective measures
for echoes at the reception in
U630 [RX Echo]. (Initial
setting: 75)
3 Changing the transmit start Line condition is poor. Change the reception starting
timing speed to '9600bps' or less.
U01196/E01196
1 Resending Error line control overflow Resend.
and decoding error
occurred in messages
during reception.
Speed].
U01400/E01400
1 Checking the telephone '#' exists in advance of 'x' Delete '#' from the registered
number on the phone numbers of numbers if '#' exists in
the destination unit, so it is advance of 'x' on the phone
processed as the invalid numbers of the destination
dial line. unit.
U01500/E01500
1 Checking the transmit start The communication line is Reduce transmit start speed
speed the poor condition. by executing [TX Speed] at
data.
2 Checking the transmit start The communication line Change the transmit start
speed condition is poor and an speed by executing U630 [TX
error frequently occurs. Speed].
7-181
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U01600/E01600
1 Checking the destination The communication line is Request the destination unit
unit the poor condition. to resend the data after
reducing the transmit start
speed.
2 Changing the transmit start The communication line Request the destination unit
timing condition is poor and an to resend the data after
error frequently occurs. lowering the reception start
speed.
U01700/E01700
1 Resending A communication error Resend.
occurred in phase 2 (line
probing).
data.
Speed].
U01720/E01720
1 Resending The communication error Resend.
appears at phase 4
(replacing the modem
parameter).
data.
Speed].
7-182
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U01721/E01721
1 Resending The communication was Resend.
is no communication speed
commonly used with the
destination unit.
data.
Speed].
U01800/E01800
1 Request for resending A communication error Request the destination unit
occurred in phase 2 (line to resend the data after
probing). reducing the transmit start
speed.
Speed].
U01810/E01810
occurred in phase 3 to resend the data after
(primary channel reducing the transmit start
equivalent device training). speed.
Speed].
U01820/E01820
occurred in phase 3 to resend the data after
(primary channel reducing the transmit start
equivalent device training). speed.
Speed].
7-183
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U01821/E01821
1 Request for resending The communication was Request the destination unit
interrupted because there to resend the data after
is no communication speed reducing the transmit start
commonly used with the speed.
destination unit.
Speed].
U03000/E03000
1 Checking the destination No document was present Request the destination unit
unit in the destination unit when to set the originals.
polling reception started.
U03200/E03200
1 Checking the destination There is no data in the sub Request the destination unit
unit address box in the main to store the original data in the
unit that are specified from sub address box.
the destination unit.
U03300/E03300
1 Checking the destination The permitted ID and FAX Request the destination unit
unit number registered in the to register the own ID and the
destination unit are own FAX number as the
incorrect. permitted ID and the
permitted FAX number.
U03400/E03400
1 Checking the destination In polling reception, the Revise it so that the password
unit operation was interrupted input at the destination
because the password machine is consistent with the
input in the destination unit receiver's own FAX ID to
and the own FAX number receive again.
in the receiver did not
match.
7-184
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U03500/E03500
1 Checking the destination In polling reception, the Revise it so that the password
unit operation was interrupted input at the destination
because the password machine is consistent with the
input in the destination unit receiver's own FAX ID to
and the own FAX number receive again.
in the receiver did not
match.
U03600/E03600
1 Checking the destination Sub address bulletin board Resend the data after
unit reception was interrupted inputting the sub address
because the specified sub password registered in the
address password did not destination unit.
match.
U03700/E03700
1 Checking the setting in the Destination machine has Check if the destination unit
destination unit no sub address bulletin has a sub address bulletin
board communication board communication
function or no originals are function. If available, request
stored in any original the destination unit to save
delivery box (sub address the original data in the sub
box). address box.
U04000/E04000
1 Checking the setting in the The original was Register the sub address
destination unit transmitted to the sub password in the destination
address box, but the unit.
specified box was not
registered in the
destination unit that is our
own model.
2 Checking the sub address The original was Match the sub address in the
of the FAX transmission transmitted to the sub FAX forward condition
condition address box in the
destination unit that is our
own model, but the sub
address of the transmission
condition did not match.
7-185
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U04100/E04100
1 Checking the setting in the The destination unit had no Transmit the data according
destination unit sub address reception to the reception function in the
capability while the sub destination unit.
address transmission was
executed.
U04200/E04200
1 Checking the setting in the In encrypted transmission, Request the destination unit
destination unit the specified encryption to register the encrypted box.
box was not registered in
the destination unit.
U04300/E04300
1 Checking the setting in the The encryption Transmit the data according
destination unit transmission was carried to the reception function in the
out, but there is no destination unit.
encryption function at the
other machine.
U04400/E04400
1 Checking the encryption Encrypted transmission Request resending after
key was interrupted because checking the encryption key
encryption keys did not registered in the receiving and
agree. sending machines.
U04500/E04500
1 Checking the encryption Encrypted transmission Request resending after
key was interrupted because checking the encryption key
encryption keys did not registered in the receiving and
agree. sending machines.
7-186
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U05100/E05100
1 Checking the permitted The transmission was Resend after confirming the
number interrupted because the authorization number that has
permitted ID and FAX been registered.
number did not match in
the restricted transmission
(password check
transmission).
U05200/E05200
1 Checking the settings The number does not Change the restricted
match a permitted FAX reception settings.
number / ID, or it matches
a rejected FAX number.
2 Checking the setting in the The own telephone number Request the destination unit
destination unit is not informed from the to register the own telephone
destination unit. number.
U05300/E05300
1 Checking the setting in the The number does not Ask the destination unit to
destination unit match a permitted FAX change the restricted
number / ID, or it matches reception settings.
a rejected FAX number.
2 Checking the settings The main unit did not Request the destination unit
acknowledge its phone to register the own telephone
number in question . number.
U14000/E14000
1 Checking the memory The reception to the FAX Release memory by printing
box was interrupted due to originals stored in memory or
memory overflow in its unit. cancel FAX box reception.
U14100/E14100
1 Checking the destination Transmission was Request the destination unit
unit interrupted due to the to release memory.
memory overflow in the
destination unit when
transmitting into the sub
address box.
7-187
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
U19000/E19000
1 Checking the memory The reception was Release memory by printing
interrupted due to the originals stored in memory.
memory overflow in the
main unit during memory
reception.
U19100/E19100
1 Resending The transmission was Resend.
is an error in the data
2 Resetting the main power The transmission was Turn off the power switch and
PWB is an error in the data passing 5s, reattach the FAX
during transmission. PWB and reinsert the power
switch.
U19300/E19300
1 Resending The transmission was Resend.
is an error in the data
2 Resetting the main power The transmission was Turn off the power switch and
PWB is an error in the data passing 5s, reattach the FAX
during transmission. PWB and reinsert the power
switch.
3 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the Upgrade the fax firmware to
4 Initializing the fax The FAX initial value was Execute U600 to initialize the
changed. FAX.
5 Checking the FAX PWB The FAX PWB is faulty. Replace the FAX PWB.
7-2 Send Related Errors

(1) Send Related Errors
No. Contents
(1) The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing the host name or the security software
settings
(2) Sending error 2203 does not disappear.
(3) Scanned data from the contact glass is automatically sent
7-188
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Content of Send Related Errors

(1-1) The sending error 2101 does not disappear even if changing the host name or the
security software settings

1 Checking the settings The incorrect port number Change the SMB port number
has been set. from '139' to '445'.
(1-2) Sending error 2203 does not disappear.

1 Checking the settings The Windows Fire Wall is Select [Allow a program or
not properly set. (Windows feature through Windows
Vista / 7 / 8) Firewall] at [Control Panel] >
[System and Security] >
[Windows Firewall] and check
[File and Printer Sharing] and
also check the right side
checkbox
(1-3) Scanned data from the contact glass is automatically sent

1 Checking the settings [Continuous Scan] is not Set [On] at [Send] key / [FAX]
set to [On]. key > [Functions] >
[Continuous Scan].
7-189
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(2) Sending Errors (Error Codes)

(2-1) Scan to E-mail Error Codes
Error code Contents
1101 SMTP/POP3 server does not exist on the network.
1102 Login to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.
1104 Destination address domain is restricted and transmission is denied.
1105 Invalid SMTP protocol
1106 The sender address is not set.
2101 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.
2102 Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)
2103 The server cannot establish communication.
2201 Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.
2202 Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)
2204 The size of scanning exceeded its limit.
3101 SMTP/POP3 server responded with an error.
3201 No SMTP authentication is found.
4803 Failed to establish the SSL session.
Content of Scan to E-mail Error Codes

Scan to E-mail error code : 1101
SMTP/POP3 server does not exist on the network.

1 Checking the SMTP/POP3 SMTP / POP3 server name Correct the SMTP / POP3
server name is incorrect. server name at [Function
Settings] > [E-mail] via the
command center.
2 Checking the settings The network settings are Correct the settings in the
incorrect. Network Settings via the
Command Center.
3 Checking the settings The network settings that Correct the network settings
the main unit is connected that the main unit is
to are incorrect. connected to.

Login to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.

1 Checking the SMTP/POP3 The user name or the Correct the SMTP / POP3
server name password is incorrect. user name or password at
[Function Settings] > [E-mail]
via the command center.
2 Checking the SMTP/POP3 The SMTP/POP3 server Correct the protocol in the
server settings are incorrect. Network Settings via the
Command Center.
7-190
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Destination address domain is restricted and transmission is denied.

1 Checking the settings Destination address Correct the settings in the
domain is restricted and Network Settings via the
transmission is denied. Command Center.

Invalid SMTP protocol

1 Checking the settings Invalid SMTP protocol Correct the protocol in the
Network Settings via the
Command Center.

The sender address is not set.

1 Checking the settings The sender address is not Correct the protocol in the
set. Network Settings via the
Command Center.

Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.

command center.
2 Checking the LAN cable The LAN cable is not Connect the LAN cable to the
connected to the main unit. main unit.
3 Checking the SMTP/POP3 The port number is Correct the SMTP/POP3 port
port No. incorrect. number.
Command Center.
6 Checking the settings The SMTP/POP3 server Correct the protocol in the
settings are incorrect. Network Settings via the
Command Center.
7-191
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Connection to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)

command center.
Command Center.
Command Center.

The server cannot establish communication.

command center.
Command Center.
Command Center.

Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed.

Command Center.
7-192
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Communication to the SMTP/POP3 server has failed. (Connection timeout)

Command Center.

The size of scanning exceeded its limit.

Command Center.

SMTP/POP3 server responded with an error.

Command Center.
Command Center.

No SMTP authentication is found.

1 Checking the settings The SMTP server settings Set the correct SMTP
are incorrect. Authentication Protocol at
[Function Settings] > [E-mail]
via the command center.

Failed to establish the SSL session.

1 Checking the self-signed The self-signed certificate Correct the certificates in the
certificate of the device is incorrect. Security Settings via the
Command Center.
7-193
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

2 Checking the settings The service certificate Correct the certificates in the
settings are incorrect. Security Settings via the
Command Center.
3 Checking the settings The SMTP/POP3 settings Correct the protocol in the
are incorrect. Network Settings via the
Command Center.
(2-2) Scan to FTP Error Codes

Error code Contents
1101 FTP server does not exist on the network.
1102 Login to the FTP server has failed.
1105 FTP protocol is not enabled.
1131 Initializing TLS has failed.
1132 TLS negotiation has failed.
2101 Connection to the FTP server has failed.
2102 Connection with the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)
2103 The server cannot establish communication.
2201 Communication with the FTP server has failed.
2202 Communication with the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)
2203 No response from the server during a certain period of time.
2231 Communication with the FTP server has failed. (FTPS communication)
3101 FTP server responded with an error.
Content of Scan to FTP Error Codes

Scan to FTP error code : 1101
FTP server does not exist on the network.

1 Checking the FTP host The FTP host name is Correct the FTP host name
name incorrect. via the Command Center.
Command Center.

Login to the FTP server has failed.

1 Checking the FTP host The user name or the Correct the user name and
name password is incorrect. the password.
7-194
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

2 Checking the FTP server FTP server is improper. Correct the protocol in the
Network Settings via the
Command Center.

FTP protocol is not enabled.

1 Checking the settings FTP protocol is not Correct the protocol in the
enabled. Network Settings via the
Command Center.

Initializing TLS has failed.

1 Checking the settings The security settings of the Correct the settings in the
device are incorrect. Security Settings via the
Command Center.

TLS negotiation has failed.

1 Checking the settings The security settings of the Correct the settings in the
device are incorrect. Security Settings via the
Command Center.
2 Checking the settings The FTP server settings Correct the protocol in the
Command Center.

Connection to the FTP server has failed.

connected to the main unit. main unit.
3 Checking the FTP port The port number is Correct the FTP port number.
number incorrect.
Command Center.
Command Center.
7-195
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Connection with the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)

number incorrect.
Command Center.
Command Center.

The server cannot establish communication.

number incorrect.
Command Center.
Command Center.

Communication with the FTP server has failed.

Command Center.
3 Checking the destination The destination folder Set the correct destination
folder name name is incorrect. folder.
7-196
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Command Center.

Communication with the FTP server has failed. (Timeout)

Command Center.

No response from the server during a certain period of time.

Command Center.

Communication with the FTP server has failed. (FTPS communication)

Command Center.

FTP server responded with an error.

Command Center.
7-197
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Command Center.
(2-3) Scan to SMB Error Codes

Error code Contents
1101 Destination host does not exist on the network.
1102 Login to the host has failed.
1103 Destination host, folder, and/or file names are invalid.
1105 SMB protocol is not enabled.
2101 Login to the host has failed.
2201 Writing scanned data has failed.
2203 No response from the host during a certain period of time.
Content of Scan to SMB Error Codes

Scan to SMB error code : 1101
Destination host does not exist on the network.

1 Checking the destination The destination host name Correct the destination host
host name is incorrect. name.
Command Center.

Login to the host has failed.

1 Checking the user name The user name or the Correct the user name and
and the password password is incorrect. the password.
Command Center.
3 Checking the settings The sharing settings of the Correct the sharing settings of
destination host / folder are the destination host / folder.
incorrect.
7-198
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Destination host, folder, and/or file names are invalid.

1 Checking the host name, The host name, destination Revise invalid characters in
destination folder name folder name, or the file destination host name,
and the file name name contains the invalid destination folder name and
character. file name properly.
2 Checking the destination The destination folder Revise the destination folder
folder name and the file name or the file name is and file name according to the
name incorrect. naming rules.
3 Checking the destination The destination host name Revise the destination host
host and the destination or the destination folder and destination folder
folder name is incorrect. properly.

SMB protocol is not enabled.

1 Checking the settings The settings of the SMP Correct the protocol in the
protocol are incorrect. Network Settings via the
Command Center.

Login to the host has failed.

1 Checking the destination The destination host name Correct the destination host
host name is incorrect. name.
connected to the main unit main unit.
in the transmission (Scan
to SMB).
3 Checking the SMB port No. The port number is Correct the SMB port number.
incorrect.
Command Center.

Writing scanned data has failed.

1 Checking the scanning file The sending file name is Correct the scanning file
name incorrect. name.
7-199
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Command Center.

No response from the host during a certain period of time.

Command Center.
connected to the main unit main unit.
in the transmission (Scan
to SMB).
7-200
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
7-3 Print Errors

No. Contents Condition
(1) The paper loading message appears
(2) The data is output with color from Excel, etc.
even if the monochrome mode is set
(3) Color tone of the printed photo is different The settings of Imaging / PDL are incorrect.
(4) The paper direction is incorrect
(5) Paper is fed from the MP tray The main unit MP tray setting is wrong
(6) Garbled characters The printer driver was not properly installed.
(7) Data is output in monochrome Photos printed from a PC are monochrome
instead of color. (Print from Windows Photo
Viewer)
(8) Paper is not fed from the MP tray The media types of each paper source defined in
the printer driver and the main unit are
mismatched.
(9) The same data is printed out endlessly A PC (spooler) does not properly operate.
(10) PC window shows [Print job error], [Standby] or The main unit is not ready to print
[Printer unavailable] is displayed on the printer
properties
(11) [Processing] lamp and [Memory] lamp are lit The main unit locks up.
while the printer standby message is displayed
(12) Data is not printed out in Sleep mode due to the The main unit locks up.
main unit startup error
([Processing] lamp and [Memory] lamp are lit)
(13) Print stops after printing several pages (machine The image processing fails due to the insufficient
lock-up) memory, so the main unit locks up.
(14) Print out is not available from the network factor The network is faulty, or the network settings is
(1) not correct.
(15) Print out is not available from the network factor The cable between the main unit and the PC is
(2) not properly connected.
(16) Print out is not available from the network factor The access point (router or HUB) in the network
(3) does not operate properly.
(17) Print out is not available from the network factor The router is faulty, or the router settings are
(4) incorrect.
(18) Print out is not available from the network factor 'Offline' appears and the print function is
(5) unavailable.
(19) Print out is not available from the network factor Only one among installed PCs is unable to print.
(6) No error is displayed and if directing print, it is on
hold.
(20) Print out is not available from the network factor The main unit IP address is changed.
(7)
(21) Print out is not available from the printer driver [Disconnection error] appears on the PC screen
setting factor (1) and the print job cannot be output due to this
error. (Print is unavailable.)
(22) Print out is not available from the printer driver 'Please wait' is displayed at the main unit. The
setting factor (2) Job is retained without outputting printed
materials.
(23) Print out is not available from the printer driver A PC does not recognize the main unit.
setting factor (3)
7-201
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

(24) Print out is not available from the printer driver PC operation does not stabilize.
setting factor (4)
(25) Print out is not available from the printer driver Check if the issue occurs when printing the data
setting factor (5) from all PCs in the network or from a certain PC.
Then, print out the data from another PC if it
occurs at a certain PC.
(26) Print out is not available from the printer driver The incorrect printer driver was selected.
setting factor (6)
(27) Print out is not available from the printer driver Installed printer driver shows 'Deleting' and it
setting factor (7) remains when reinstalling it
(28) A part of the image is missing The image data processing with a certain
application (Excel, PDF, etc.) is faulty.
(29) 'Paper Mismatch Error' appears The paper size is not detected properly.
Content of Print Errors

(1) The paper loading message appears

1 Checking the paper The size of the loaded Load the paper of the paper
paper did not match the size defined at "Paper size" in
paper size set in the printer the [Basic] tab in the print
properties. settings at the PC to the
cassette.
2 Checking the paper size The paper size on the Check if the paper size on the
operation panel and the operation panel and the one
one set for the paper set for the paper source do
source do not match. not match
guides width guides do not fit with guides to fit them with the
the paper size. paper size.
4 Checking the paper sensor The actuator or the spring Replace the actuator or the
for the paper sensor is not spring of the paper sensor if
properly attached. Or, the they are deformed or do not
paper sensor does not properly operate.
properly operate due to
deformation.
5 Checking the situation The print data created by a Check if the print data
certain application (Word, generated by other than a
etc.) is faulty. certain application (Word,
etc.) is output properly. If the
phenomenon occurs with the
application only, change the
application setting.
6 Checking the settings Orientation is not properly Check the orientation with
set in the print page setting preview before printing and
on a certain application reset the orientation at the
(Word, etc.). print setting on a certain
application (Word, etc.).
7-202
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

7 Checking the settings The paper size and the Check if the paper size
media type detected at the detected on the MP tray and
main unit did not match the media type of the MP tray
with the paper size and the set via the System Menu (for
media type set in the the main unit) matched to the
printer driver. paper size and the media type
at [Imaging] > [Basic] in the
printer properties at the PC.
8 Checking the settings The MP tray setting does Select 'MP tray' at [Source] in
not match between the the [Basic] tab in the print
main unit and printer driver settings at the PC.
(2) The data is output with color from Excel, etc. even if the monochrome mode is set

1 Checking the settings An application such as Select 'Black & White' at
Excel is not properly set up. [Color Mode] in the [Imaging]
tab in the print settings at the
PC. Next, overwrite the Excel
data and close the window.
And then, restart it up.
(3) Color tone of the printed photo is different

The settings of Imaging / PDL are incorrect.

1 Checking the situation A file created on a certain When the phenomenon
application makes error. occurs with a certain file only,
check if there is an
abnormality in the image data.
2 Checking the settings Print quality is not properly Select 'Quality priority' at
set up. [Color conversion] in the
[Imaging] tab in the print
settings at the PC.
3 Checking the settings The print settings of Check if the phenomenon
PageMaker or Illustrator, occurs with the file generated
etc. are incorrect. by a certain application such
as PageMaker or Illustrator,
and refer to Help display.
4 Checking the settings The PDL settings or the Change [PDL Settings] from
imaging settings of [Basic] [PCL XL] to [KPDL] in the
are incorrect. print settings at the PC and
change [Color reproduction]
at the [Imaging] tab.
7-203
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

5 Checking the settings PDL or Color conversion Change [PDL Settings] from
processing is not properly [PCL XL] to [KPDL] in the
set. print settings at the PC and
select 'Quality priority' at
[Color conversion] in the
[Imaging] tab. (When the
image data is CMYK, not
RGB.)
6 Checking the paper Paper quality causes the Replace with smooth paper.
phenomenon.
7 Executing Calibration Calibration is not executed Execute the calibration.
properly.
8 Checking the settings The settings in the Select 'Text and Photos' at
[Imaging] tab in the print [Color reproduction] in the
settings at the PC are [Imaging] tab in the print
incorrect. settings at the PC.
(4) The paper direction is incorrect

1 Resetting the main power There is a communication Confirm there are no jobs in
error. process in the PC and the
main unit. Then, turn off the
power switch and unplug the
power cord. After 5s later,
reconnect the power cord and
turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the font list Font for special data is not After checking output from
resident. Excel, Word, etc. is normal,
print the font list to check if a
font for special data is
resident.
3 Selecting the bitmap font The bitmap font (default Select the bitmap font (default
setting) is unselected. setting) and print the data.
4 Checking the printer driver The printer driver is faulty. Uninstall and reinstall the
printer driver.
(5) Paper is fed from the MP tray

The main unit MP tray setting is wrong

1 Checking the settings The Auto Cassette Change [Auto.Cass.Change] not to
is [On]. feed paper if there is no paper
in the selected paper source.
2 Checking the settings 'Media type' in the [Basic] Check the media type set on
tab in the print settings at the main unit cassette and
the PC differs from the MP tray and set the media
media type of the cassette type for the main unit in the
that is set in the main unit. [Basic] tab in the print settings
at the PC.
7-204
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

3 Checking the settings The same media type is set Set the different media types
between the main unit for the cassette and the MP
cassette and MP tray tray at the main unit.
(6) Garbled characters

The printer driver was not properly installed.

1 Resetting the main power There is a communication Confirm there are no jobs in
error. process in the PC and the
main unit. Then, turn off the
power cord. After 5s later,
2 Checking the font list Font for special data is not After checking output from
resident. Excel, Word, etc. is normal,
print the font list to check if a
font for special data is
resident.
3 Selecting the bitmap font The bitmap font (default Select the bitmap font (default
setting) is unselected. setting) and print the data.
4 Checking the printer driver The printer driver is faulty. Uninstall and reinstall the
printer driver.
(7) Data is output in monochrome

Photos printed from a PC are monochrome instead of color. (Print from Windows Photo Viewer)

1 Checking the settings The [Color Mode] setting in Check the color mode in the
the [Imaging] tab in the [Imaging tab] in the print
print settings at the PC is settings at the PC and change
incorrect. to 'Full color' if the color mode
was set to 'Black'.
2 Checking the settings The option or printer Change the color mode to
properties are not properly 'Full Color' at the page
set up settings of the unique
application or Excel, etc.
3 Changing the printing The application is Directly print JPEG data
method incompatible. instead of pasting it on Excel,
etc.
7-205
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(8) Paper is not fed from the MP tray

The media types of each paper source defined in the printer driver and the main unit are mismatched.

1 Checking the settings The paper size and the Check if the paper size set for
media type set at the main the MP tray and the media
unit do not match the paper type of the MP tray set in the
size and the media type set System Menu (for the main
in the printer driver. unit) match the paper size
and the media type at
[Imaging] > [Basic] in the
printer properties at the PC.
2 Checking the settings The MP tray setting does Select 'MP tray' at [Source] in
not match between the the [Basic] tab in the print
main unit and printer driver settings at the PC.
(9) The same data is printed out endlessly

A PC (spooler) does not properly operate.

1 Deleting the job The generated data is Delete the print job spooled in
faulty. the PC and print it out again.
(10)PC window shows [Print job error], [Standby] or [Printer unavailable] is displayed on the
printer properties
The main unit is not ready to print

1 Clearing the error The main unit is not ready Check if the error appears on
to print the operation panel or the
error lamp blinks. Then if
there is, cancel it.
2 Checking the main unit The main unit is not ready Resolve the problem at the
to print main unit if any
(11)[Processing] lamp and [Memory] lamp are lit while the printer standby message is
displayed
The main unit locks up.

1 Clearing the error The main unit is not ready After confirming no error is
to print indicated on the main unit's
operation panel, cancel all PC
print jobs. Then, turn off the
power cord. After passing 5s,
7-206
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(12)Data is not printed out in Sleep mode due to the main unit startup error
The main unit locks up.

2 Checking the settings The sleep level is not set to Turn off the power switch and
Quick Recovery mode. unplug the power cord. After
power switch. After that, set
the Sleep Level to Quick
Recovery.
(13)Print stops after printing several pages (machine lock-up)

The image processing fails due to the insufficient memory, so the main unit locks up.

1 Resetting the main power The main unit locks up. If the operation panel or the
buttons are not active, turn off
the power switch and unplug
the power cord. After passing
5s, reconnect the power cord
and turn on the power switch.
2 Checking the situation The data processing in a Check if the issue occurs
certain PC is faulty. when printing the data from all
PCs in the network or from a
certain PC. Then, print out the
data from another PC if it
occurs at a certain PC.
3 Checking the settings The application is not Check if a problem occurring
properly set. from a certain application and
file (big data like CAD data)
and change application
setting and refer to
application's help.
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the Upgrade the main firmware to
5 Deleting the job Processing fails. Cancel the job in process and
reprint in the main unit job
status
7-207
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(14)Print out is not available from the network factor (1)

The network is faulty, or the network settings is not correct.

1 Checking the network There is trouble in the Check if [Memory] lamp on
network. the operation panel of the
main unit is blinking after
printing out from the PC. If not
blinking, cancel the
processing job and reprint
out.
2 Checking the network There is trouble in the When the printing error
network. appears on the operation
panel or the PC screen, clear
the error caused by the toner
or paper jam, etc.
3 Checking the network There is trouble in the Check the main unit IP
network. Address in the status page,
etc. and then check if
Command Center can be
opened using that IP Address.
If not, reconfigure the network
again.
4 Checking the network There is trouble in the Check if the internet is
network. available. Improve the
network connection if not
available.
5 Checking the network There is trouble in the Check the cable and reset the
network. router or HUB.
6 Restarting up The PC or the main unit Restart the PC or the main
locks up. unit, and print out again.

The cable between the main unit and the PC is not properly connected.

1 Checking the cable The cable between the Check the cable connection
main unit and the PC is not between the main unit and the
properly connected. PC.
2 Restarting up The main unit or the PC Restart the main unit and then
does not properly start up. restart the PC.
3 Checking the Ethernet The Ethernet cable is Replace the Ethernet cable.
cable faulty.
4 Changing the connection Another network is faulty. Directly connect the main unit
to the PC with the cross
cable, and then check if the
same data can be printed out.
7-208
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

The access point (router or HUB) in the network does not operate properly.

1 Restarting up The router or the hub does Check if the link lamp of the
not properly activate. router or hub is lit and restart
it.
2 Checking the Ethernet The Ethernet cable is not In case the link lamp is off,
cable properly connected. once disconnect the Ethernet
cable from the router and
reconnect it to check the link
lamp is lit.
3 Checking the Ethernet The Ethernet cable is Replace the Ethernet cable.
cable faulty.
4 Restarting up The router, hub, PC or the In case of no connection while
main unit do not start up the link lamp is lit, restart the
properly. router or hub (concentrator)
and then restart up the PC
and the main unit.

The router is faulty, or the router settings are incorrect.

1 Checking the settings The IP address is not Check if the main unit IP
properly set. Address indicated in the
status page is the same as
the IP Address in the [Port]
tab of [Printer Properties] at
the PC. If not, correct the IP
address at the PC
2 Checking the settings The printer host name is Check the printer host name
not properly set. by printing out the status
report when there is a server
environment. Then, check the
printer host name at the [Port]
tab in the printer properties at
a PC. If they differ, correct the
printer host name.

'Offline' appears and the print function is unavailable.

1 Checking the network There is trouble in the Check if the internet is
network. available. Improve the
network connection if not
available.
2 Restarting up The PC malfunctions. When 'Offline' appears on the
printer driver, check if it is
used in the pause or offline.
Then, restart up the PC.
7-209
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

3 Checking the settings The application is not Check if other data by such as
properly set. Excel, Word, etc. can be
output and change the setting
of the application.
4 Checking the IP address The IP address is not Check if the main unit IP
properly set. Address indicated in the
address at the PC
5 Checking the IP address The IP address is not Check if communication via
properly set. command center or PING is
available with IP address set
up. Set up IP address again
and restart the main unit if
necessary.
6 Checking the settings The port settings in the Remove the checks at the
printer properties at the PC dual-directional support and
are incorrect. the SNMP status in the [Port]
tab of the printer properties in
a PC. Then, restart up the
main unit and the PC.
7 Restarting up The main unit does not Check if the test print is output
start up properly. after the printer is ready, and
restart up the main unit.

[Condition]
• PC OS: Windows7
• Print file: Test Page
• Connection: Wireless LAN
Only one among installed PCs is unable to print. No error is displayed and if directing print, it is on hold.

1 Restarting up The main unit or the PC Restart up the main unit or the
does not properly start up. PC.
2 Checking the cable The cable is not properly Check the cable connection
connected. (Check if the network
connection is available.)
3 Checking the IP address The IP address is not Check if the ID address is
properly set. properly set, and correct it if
incorrect.
4 Checking the network There is trouble in the Check if access via command
network. center or PING is available
and then check the hub or
router.
7-210
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

5 Checking the settings The printer port IP address, Correct the IP address and
the SNMP of the printer remove the checks at the
driver, or the bi-directional SNMP status and the dual-
support is not properly set. directional support in the
[Port] tab of the printer
properties at a PC. Then,
restart up the main unit and
the PC.
6 Uninstalling the security The restriction of the Check if the printer is
software or setting the security software causes available by uninstalling the
exception the phenomenon. security software. Or, set the
exception setting.

The main unit IP address is changed.

1 Restarting up There is trouble in the Check if a problem occurs
network. with output from all PCs on
the network and restart up
hub or router.
2 Checking the cable The wire is not properly Check if there is problem with
connected. the cable connection on the
network.
3 Restarting up The main unit does not Turn off the power switch and
start up properly. unplug the power cord. After
power switch.
4 Checking the settings IP address was changed. Check if the main unit IP
Address indicated in the
address at the PC
5 Checking the settings The system of the main unit Set the static IP Address in
is not set to the static IP the System Menu
address.
7-211
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(21)Print out is not available from the printer driver setting factor (1)
[Condition]
• PC OS: Windows7
• File: Test Page
[Disconnection error] appears on the PC screen and the print job cannot be output due to this error. (Print is
unavailable.)

1 Deleting the job The faulty print job is Check if the print job remains
remaining. in the printer driver and delete
the remaining.
[Condition]
• PC OS: Windows7
• Print file: Test Page
'Please wait' is displayed at the main unit. The Job is retained without outputting printed materials.

1 Deleting the job The faulty print job is Check if the print job remains
remaining. in the printer driver and delete
the remaining.
A PC does not recognize the main unit.

1 Checking the settings The printer driver is not Check if the printer icon on
properly set. the PC is ready.
(Right click the printer icon
and perform the
troubleshooting.)
2 Installing the printer driver The printer driver is faulty. Uninstall and reinstall the
printer driver.
3 Restarting up The PC does not start up Restart up the PC.
properly.
4 Checking the printer driver The printer driver is not the Update the printer driver.
latest version.
7-212
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
PC operation does not stabilize.

1 Checking the settings The printer driver is not Restart the PC.
properly set.
(Many applications are started
up.
The available PC memory or
the HDD storage is
decreased.)
Check if the issue occurs when printing the data from all PCs in the network or from a certain PC. Then, print out the
data from another PC if it occurs at a certain PC.

1 Checking the IP address The IP address is not Check if the IP Address
properly set. indicated in the main unit
status report and system
menu is same as the IP
address in the port setting of
[Printer Properties] at the PC.
If not, correct the IP address
at the port setting
The incorrect printer driver was selected.

1 Installing the printer driver The incorrect printer driver Select the correct printer
is selected. driver. If it is not in the PC,
install the printer driver for the
destination unit in the PC.
Installed printer driver shows 'Deleting' and it remains when reinstalling it

1 Deleting the job The print jobs remain in the Delete all print jobs spooling
spool inside the printer inside the printer driver.
driver.
2 Checking the printer driver There is the unused printer Delete the unused printer
driver. driver.
3 Restarting the print The system is pausing. Right click the pausing printer
icon and select [Print
resuming]. Then, check the
ready port.
7-213
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

4 Checking the settings The host name or the IP When the main unit connects
address is not properly set. to a local network, check the
host name and the IP address
on the status report of the
main unit.
5 Adding the Standard TCP/ There is no main unit IP Add the main unit IP address
IP port Address in the Standard in Standard TCP/IP port and
TCP/IP Port print Test Page
(28)A part of the image is missing

The image data processing with a certain application (Excel, PDF, etc.) is faulty.

1 Checking the application The image data processing When the phenomenon
with a certain application occurs with a certain file only,
(Excel, PDF, etc.) is faulty. check if there is an
abnormality in the image data.
2 Checking the application The data processing with a Check if the image does not
certain application (Excel, drop out on the print preview,
PDF, etc.) is faulty. and refer to the Help in the
application if necessary.
3 Checking the settings The PDL settings is Select 'GDI compatible mode'
incorrect. at [PDL settings] in the print
settings at the PC.
4 Firmware upgrade The firmware is not the Upgrade the main firmware to
(29)'Paper Mismatch Error' appears

The paper size is not detected properly.

1 Checking the settings The paper size for the MP Adjust the MP tray paper size
tray is not properly set.
2 Resetting the MP paper The locations of the MP Reset the MP paper width
3 Checking the settings The paper size is not set Set the custom paper size in
properly in the System the System Menu.
Menu.
4 Checking the settings 'Paper Mismatch Error' is Set [Ignore] at [Common
set to [Display Error]. Settings] > [Error Handlings] >
[Paper Mismatch Error] via
the System Menu.
7-214
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
7-4 Error Messages

No. Contents
(1) The [Add Paper] message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray
Content of Error Messages

(1) The [Add Paper] message appears while the paper is loaded on the MP tray

• MP paper detection sensor -
2 Replacing the actuator The actuator is deformed. Replace the actuator of the
MP paper detection sensor.
3 Checking the MP paper The MP paper detection Reattach the MP paper
detection sensor sensor is not properly detection sensor. If it is not
attached, or it is faulty. fixed, replace it.
4 Checking the main/engine The wire is not properly Reconnect the wires on the
PWB connected. Or, the wire or main/engine PWB. At that
the main/engine PWB is time, repair or replace them if
faulty. pinched by another part if
engine PWB.
7-215
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
7-5 Abnormal Noise

(1) Abnormal noise (Basic measures)
(2) Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects
section adhesion on the conveying rollers, pulleys and
the gears
(3) Abnormal sound from the developer section Caused by the developer unit.
(4) Abnormal sound from the document processor The frictional wear, affixing the smudges or the
foreign objects, improperly attaching of the part
(5) Abnormal sound from the eject section Smudges / foreign objects adhesion in the eject
section
(6) The rotation sound of the fan is noisy
(7) Abnormal sound from the primary paper feed Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects
section adhesion, attachment failure of the primary
paper feed section
(8) Abnormal sound from the machine front side Wear, dirtiness, foreign objects adhesion or
attachment failure at the MP feed section
(9) Abnormal sound from the lower side than the Rubbing sound between the bushing and the
fuser eject section stop ring of the feed-shift roller due to the
smudges / foreign objects adhered
(10) Abnormal sound from the upper side of the fuser Rubbing sound between feed-shift pulley A and
eject section the shaft due to the smudges / foreign objects
adhesion
(11) Abnormal sound from the fuser section Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the
interference between the parts in the fuser
section
(12) Abnormal sound from inside the machine Open and close operation failure of the toner
supply opening of the toner container, the lack of
toner amount, or the toner condensation
(13) Abnormal sound from inside the machine Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the toner
condensation in the developer section
(14) Abnormal sound from inside the machine Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects
adhesion, or the waste toner clogging in the
drum section
(15) Abnormal sound from inside the machine Opening/closing operation failure, dirtiness,
(jumping sounds) smudges / foreign objects adhesion of the waste
toner vent of the primary transfer section
(16) The driving sound is noisy during printing The operation sounds in the drive section
(17) FAX power-up sounds regularly rings from the
FAX speaker during the sleep mode
7-216
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Content of Abnormal Noise

(1) Abnormal noise (Basic measures)

1 Applying the grease Grease on each gear or Check the rotation of the
bushing is not enough. roller, pulley and the gears,
and apply the grease to the
gears and the bushings if not
rotating smoothly.
2 Checking the gear and the The parts such as each Reattach the gear or the
bushing gear or bushing are not bushing.
properly attached.
(2) Abnormal sounds from the paper conveying section

Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion on the conveying rollers, pulleys and the gears

1 Cleaning and applying the The bushing or the gear is Clean the bushings and the
grease dirty or foreign objects are gears of the registration roller,
on them. belt drive roller, secondary
transfer roller, exit roller, feed-
shift roller and the duplex
conveying roller, and apply
grease to them.
2 Cleaning and applying the The gear tooth are dirty or Clean the transfer drive gear
grease foreign objects are on and the registration drive gear
them. and apply the grease to them.
(3) Abnormal sound from the developer section

Caused by the developer unit.

1 Checking the developer The developer unit drive is Specify the faulty developer
unit faulty. unit by executing the test
print.
After that, check the following
points and repair it if
necessary.
• The developer powder does
not leak from the developer
unit.
• The developer unit is not
damaged.
• The developer rollers can
rotate manually.
2 Checking the developer The developer unit is faulty. Replace the faulty developer
unit unit.
7-217
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(4) Abnormal sound from the document processor

The frictional wear, affixing the smudges or the foreign objects, improperly attaching of the part

grease dirty or foreign objects are shafts of the DP conveying
on them. roller A, B, and then apply
grease to them.
2 Checking the bushing The bushing is worn down. Replace the bushing.
3 Cleaning and applying the The drive gear is dirty or Clean the drive gear of the DP
grease foreign objects are on it. feed motor, and apply grease
to it.
(5) Abnormal sound from the eject section

Smudges / foreign objects adhesion in the eject section

1 Cleaning and applying the The bushing or the gear is Clean the bushing and the
grease dirty or foreign objects are gear of the eject roller and
on them. apply grease to them.
2 Cleaning and applying the The shaft is dirty or foreign Clean the shaft of the eject
grease objects are on it. pulley and apply grease to it.
3 Checking the shaft of the The shaft is dirty or foreign Clean the shaft of the feed-
feed-shift guide objects are on it. shift guide and apply grease
to it.
(6) The rotation sound of the fan is noisy

1 Cleaning the fan motor The blades of the fan motor Isolate the fan motor with the
are dirty. noisy sounds and clean the
fans.
2 Replacing the fan motor The fan motor is faulty. Reattach the fan motor and
reconnect the wire. Replace it
if it is not fixed.
(7) Abnormal sound from the primary paper feed section

Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion, attachment failure of the primary paper feed section

1 Checking the gear and the The parts such as the gear Reattach the primary paper
clutch or the clutch are not feed drive components such
properly attached. as the gear or the clutch if
they are not properly
attached.
2 Cleaning and applying the The gear or the bushing is Clean the primary paper feed
grease dirty or foreign objects are drive components such as the
on them. gear or the bushing and apply
the grease to them.
7-218
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

3 Cleaning and applying the The shaft or the bushing is Clean the shaft and the
grease dirty or foreign objects bushing of the paper feed
adhere on them. roller and apply grease to
them.
(8) Abnormal sound from the machine front side

Wear, dirtiness, foreign objects adhesion or attachment failure at the MP feed section

1 Checking the gear and the The parts such as the gear When the gears or the clutch
clutch or the clutch are not in the MP paper feed drive
properly attached. section are not properly
attached, reattach them.
2 Cleaning and applying the The shaft or the bushing is Clean the shaft and the
grease dirty or foreign objects bushing of the MP paper feed
adhere on them. roller and apply the grease to
them.
3 Checking the MP The surface of the MP Clean the MP separation pad.
separation pad separation pad is dirty or Then, replace it if necessary.
worn down.
4 Checking the MP bottom The MP bottom plate is not Reattach the MP bottom
plate properly attached. plate.
(9) Abnormal sound from the lower side than the fuser eject section
Rubbing sound between the bushing and the stop ring of the feed-shift roller due to the smudges / foreign objects
adhered

1 Cleaning and applying the The feed-shift roller, the Clean the feed-shift roller,
grease bushing or the stop ring is bushing and the stop ring and
dirty or the foreign objects apply polyolefin grease to
adhere on them. them
2 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser unit is faulty. Replace the fuser unit.
(10)Abnormal sound from the upper side of the fuser eject section
Rubbing sound between feed-shift pulley A and the shaft due to the smudges / foreign objects adhesion

1 Cleaning and applying the The pulley or the shaft is Clean the feed-shift pulley A
grease dirty, or foreign objects and the shaft, and apply
adhere on them. polyolefin grease to them.
2 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser unit is faulty. Replace the fuser unit.
7-219
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(11)Abnormal sound from the fuser section

Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the interference between the parts in the fuser section

grease dirty or foreign objects are gears of the heat roller and
on them. the press roller, and apply
grease to them.
2 Cleaning and applying the The shaft is dirty or foreign Clean the feed-shift pulley A
grease objects are on it. and the shaft, and apply
polyolefin grease to them.
3 Cleaning and applying the The gear is dirty or foreign Clean the fuser drive gear
grease objects are on it. and apply the grease to it.
4 Applying the grease The grease is not enough. Apply the grease to the
pressure release cam and the
frame.
5 Replacing the fuser unit The fuser front guide is Replace the fuser unit.
bent and it contacts the
press roller.
(12)Abnormal sound from inside the machine

Open and close operation failure of the toner supply opening of the toner container, the lack of toner amount, or the
toner condensation

1 Checking the toner supply The spring for opening and Open and close the toner
opening closing of the toner supply supply opening manually to fix
opening is hooked with the the operation.
other parts, or deformed.
2 Checking the toner The toner mixing paddle is Check the toner remaining
remaining amount bent or the toner amount in amount and replace the toner
the toner container is little. container if necessary.
3 Checking the toner The torque increases due Shake the toner container
container to the toner condensation. enough and reinstall it. Or,
replace it.

Smudges / foreign objects adhesion or the toner condensation in the developer section

1 Checking the toner supply The spring for opening and Open and close the toner
opening closing of the toner supply supply opening manually to fix
opening is hooked with the the operation.
other parts, or deformed.
2 Checking the developer The shaft or the bushing of Check if the developer roller
unit the developer roller is dirty rotates. If not rotating
or foreign objects are on smoothly, clean the shaft or
them. the bushing of the developer
roller.
7-220
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

3 Checking the developer The torque inside the Clean the developer unit.
unit developer unit increased Then, replace it if the issue is
due to the toner not resolved.
condensation, etc.

Frictional wear, smudges / foreign objects adhesion, or the waste toner clogging in the drum section

1 Executing Drum refresh Toner is not enough on the Execute the drum refresh to
drum. supply the toner to the
cleaning unit.
2 Checking the drum screw The drum screw does not Check if the drum screw
properly rotate. rotates. If not rotating
smoothly, clean it. If it locks
up, replace the drum unit.
3 Cleaning and applying the Foreign objects are on the Clean the tooth of the drum
grease tooth of the drum drive drive gear and apply the
gear, or the grease is not grease to them.
enough.
4 Checking the drum unit and The torque inside the drum Execute the drum refresh. If
the developer unit unit increased due to the not repaired, replace the drum
waste toner clogging, etc. unit.
(15)Abnormal sound from inside the machine (jumping sounds)

Opening/closing operation failure, dirtiness, smudges / foreign objects adhesion of the waste toner vent of the primary
transfer section

1 Checking the shutter of the The shutter of the waste Check the opening and
toner waste vent toner vent is not properly closing operation of the
opened and closed. shutter of the toner waste
vent in the transfer cleaning
unit, and fix the parts if
necessary.
2 Checking the cleaning The cleaning screw does Check if the cleaning screw in
screw not properly rotate. the transfer cleaning unit
rotates smoothly, and clean it
if not rotating smoothly.
3 Cleaning and applying the The drive gear or the Clean the parts in the primary
grease bushing is dirty, or foreign transfer unit such as the drive
objects are on them. gear and the bushing, and
apply the grease to them.
4 Checking the primary The primary transfer unit is Replace the primary transfer
transfer unit faulty. unit.
7-221
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(16)The driving sound is noisy during printing

The operation sounds in the drive section

1 Checking the settings The Quiet Mode is off. Press the [Quiet mode] key to
set the quiet mode
(17)FAX power-up sounds regularly rings from the FAX speaker during the sleep mode
[Condition]
• The sleep level is set to [Energy Saver].
• The network is connected via a LAN cable.

1 Changing the settings (Avoid one of the Set the sleep level to 'Quick
conditions where the issue Recovery'.
occurs.)
2 (For Wi-Fi model only) (Avoid one of the Change the network
Change the network conditions where the issue connection to Wi-Fi.
connection occurs.)
7-6 Malfunction
(1) The login fails with other than the ID card
(2) The main unit does not operate at all even if the
power switch is turned on
(3) Toner drops over the paper conveying section. (Final phenomenon: Toner adheres on the paper
leading edge)
Content of Malfunction
(1) The login fails with other than the ID card

1 Checking the settings [User/Job Account] is valid Change the following setting
while the card from [System Menu/Counter]
authentication kit is not key > [User Login/Job
installed. Accounting] > [User Login
Setting] > [ID Card Settings].
Change to [Permit] as [Key
Login].
7-222
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(2) The main unit does not operate at all even if the power switch is turned on

1 Measuring the input The power cord has no Plug the power cord into
voltage continuity. another wall outlet.
2 Checking the power cord The power cord is faulty. Check the continuity in the
power cord, and replace the
power cord if there is no
continuity.
3 Checking the power switch The power switch is faulty. Check the continuity between
the contacts of the power
switch. Then, replace the
power switch if there is no
continuity.
4 Checking the low voltage The low voltage PWB is Reconnect the connectors on
PWB faulty. the low voltage PWB. If the
wires are pinched or have any
damage, repair or replace the
wires. If not repaired, replace
it.
5 Replacing the power switch The power switch is faulty. Check the continuity between
the contacts of the power
switch. Then, replace the
power switch if there is no
continuity.
engine PWB.
(3) Toner drops over the paper conveying section.

(Final phenomenon: Toner adheres on the paper leading edge)

1 Checking the developer The developer unit or the Clean the developer unit and
and drum units drum unit is dirty. the drum unit.
2 Executing Developer The toner is deteriorated. Execute the developer refresh
refresh twice.
3 Developer unit The toner is deteriorated. Replace the developer unit.
replacement
7-223
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
8 PWBs
8-1 Description for PWB
(1) Main/Engine PWB
Connector position
Figure 8-1
External appearance photograph
Figure 8-2
Connector access point
YC1: Low voltage power supply PWB
8-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
YC2: Container relay PWB

YC3: High voltage PWB
YC4: DPCIS
YC5: DP paper feed clutch, DP opening and closing sensor, DP document detection sensor, DP back side timing
sensor, DP surface timing sensor, DP paper feed sensor
YC6: DP conveying motor
YC7: Unit relay PWB
YC8: USB host
YC9: Color developer stop solenoid, MP paper detection sensor, MP paper feed solenoid
YC11: Main motor
YC12: Fax PWB (FAX model only)
YC13: WiFi PWB
YC15: Eject sensor, Pressure release sensor
YC16: Cassette detection sensor, resist sensor
YC17: Home position sensor
YC18: CIS
YC19: Scanner motor
YC20: Polygon motor
YC21: APC PWB
YC22: Eject fan motor, In-machine fan motor
YC23: Fuser thermistor
YC24: ID sensor left/right
YC26: Operation panel PWB
YC31: Inter lock switch
YC35: Thermistor PWB
YC47: PF PWB, PF cover switch
YC56: Operation panel PWB
Connector Pin Signal I/O Voltage Description

YC1 1 ZCROSSN I 0/3.3 V DC Zero cross signal
Low voltage 2 RELAYDRV O 0/24 V DC Heater relay remote signal
power supply
3 GND - - Ground
PWB
4 GND - - Ground
5 HEATDRV O 0/24 V DC Heater remote signal
6 SLEEP O 0/7.7 V DC Sleep signal
7 +24V0 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input
8 +24V0 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input
YC2 1 REGCL O 0V/24V Registration clutch remote signal

Container relay 2 EXITCL O 0V/24V Eject solenoid remote signal
PWB
3 FDDUCL O 0V/24V Feed clutch remote signal
4 PRSSOL O 0V/24V Pressure release solenoid control signal
5 REVSOL O 0V/24V Switchback solenoid control signal
6 FDMOTRDYN I 0V/3.3V Conveying motor ready signal
7 FDMOTREM O 0V/5V Conveying motor control signal
8 FDMOTCLK O 0V/5V Conveying motor clock signal
9 LSUCLEANMOTB O 0V/24V (pulse) LSU cleaning motor control signal
YC2 10 LSUCLEANMOTA O 0V/24V (pulse) LSU cleaning motor control signal

Container relay 11 CASOL O 0V/24V Lift solenoid control signal
PWB
12 TNSOLK O 0V/24V Toner solenoid control signal K
8-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

13 TNSOLM O 0V/24V Toner solenoid control signal M
14 TNSOLC O 0V/24V Toner solenoid control signal C
15 TNSOLY O 0V/24V Toner solenoid control signal Y
16 +24V5IL2F1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
20 CFRAMSCL O 0/3.3 V DC CFRAM clock signal
21 CFRAMSDA O 0/3.3 V DC CFRAM data signal
22 +3.3V3F2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
23 MAINSW I 0/3.3 V DC Power switch detection signal
24 RCOVER I 0/3.3 V DC Right cover switch detection signal
25 GND - - Ground
26 GND - - Ground
27 GND - - Ground
28 GND - - Ground
29 GND - - Ground
YC3 1 HVISENS I Analog High voltage detection signal

High voltage 2 +24V5IL2F2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
PWB
4 HVCLKN O Analog Developer AC clock signal
5 ACCTLMCY O 0/3.3 V DC Developer AC control signal MCY
6 ACCTLK O 0/3.3 V DC Developer AC control signal K
7 DBCTLY O 0/3.3 V DC Developer DC control signal Y
8 DBCTLC O 0/3.3 V DC Developer DC control signal C
9 DBCTLM O 0/3.3 V DC Developer DC control signal M
10 DBCTLK O 0/3.3 V DC Developer DC control signal K
11 TREV O Analog Transfer remote signal
12 T2CTL O 0/3.3 V DC The secondary transfer control signal
13 T1CTLMCY O 0/3.3 V DC The first transfer control signal MCY
14 T1CTLK O 0/3.3 V DC The first transfer control signal K
15 MCTLY O 0/3.3 V DC Charge control signal Y
16 MCTLC O 0/3.3 V DC Charge control signal C
YC3 17 MCTLM O 0/3.3 V DC Charge control signal M

High voltage 18 MCTLK O 0/3.3 V DC Charge control signal K
PWB
19 GND - - Ground
20 GND - - Ground
8-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

YC4 1 DPVOUT0 O Analog Image output signal 0
DPCIS 2 GND - - Ground
3 DPVOUT1 O Analog Image output signal 1
4 GND - - Ground
5 DPVOUT2 O Analog Image output signal 2
6 GND - - Ground
7 +3.3V2F O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
8 DPSP O 3.3 V DC Horizontal synchronizing signal
9 GND - - Ground
10 DPCLK O 3.3 V DC Pixel transfer clock signal
11 DPLEDANODE O 18 V DC LED common anode
12 DPLEDBLUE - - LED cathode (B)
13 DPLEDGREEN - - LED cathode (G)
14 DPLEDRED - - LED cathode (R)
YC5 1 +24V5F2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output

DP paper feed 2 DPCL O 0V/24V DP paper feed clutch remote signal
clutch, DP
3 +3.3V3LED9 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
opening and
closing sensor, 4 GND - - Ground
DP document
5 DPCOVER I 0/3.3 V DC DP opening and closing sensor detection
detection
signal
sensor, DP back
side timing 6 +3.3V3LED8 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
sensor, DP GND - Ground
7 -
timing sensor,
DP paper feed 8 DPSET I 0/3.3 V DC DP document detection sensor signal
sensor +3.3V3LED7 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
9 O
10 GND - - Ground
11 DPREG1 I 0/3.3 V DC DP timing sensor detection signal
13 GND - - Ground
14 DPREG2 I 0/3.3 V DC DP back side timing sensor detection signal
16 GND - - Ground
17 DPREG3 I 0/3.3 V DC DP paper feed sensor detection signal
YC6 1 DPOUTA2 O 0/24 V DC DP conveying motor control signal

DP conveying 2 DPOUTA1 O 0/24 V DC DP conveying motor control signal
motor
3 DPOUTB1 O 0/24 V DC DP conveying motor control signal
4 DPOUTB2 O 0/24 V DC DP conveying motor control signal
YC7 1 UNITTH O 0/3.3 V DC Unit thermistor output signal
8-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Unit relay PWB 2 TSENSK I 0/3.3 V DC Toner sensor output signal K
3 TSENSM I 0/3.3 V DC Toner sensor output signal M
4 TSENSC I 0/3.3 V DC Toner sensor output signal C
6 UNITSCL O 0/3.3 V DC Drum, T/C clock signal
7 GND - - Ground
8 UNITSDA O 0/3.3 V DC Drum, T/C data signal
9 TSENSY I 0/3.3 V DC Toner sensor output signal Y
YC8 1 VBUS O 5 V DC 5 V DC power signal

USB host 2 -DATA O 5 V DC Data signal(-)
3 +DATA O 5 V DC Data signal(+)
4 GND - - Ground
YC9 1 DLPSOLN O 0/24 V DC Color developer stop solenoid control signal

Color developer 2 +24V5F1F O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
stop solenoid,
3 MFPFDSOLN O 0/24 V DC MP paper feed solenoid control signal
MP paper
detection 4 +24V5F1F O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
sensor, MP
5 MPFPE I 0/3.3 V DC MP paper detection sensor signal
paper feed
solenoid 6 GND - - Ground
7 3.3V1LED1 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
YC11 1 MMOTDIRN O 0/5 V DC Main motor direction signal

Main motor 2 MMOTRDYN I 0/3.3 V DC Main motor ready signal
3 MMOTCLKN O 0/5 V DC Main motor clock signal
4 MMOTREMN O 0/5 V DC Main motor control signal
5 GND - - Ground
6 +24V5F1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
YC12 1 NC - - Not used

Fax PWB 2 +24V2F O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
(FAX model)
3 GND - - Ground
4 +3.3V2 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
5 RESB O 3.3 V DC Reset signal
6 GND - - Ground
7 HSCLK O 3.3 V DC Clock signal
8 HSD O 3.3 V DC Data signal
8-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

9 GND - - Ground
10 HSAD O 3.3 V DC Data signal
11 HSCSB O 3.3 V DC Chip select signal
12 GND - - Ground
13 HINT O 3.3 V DC Interrupt signal
YC13 1 SD_D3 3.3 V DC Data signal

WiFi PWB 2 SD_D2 3.3 V DC Data signal
3 SD_CMD 3.3 V DC Command signal
4 GND - - Ground
5 SD_CLK 3.3 V DC Clock signal
6 GND - - Ground
7 SD_D1 O 3.3 V DC Data signal
8 SD_D0 O 3.3 V DC Data signal
9 GND - - Ground
10 VIO O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power supply
11 VBAT O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power supply
12 GND - - Ground
13 PAVDD O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power supply
14 GND - - Ground
15 HOSTWAKE O 3.3 V DC Data signal(Interruption)
16 GND - - Ground
17 RST I 3.3 V DC Reset signal(WiFi side open)
18 GND - - Ground
19 USB_- - - Ground(Pull down)
20 USB_+ - - Ground(Pull down)
YC15 1 FUSER I 0/3.3 V DC Eject sensor detection signal

Eject sensor, 2 GND - - Ground
Pressure
release sensor
4 PRSDIR I 0/3.3 V DC Pressure release sensor detection signal
5 GND - - Ground
YC16 1 REGIST I 0/3.3 V DC Registration sensor detection signal
8-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Cassette 2 GND - - Ground
detection
sensor,
registration 4 CASPE I 0/3.3 V DC Paper detection sensor signal
sensor
5 GND - - Ground
YC17 1 SCANHP I 0/3.3 V DC Home position sensor detection signal

Home position 2 GND - - Ground
switch
YC18 1 TBLLEDRED - - LED cathode (R)

CIS 2 TBLLEDGREEN - - LED cathode (G)
3 TBLLEDBLUE - - LED cathode (B)
4 TBLLEDANODE O 18 V DC LED common anode
5 TBLCLK O 3.3 V DC Pixel transfer clock signal
6 GND - - Ground
7 TBLSP O 3.3 V DC Horizontal synchronizing signal
8 +3.3V2F O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
9 GND - - Ground
10 TBLVOUT2 O Analog Image output signal 2
11 GND - - Ground
13 GND - - Ground
YC19 1 TBLOUTA1 O 0/24 V DC Scanner motor control signal

Scanner motor 2 TBLOUTA2 O 0/24 V DC Scanner motor control signal
3 TBLOUTB1 O 0/24 V DC Scanner motor control signal
4 TBLOUTB2 O 0/24 V DC Scanner motor control signal

Polygon motor 2 GND - - Ground
3 POLRMN O 0/5 V DC Polygon motor remote signal
4 POLRDYN I 0/3.3 V DC Polygon motor ready signal
5 POLCLKN O 0/5 V DC Polygon motor clock signal
YC21 1 GND - - Ground

APC PWB 2 LSUTH I 0/3.3 V DC LSU thermistor output
3 XAPCNY O 0/3.3 V DC Sample hold signal Y
4 XAPCNC O 0/3.3 V DC Sample hold signal C
8-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

5 VCONTY O 0/3.3 V DC Light amount adjustment reference voltage Y
YC21 6 VCONTC O 0/3.3 V DC Light amount adjustment reference voltage C

APC PWB 7 GND - - Ground
8 VDATAYP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data(+)
9 VDATAYN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data(-)
10 GND - - Ground
11 VDATACP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data(+)
12 VDATACN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data(-)
13 GND - - Ground
14 VDATAMP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data(+)
15 VDATAMN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data(-)
16 GND - - Ground
17 VDATAKP O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data(+)
18 VDATAKN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Video data(-)
19 GND - - Ground
20 VCONTM O 0/3.3 V DC Light amount adjustment reference voltage M
21 VCONTK O 0/3.3 V DC Light amount adjustment reference voltage K
22 XAPCNM O 0/3.3 V DC Sample hold signal M
23 XAPCNK O 0/3.3 V DC Sample hold signal K
24 OUTPEN O 0/3.3 V DC LD driver enable signal
25 BDN I 0/3.3 V DC Main scanning synchronization signal

Eject fan motor, 2 EXITFANRN O 0/24 V DC Eject1 fan motor control signal
In-machine fan
3 +24V5F1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
motor
4 FANRN O 0/24 V DC In-machine fan motor control signal

Fuser thermistor 2 TH1 I 0/3.3 V DC Fuser thermistor output
YC24 1 +3.3V3F4 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output

ID sensor left/ 2 LEDREFR O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output for LED
right
3 GND - - Ground
4 VORR I Analog ID sensor output signal
8-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

5 VODR I Analog ID sensor output signal
6 NC - - Not used
8 LEDREFL O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output for LED
9 GND - - Ground
10 VORL I Analog ID sensor output signal
11 VODL I Analog ID sensor output signal
YC26 1 +5V1F - 5 V DC 5 V DC power output

Operation panel 2 P2CSDAT I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication transmission data signal
PWB
3 INTANYKEY I 0/3.3 V DC Interrupt key detection signal
4 C2PSDAT O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication reception data signal
5 INTENERGYSAVE I 0/3.3 V DC Interrupt key detection signal

RKEYN
6 +3.3V1F - 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
7 C2PRSTN O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication panel reset signal
8 GND - - Ground
YC31 1 +24V5 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output

Inter lock switch 2 NC - - Not used
3 +24V5IL O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
YC35 1 TEMP O 0/3.3 V DC Thermistor output signal

Thermistor PWB 2 GND - - Ground
3 HUMCLK O 0/3.3 V DC Temperature sensor clock signal
4 HUMDATA O 0/3.3 V DC Temperature sensor output signal
YC47 1 PF SETN - - Ground

PF PWB, PF 2 +3.3V1LED3 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
cover switch
3 NC - - Not used
4 PF PE I 0/3.3 V DC Paper detection sensor signal for PF
5 PFCOVER I 0/3.3 V DC PF cover switch detection signal

PF PWB, PF 7 GND - - Ground
cover switch
8 +24V5F1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power input
9 PFSOL O 0/3.3 V DC PF lift solenoid control signal
10 PFFEEDCL O 0/3.3 V DC PF paper feed clutch control signal
11 PFCLN O 0/3.3 V DC PF conveying clutch control signal
12 GND - - Ground
8-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

YC56 1 INT_ENERGYSAV I 0/3.3 V DC Interrupt key detection signal
EKEY
Operation panel 2 +5V1F - 5 V DC 5 V DC power output
PWB
3 P2CSDAT I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication transmission data signal
4 C2PSCK O 0/3.3 V DC Serial communication clock signal
5 C2PSDAT O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication reception data signal
6 C2PRST O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication panel reset signal
7 P2CSBSY I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication busy signal
8 P2CSDIR I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication direction signal
12 LEDMEMORY O 0/3.3 V DC Memory LED control signal
13 LEDATTENTION O 0/3.3 V DC Attention LED control signal
14 GND - - Ground
15 RXIN3+ O LVDS Input signal
16 RXIN3- O LVDS Input signal
17 GND - - Ground
18 RXCLKIN+ O LVDS Input signal
19 RXCLKIN- O LVDS Input signal
20 GND - - Ground
23 GND - - Ground
YC56 25 RXIN1- O LVDS Input signal

Operation panel 26 GND - - Ground
PWB
29 GND - - Ground
(2) Container relay PWB
8-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Connector position
Figure 8-3
Figure 8-4
YC1: Main/Engine PWB
YC2: Fuser pressure release clutch, Paper feed clutch, Registration clutch, Eject/Both sides clutch
YC3: Lift solenoid, Toner solenoid KMCY
YC4: Right cover switch
YC5: Power switch
8-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
YC6: Eraser
YC11: Switchback solenoid, conveying motor
YC13: LSU cleaning motor

Main/Engine 2 GND - - Ground
PWB
3 GND - - Ground
4 GND - - Ground
5 GND - - Ground
6 RCOVER O 0/3.3 V DC Right cover switch detection signal
7 MAINSW O 0/3.3 V DC Power switch detection signal
8 +3.3V3F2 I 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power input
9 CFRAMSDA I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication signal

10 CFRAMSCL I 0/3.3 V DC Eraser current switch signal
11 +24V5IL2F1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input
15 TNSOLY I 0/3.3 V DC Toner solenoid control signal Y
16 TNSOLC I 0/3.3 V DC Toner solenoid control signal C
17 TNSOLM I 0/3.3 V DC Toner solenoid control signal M
18 TNSOLK I 0/3.3 V DC Toner solenoid control signal K
19 CASOL I 0/3.3 V DC Lift solenoid control signal
20 LSUCLEANMOTA I 0/3.3 V DC LSU cleaning motor control signal
21 LSUCLEANMOTB I 0/3.3 V DC LSU cleaning motor control signal
22 FDMOTCLK I 0/3.3 V DC Conveying motor clock signal
23 FDMOTREM I 0/3.3 V DC Conveying motor remote signal
24 FDMOTRDYN O 0/3.3 V DC Conveying motor ready signal
25 REVSOL I 0/3.3 V DC Switchback solenoid control signal
26 PRSSOL I 0/3.3 V DC Pressure release solenoid control signal
27 FDDUCL I 0/3.3 V DC Paper feed clutch control signal
28 EXITCL I 0/3.3 V DC Eject/Both sides clutch control signal
29 REGCL I 0/3.3 V DC Registration clutch control signal
YC2 1 +24V5IL2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
8-12
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Fuser pressure 2 PRSSOL O 0/24 V DC Pressure release solenoid control signal
release clutch,
3 +24V5IL2 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
Paper feed
clutch, 4 FDUCLN O 0/24 V DC Paper feed clutch control signal
Registration
clutch, Eject/
Both sides 6 REGCLN O 0/24 V DC Registration clutch control signal
clutch
8 EXITCLN O 0/24 V DC Eject/Both sides clutch control signal

Lift solenoid, 2 TNSOLYN O 0/24 V DC Toner solenoid control signal Y
Toner solenoid
KMCY
4 TNSOLCN O 0/24 V DC Toner solenoid control signal C
6 TNSOLMN O 0/24 V DC Toner solenoid control signal M
8 TNSOLKN O 0/24 V DC Toner solenoid control signal K
10 CASOLN O 0/24 V DC Lift solenoid control signal

Right cover 2 COVEROPN I 0/3.3 V DC Right cover switch detection signal
switch

Power switch 2 POWERN I 0/3.3 V DC Power switch detection signal

Eraser 2 NC - - Not used
3 LED POWERN O 0/8 V DC Eraser drive remote signal

Switchback 2 REVSOLN O 0/24 V DC Switchback solenoid control signal
solenoid,
3 FDMOTRDYN I 0/3.3 V DC Conveying motor ready signal
conveying motor
4 FDMOTCLKN O 0/5 V DC Conveying motor clock signal
5 FDMOTREMN O 0/5 V DC Conveying motor remote signal
6 GND - - Ground
YC13 1 LSUMOTA O 0/24 V DC LSU cleaning motor control signal

LSU cleaning 2 LSUMOTB O 0/24 V DC LSU cleaning motor control signal
motor
8-13
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(3) Unit relay PWB
Connector position
Figure 8-5
Figure 8-6
8-14
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
YC1: Main/Engine PWB, Transfer PWB

YC2: Drum PWB (Y)
YC3: Drum PWB (C)
YC4: Drum PWB (M)
YC5: Drum PWB (K)
YC6: T/C sensor (Y)
YC7: T/C sensor (C)
YC8: T/C sensor (M)
YC9: T/C sensor (K)

YC1 1 TSENSY O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) T/C sensor output signal Y
Main/Engine 2 UNITSDA I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal
PWB, Transfer
3 GND - - Ground
PWB
4 UNITSCL I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication clock signal
5 +3.3V3F3 I 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power input
6 TSENSC O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) T/C sensor output signal C
7 TSENSM O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) T/C sensor output signal M
8 TSENSK O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) T/C sensor output signal K
9 UNITTH O Analog Thermistor output signal
10 NC - - Not used
YC2 1 DRUMSDA O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

Drum PWB (Y) 2 GND O - Ground
3 DRUMSCL O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication clock signal
4 ADRS1 O 0/3.3 V DC Address input signal 1

Drum PWB (C) 2 GND O - Ground

Drum PWB (M) 2 GND O - Ground
YC5 1 DRUMSDA I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

Drum PWB (K) 2 GND O - Ground
8-15
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

YC6 1 TCSDA I/O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication data signal

T/C sensor (Y) 2 GND O - Ground
3 TCSCL O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication clock signal
7 TSENSY I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) T/C sensor output signal Y

T/C sensor (C) 2 GND O - Ground
7 TSENSC I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) T/C sensor output signal C

T/C sensor (M) 2 GND O - Ground
7 TSENSM I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) T/C sensor output signal M

T/C sensor (K) 2 GND O - Ground
7 TSENSK I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) T/C sensor output signal K
(4) High voltage PWB
8-16
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Connector position
Figure 8-7
Figure 8-8

8-17
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Main/Engine 2 GND - - Ground
PWB
3 MCTLK I Analog Charge control signal K
4 MCTLM I Analog Charge control signal M
5 MCTLC I Analog Charge control signal C
6 MCTLY I Analog Charge control signal Y
7 T1CTLK I Analog The primary transfer control K
8 T1CTLMCY I Analog The primary transfer control MCY
9 T2CTL I Analog The secondary transfer control signal
10 TREV I 0/5 V DC Transfer remote signal
11 DBCTLK I Analog Developer DC control signal K
12 DBCTLM I Analog Developer DC control signal M
13 DBCTLC I Analog Developer DC control signal C
14 DBCTLY I Analog Developer DC control signal Y
15 ACCTLK I Analog Developer AC control signal K
16 ACCTLMCY I Analog Developer AC control signal MCY
17 HVCLKN I 0/5 V DC Developer AC clock signal
20 HVISENS O Analog Charge current monitor signal
(5) Low voltage power supply PWB
Connector position
Figure 8-9
8-18
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
[100V
[200V
Figure 8-10
YC1: Inlet
YC3: Fuser unit

YC1 1 LIVE I 100 V AC AC power input
Connected to 2 NEUTRAL I 100 V AC AC power input
the inlet
YC2 1 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
Connected to 2 +24V O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
the Main/Engine
3 SLEEP I 0/7.7 V DC Sleep signal
PWB
4 HEATDRV I 0/24 V DC Heater remote signal
5 GND - - Ground
6 GND - - Ground
7 RELAYDRV I 0/24 V DC Heater relay remote signal
8 ZCROSSN O 0/3.3 V DC Zero cross signal
YC3 1 LIVE O 100 V AC Fuser heater (LIVE)

Connect to the 2 NC - - Not used
Fuser unitl
3 NEUTRAL O 100 V AC Fuser heater (NEUTRAL)
8-19
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
(6) Operation panel main PWB
Connector position
Figure 8-11
8-20
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Figure 8-12
YC1: ....................................................................... Main/Engine PWB

Main/Engine 2 C2PRST I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication panel reset signal
PWB
4 INTENERGYSAVE O 0/3.3 V DC Interrupt key detection signal

RKEYN
5 C2PSDAT I 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication reception data signal
6 INTANYKEY O 0/3.3 V DC Key detection signal (except for power saving)
7 P2CSDAT O 0/3.3 V DC (pulse) Serial communication transmission data signal
8 +5V1F - 5 V DC 5 V DC power output
8-2 Description for PWB (OPTION)

(1) PF PWB (PF-5110)
Connector position
Figure 8-13
8-21
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Figure 8-14
YC2: PF conveying clutch, PF paper feed clutch
YC3: PF lift solenoid
YC4: PF paper detection sensor

YC1 1 +3.3V1LED3 I 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power input
Main/Engine 2 PF PE O 0/3.3 V DC Paper detection sensor signal for PF
PWB
3 +24V5F1 I 24 V DC 24 V DC power input
4 PFSOL I 0/3.3 V DC PF lift solenoid control signal
5 PFFEEDCL I 0/3.3 V DC PF paper feed clutch control signal
6 PFCLN I 0/3.3 V DC PF conveying clutch control signal
7 GND - - Ground
YC2 1 PFCLN O 0/24 V DC PF conveying clutch control signal

PF conveying 2 +24V5F1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
clutch and PF
3 PFFEEDCLN O 0/24 V DC PF paper feed clutch control signal
paper feed
clutch 4 +24V5F1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
YC3 1 PFSOLN O 0/24 V DC PF lift solenoid control signal

PF lift solenoid 2 +24V5F1 O 24 V DC 24 V DC power output
YC4 1 +3.3V1LED3 O 3.3 V DC 3.3 V DC power output
8-22
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

PF paper 2 GND - - Ground
detection sensor
3 PF PE I 0/3.3 V DC Paper detection sensor signal for PF
8-23
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
9 Appendixes
9-1 Appendixes
(1) Repetitive defects gauge
First occurrence of defect
27.9 mm / 1 1/8” Developer roller

29.8 mm / 1 3/16” Chager roller
51.2 mm / 2 3/16” Secondly transfer roller
72.2 mm / 2 13/16” Heat roller

75.3 mm / 2 15/16” Drum
78.5 mm / 3 1/16” Press roller
628.0 mm / 24 3/4” Primaly transfer belt
*: The repetitive marks interval may vary depending on operating conditions.
(2) Firmware environment commands

The printer maintains a number of printing parameters in its memory. These parameters may be changed permanently
with the FRPO (Firmware RePrOgram) commands.
This section provides information on how to use the FRPO command and its parameters using examples.
9-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
Using FRPO commands for reprogramming the firmware

The current settings of the FRPO parameters are listed as the optional values on the service status page.
Note: Before changing any FRPO parameters, print out a service status page, so you will know the parametervalues
before the changes are made. To return FRPO parameters to their factory default values, send theFRPO INIT (FRPO-
INITialize) command. (!R! FRPO INIT; EXIT;)
The FRPO command is sent to the printer in the following sequence:

!R! FRPO parameter, value; EXIT;
Example: Changing emulation mode to PC-PR201/65A
!R! FRPO P1, 6; EXIT;
FRPO parameters
Items FRPO Setting value Factory setting

Default pattern resolution B8 0: 300 dpi 0
1: 600 dpi
Number of copies at start-up C0 1 to 999 1
Page orientation C1 0: Portrait 0
1: Landscape
Default font* C2 Middle two digits of power-up font 0
C3 Last two digits of power-up font 0
C5 First two digits of power-up font 0
PCL font switching C8 0:HP compatible mode 0
32:Compatibility mode
Total host buffer size H8 0 to 99 in units of the size defined by FRPO S5 5
Form feed time-out value H9 Value in units of 5 seconds (0 to 99). 6
1: 100V
Reduction (100 V model only) J0 0: 100% 0
5: 70 %
6: 81 %
7: 86 %
8: 94 %
9: 98 %
Auto linefeed mode (100 V model J7 0: Auto linefeed 0
only)
1: No auto linefeed
(Japanese emulation only)
Horizontal offset (100 V model K0 -7 to +7 (Integer), unit: cm 0
only) *
K1 -99 to +99 (Decimal), unit: 1/100 cm 0
Vertical offset (100 V model only)* K2 -7 to +7 (Integer), unit: cm 0
K3 -99 to +99 (Decimal), unit: 1/100 cm 0
9-2
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Kanji font number setting K4 0: Same as V7 0
(100 V model only) 1: Mincho 40 dots
2: Gothic 40 dots
5: Mincho 48 dots
6: Gothic 48 dots
New/old JIS code switching K6 0: JIS X 0208: 1990 0
(100 V model only) 1: JIS X 0208: 1978
8: JIS X 0213: 2004
Duplex printing mode selection N4 0: OFF 0
1: Long-edge mode (long-edge bind)
2: Short-edge mode (Short-edge bind)
Sleep timer time-out time N5 1 to 240 minutes 1
Ecoprint level N6 0: OFF 0
2: ON
Default emulation mode P1 6 : PCL6 6
9 : KPDL 9: 120V
Carriage-return action P2 0: Ignores 1
1: CR
2: CR+LF?
Linefeed action P3 0: Ignores 1
1: LF
2: CR+LF?
KPDL auto switching P4 0: None 0
1: Auto switching 1(120V model)
AES option P7 If the data is neither applicable to KPDL nor 10
alternate emulation after the AES is started, it is 11: 120V
Page eject command and action
processed in the alternate emulation .
when automatic emulation
switching (AES) is triggered 0: All page eject commands
1: None
2: All page eject commands and Prescribe
EXIT command
3: Prescribe EXIT command only
4: ^L command only
6: Prescribe EXIT command and ^L command
If the data is neither applicable to KPDL nor
alternate emulation after the AES is started, it is
processed in KPDL.
10: Data other than KPDL print data is printed
in the alternate emulation.
Command recognition character P9 ASCII code of 33 to 126 82(R)
9-3
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Paper size(start-up) R2 0: Size of the default paper cassette (See R4.) 0
1: Envelope Monarch
2: Envelope #10
3: Envelope DL
4: Envelope C5
5: Executive
6: Letter
7: Legal
8: ISO A4
9: JIS B5
13: ISO A5
14: ISO A6
15: JIS B6
16: Envelope #9
17: Envelope #6-3/4
18: ISO B5
19: Custom
20: B4toA4(100 V model only)
21: A3toA4(100 V model only)
22: A4toA4[98%](100 V model only)
23: STKtoA4(100 V model only)
31: Hagaki
32: Oufuku Hagaki
33: Oficio II
40: 16K
42: 8.5x13.5
50: Statement
51: Folio
52: Youkei type 2
53: Youkei type 4
Default paper source R4 0: MP paper feed section 1
1: Cassette 1
2: Cassette 2
9-4
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

MP tray size R7 1: Envelope Monarch 8
2: Envelope #10 6(120V)
3: Envelope DL
4: Envelope C5
5: Executive
6: Letter
7: Legal
8: ISO A4
9: JIS B5
13: ISO A5
14: ISO A6
15: JIS B6
16: Envelope #9
17: Envelope #6-3/4
18: ISO B5
19: Custom
31: Hagaki
32: Oufuku Hagaki
33: Oficio II
40: 16K
42: 8.5x13.5
50: Statement
51: Folio
52: Youkei type 2
53: Youkei type 4
A4/Letter override S4 0: OFF 1
1: ON 0 (100V)
Host buffer size rate S5 0: 10KB 1
(H8 value and integration)
1: 100KB
2: 1MB
RAM disk size S6 1 to 1024 400
RAM disk mode S7 0: RAM disk mode OFF 1
1: RAM disk mode ON
9-5
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Tray1 size T1 5: Executive 8
6: Letter 6(120V)
7: Legal
8: ISO A4
9: JIS B5
13: ISO A5
14: ISO A6
15: JIS B6
18: ISO B5
19: Custom
33: Oficio II
40: 16K
42: 8.5x13.5
50: Statement
51: Folio
Tray2 size T2 5: Executive 8
6: Letter 6(120V)
7: Legal
8: ISO A4
9: JIS B5
13: ISO A5
14: ISO A6
15: JIS B6
18: ISO B5
19: Custom
33: Oficio II
40: 16K
42: 8.5x13.5
50: Statement
51: Folio
Wide A4 T6 0: OFF 0
1: ON
Line spacing U0 Lines per inch (integer value) 6
U1 Lines per inch (fraction value) 0
Character spacing U2 Characters per inch (integer value) 10
U3 Characters per inch (fraction value) 0
9-6
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Country code of the resident fonts U6 0: US 41
1: France 0 (100V)
2: Germany
3: U.K.
4: Denmark
5: Sweden
6: Italy
7: Spain
8: Japan
9: US legal
10: IBM PC-850 (Multi-lingual)
11: IBM PC-860 (Portuguese)
12: IBM PC-863 (Canadian French)
13: IBM PC-865 (Norwegian)
14: Norway
15: Denmark 2
16: Spain 2
17: Latin America
Supported symbol sets U7 0: Same as the default emulation mode (P1) 53
1: IBM 0 (100V)
6: PCL
Default font pitch* U8 Default font pitch/integer 10
U9 Default font pitch/decimal 0
ANK outline font size at start-up* V0 Integer value of ANK outline font size at power- 0
up
Upper 2-digit/valid value: 00 to 09
V1 Integer value of ANK outline font size at power- 12
up
Lower 2-digit/valid value: 00 to 99
V2 Decimal value of ANK outline font size at 0
power-up
Valid value: 00, 25, 50, 75
ANK outline font name at start-up* V3 ANK outline font name at power-up Courier
Initial Kanji outline font side at V4 Upper 2-digit integer value of Kanji outline font 0
start-up (100 V model only)* size at start-up
Valid value range: 00 to 09
V5 2-digit integer value of the Kanji outline font 10
size at start-up
Valid value range: 00 to 99
V6 2-digit decimal value of the Kanji outline font 0
size at start-up
Valid value: 00, 25, 50, 75
9-7
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Initial Kanji outline font name (100 V7 Kanji outline font name at start-up MTHSMINCHO-W3
V model only)*
Default weight(courier and letter V9 0: Courier = darkness 5
Gothic)
Letter Gothic = darkness
1: Courier = regular
Letter Gothic = darkness
4: Courier = darkness
Letter Gothic = regular
5: Courier = regular
Letter Gothic = regular
Color mode W1 0: BW 1
1: Color (CMYK color)
Gloss mode W6 0: OFF 0
1: ON
Paper type for the MP tray X0 1: Plain 1
2: Transparency
3: Preprinted
4: Labels
5: Bond
6: Recycled
7: Rough (except 100 V model)
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
12: Envelope
13: Hagaki
14: Coated
16: Thick
17: High quality
21 to 28: Custom 1 to Custom 8
9-8
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

Paper type (Paper cassettes 1) X1 1: Plain 1
3: Preprinted
5: Bond
6: Recycled
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
16: Thick
17: High quality
21 to 28 : Custom 1 to Custom 8
Paper type X2 1: Plain 1
(Option paper cassette 2 to 5) 3: Preprinted
5: Bond
6: Recycled
9: Letterhead
10: Color
11: Prepunched
16: Thick
17: High quality
21 to 28 : Custom 1 to Custom 8
Cassette selection mode (PCL) X9 0: Paper selection depending on an escape 0
sequence compatible with HP-LJ5Si
2: Paper selection depending on an escape
sequence compatible with HP-LJ8000
Auto error clear at an error Y0 0: OFF 0
1: ON
Auto error clear timeout time Y1 Value in units of 5 seconds (0 to 99). 6
Paper error detection at duplex Y3 0: Not detected 33
printing
33: Detected
Paper size and type error
detection at fixed paper source
Forced duplex printing setting Y4 0: OFF 0

(Media type is Preprinted, 1: ON
Prepunched and Letterhead only)
9-9
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>

PDF direct printing Y5 0: Zoom depending on paper size 0
1: Loads paper which is the same size as the
image
2: Loads Letter, A4 size paper depending on
the image sizeEnlarges or reduces the image
to fit in the current paper size
the image size
8: Printed in full magnification
the image size
the image sizeEnlarges or reduces the image
to fit in the current paper size
13 to 99: Same action as default value(0)
Job box error control Y6 0: No error control 3
1: Output the error list
2: Displays the error
3: Displays the error and prints the error report
*: Ignored depending on emulation
9-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation >
(3) Chart of image adjustment procedures

Adjust- Item Image Maintenance mode Page Setting procedure Remarks
ing order
Item No. Mode Method Setting
1 Adjusting the center line of the MP U034 LSU Out Left 6-24 1. Press the [Start] key. 1. Press the [ ◄ ] [ ► ] keys or *When the setting value is increased, the image
tray A
2. Select [Lsu Out Left]. the numeric keys to change moves leftward.
(printing adjustment)
3. Press the [System Menu] key. the counter value. *Adjustment selects [Duplex] at the time of
4. Press the [Start] key. 2. Press the [Start] key to set duplex mode.
Adjusting the LSU print start timing. (output a test pattern) the setting value.
(Original: test pattern) 5. Press the [System Menu] key.
6. Select [MPT]. Completion

2 Adjusting the center line of the U034 LSU Out Left 6-24 1. Press the [Start] key. 1. Press the [ ◄ ] [ ► ] keys or *When the setting value is increased, the image
cassettes A
2. Select [Lsu Out Left]. the numeric keys to change moves leftward.
Adjusting the LSU print start timing. (output a test pattern) the setting value.
(Original: test pattern) 5. Press the [System Menu] key.
6. Select [Cass1] to [Cass4]. Completion

3 Adjusting the leading edge U034 LSU Out Top Full 6-24 1. Press the [Start] key. 1. Press the [ ◄ ] [ ► ] keys or *When the setting value is increased, the image
registration of the MP tray A
2. Select [Lsu Out Top Full]. the numeric keys to change moves downward.
Changes the secondary feed (output a test pattern) the setting value.
timing. (Original: test pattern) 5. Press the [System Menu] key.
6. Select [MPT]. Completion

4 Adjusting the leading edge U034 LSU Out Top Full 6-24 1. Press the [Start] key. 1. Press the [ ◄ ] [ ► ] keys or *When the setting value is increased, the image
registration of the cassette A
2. Select [Lsu Out Top Full]. the numeric keys to change moves downward.
Changes the secondary feed (output a test pattern) the setting value.
timing. (Original: test pattern) 5. Press the [System Menu] key.
6. Select [Cass]. Completion

5 Adjusting the leading edge margin U402 Lead 6-43 1. Press the [Start] key. 1. Press the [ ◄ ] [ ► ] keys or *When the setting value is increased, the margin
(printing adjustment) A
2. Press the [System Menu] key. the numeric keys to change widens.
3. Press the [Start] key. the counter value.
Changes the LSU illumination start (output a test pattern) 2. Press the [Start] key to set
timing. 4. Press the [System Menu] key. the setting value.
(Original: test pattern) 5. Select [Lead]. Completion
9-10
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation >

ing order
6 Adjusting the trailing edge margin U402 Trail 6-43 1. Press the [Start] key. 1. Press the [ ◄ ] [ ► ] keys or *When the setting value is increased, the margin
Changes the LSU illumination end (output a test pattern) 2. Press the [Start] key to set
timing. 4. Press the [System Menu] key. the setting value.
(Original: test pattern) 5. Select [Trail]. Completion

7 Adjusting the left and right margins U402 A Margin 6-43 1. Press the [Start] key. 1. Press the [ ◄ ] [ ► ] keys or *When the setting value is increased, the margin
C Margin
Changes the LSU illumination start/ (output a test pattern) 2. Press the [Start] key to set
end timing. 4. Press the [System Menu] key. the setting value.
(Original: test pattern) 5. Select [A Margin] or [C Margin].
Completion

8 Adjusting magnification of the U065 Main Scan 6-26 1. Press the [Start] key. 1. Press the [ ◄ ] [ ► ] keys or U065: When using on the contact glass
scanner in the main scanning 2. Press the [System Menu] key. the numeric keys to change *When the setting value is increased, the
direction
3. Place an original and press the the counter value. imagewidens.
[Start] key. (Test copy output) 2. Press the [Start] key to set
Processes data. 4. Press the [System Menu] key. the setting value.
5. Select [Main Scan]. Completion
(Original: test copy) Press the [Stop] key.
9 Adjusting magnification of the U065 Sub Scan 6-26 1. Press the [Start] key. 1. Press the [ ◄ ] [ ► ] keys or U065: When using on the contact glass
scanner in the sub scanning 2. Press the [System Menu] key. the numeric keys to change *When the setting value is increased, the
direction (scanning adjustment)
3. Place an original and press the the counter value. imagewidens.
U070 Sub Scan(F) 6-30
Changes the original scanning 4. Press the [System Menu] key. the setting value.
(Original: test copy) U070: When using document processor
speed. 5. Select the item to be adjusted.
U065: [Sub Scan] *When the setting value is increased, the image
Completion
U070: [Sub Scan(F)] get longer.
10 Adjusting the center line U067 Front 6-28 1. Press the [Start] key. 1. Press the [ ◄ ] [ ► ] keys or U067: When using on the contact glass
(scanning adjustment) 2. Press the [System Menu] key. the numeric keys to change *When the setting value is increased, the image
3. Place an original and press the the counter value. moves leftward.
Scan data is processed. [Start] key. (Test copy output) 2. Press the [Start] key to set
U072 Front 6-32 4. Press the [System Menu] key. the setting value.
U072: When copying from the document
Back 5. Select the item to be adjusted.
processor
U067: [Front] Completion
U072: [Front]or [Back] *Back adjustment selects [Back] at the time of
(Original: test copy) Press the [Stop] key. duplex mode.
*When the setting value is increased, the image
moves rightward.
9-11
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation >

ing order
11 Adjusting the leading edge U066 Front 6-27 1. Press the [Start] key. 1. Press the [ ◄ ] [ ► ] keys or U066: When using on the contact glass
registration 2. Press the [System Menu] key. the numeric keys to change *When the setting value is increased, the
(scanning adjustment)
3. Place an original and press the the counter value. imagemoves forward.
U071 Front Head
Back Head 6-31 4. Press the [System Menu] key. the setting value.
Changes the original scan start
U071: When using document processor
timing. 5. Select the item to be adjusted.
(Original: test copy) U066: [Front] Completion *Back adjustment selects [Back Head] at the
U071: [Front Head] or [Back Head] time of duplex mode.
*When the setting value is increased, the
imagemoves forward.
Image quality
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N 302NM94340), the
following adjustments are automatically made: Items Specifications
Scanner magnification adjustment in the sub scanning direction (U065) 100% magnification Printer: ±0.8%
Adjusts the scanner leading edge registration (U066) Copy: ±1.5%
Adjusting the scanner center line (U067) Using DP: ±2.0%
Input gamma correction coefficient for color Magnificaiton Copy: ±2.0%
Using DP: ±2.5%
Black line detection correction value
LED light intensity adjustment Lateral squareness Copy: ±2.0mm/200mm
Tentative white reference correction coefficiency Using DP: ±2.5mm/200mm
Leading edge timing Print: 2.0 mm or less
When maintenance item U411 (Automatic adjustment in the scanner) is run using the specified original (P/N 302NM94330), the Copy: 2.0mm or less
following adjustments are automatically made:
Using DP: 2.5mm or less
*:When running this test chart, you first must clean the feed rollers with alcohol and ensure the DP width guides are correctly positioned
against the original. Skewed paper feed Print: 1.0mm / 10.0mm or less
(left-right difference) Copy: 1.0mm / 10.0mm or less (table)
*:Cut the trailing edge of the DP adjustment original (ChartB) as follows.
1.5 mm / 10.0mm or less (DP)
Lateral image shifting Print: ±2.0mm or less (cassette)
±3.0mm or less (MP tray)
80
Copy: ±2.0mm or less(cassette)

65
Using DP: ±2.0mm or less(cassette)

Adjusting the DP magnification (U070)
Adjusting the DP leading edge registration (U071)
Adjusting the DP center line (U072)
9-12
Installation >
+24V5IL2
LSU
7 7 1 1
INLET
GND
Fuser unit
6 6 2 2
(4) Wiring diagram
5 5 FDMOT REMN
3 3
LIVE
GND
thermistor
4 4 FDMOTCLK N Feed motor
4 4
3 3 FDMOT RDYN
5 5
YC7
YC11
NEUTRAL
LIVE
1 1 1 1
Laser scanner unit

6 6
2 2 2 2
NEUTRAL
3 3 3 3
Contact (Y)
2 2 REVSOLN 1 2 Feed shift
GND
LSUTH
Container PWB
1 1 +24V5IL2 2 1 solenoid
YC3
2
1
YC8
YC1
2
1
GND 8 8 EXITCLN
1 1 1 Eject/Duplex
1 +24V5IL2
LSUTH 7 7
(Edge)
2 2 2 clutch
YC3
2
Contact (C)
XAPCNY 3
3
Container PWB
XAPCNC
SW: Only South Korea

4 4 REGCLN
Thermistor 1
VCONTY 5 6 6 1 1 Regisutration
5 +24V5IL2
VCONTC 6 5 5 2 2 clutch
6
GND 7 YC9
Low voltage
7
YC2
VDATAYP 8
8 FDUCLN
VDATAYN 9 4 4 1 1 Paper feed
9 +24V5IL2
GND 10
Contact (M)
3 3 2 2
10 clutch
ID sensor (L)
ID sensor (R)
Container PWB
VDATACP
power source PWB

11 11
YC2
VDATACN 12
12
GND
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
13 13 PRSSCL Fuser press
VDATAMP 2 2 1 1
YC10
14 14 +24V5IL2
8
7
6
3
2
1
5
4
VDATAMN 15 1 1 2 2 release clutch
15
GND
GND
GND
16 16
VODL
VORL
YC21
VODR
VORR
Contact (K)
VDATAKP 17
17 Interlock
GND
GND
Container PWB
+3.3V3F4
+3.3V3F4
VDATAKN
LEDREFL
2
+24V0
LEDREFR
18
+24V0
18
SLEEP
GND switch
19 19 1
YC12
HEATDRV
APC/PD PWB
VCONTM
ZCROSSN
20 20
RELAYDRV
+24V5
VCONTK
TH1
GND
21 21
+24V5IL
XAPCNM 10 1 CASOLN
22 22 2 1
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
2
1
XAPCNK +24V5IL2 Lift solenoid
YC1
23 23 9 2 1 2
OUTPEN GND
2
1
9
8
7
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
3
2
1
11
24
10
24 29 1
BDN 25 GND
25 28 2
3.3V3F1 26 GND
26
5 YC1
3.3V3F1 27 GND 3 8 3 TNSOLKN
6 YC24
YC31
YC23
27 27 2 1 Toner
3.3V3F1 26 GND 4 7 4 +24V5IL2
28 28 1 2 solenoid (K)
3.3V3F1 25 RCOVER 5
29 29 24
3.3V3F1 MAINSW 6
30 30 23 +3.3V3F2 7 6 5 TNSOLMN Toner
2 1
YC3
22 CFRAMSDA 8 5 6 +24V5IL2 1 2 solenoid (M)

21 CFRAMSCL 9
20 10
Container relay PWB
POLCLK N +24V5IL2F1
1 1 5 5 19 11 TNSOLCN
+24VILF
POL RDYN +24V5IL2F1 4 7 2 1 Toner

2 2 4 4 18 12
Polygon POLREMN +24V5IL2F1 3 8 +24V5IL2 1 2 solenoid (C)
3 3 3 3 17 13
GND +24V5IL2F1
YC20
motor 4 4 2 2
+24V5F1 16 TNSOLY 14
5 5 1 1 15 15
TNSOLC 2 9 TNSOLYN 2 1 Toner
YC1
14 16
YC2
TNSOLM 1 10 +24V5IL2 1 2 solenoid (Y)

13 TNSOLK 17
TBL OUTB2 12 18
YS1
Image 1 1 4 4 DDR socket CAS OL
TBL OUTB1 3 3 11 LSUCLEANMOTA 19 COVEROPN
scanner 2 2 2 2 1 1 Right cover
TBL OUTA2 10 LSUCLEANMOTB 20
YC19
3 3 2 2 GND
YC4
motor TBL OUTA1 9 21 1 1 2 2 switch

4 4 1 1 FDMOTCLK
SD card 8 FDMOTREM 22
YC29
7 FDMOTRDYN 23
TBLVOUT0 6 24 POWERN
Debugger (Main)
Debugger (Main)
1 14 REVSOL 2 2 Power source

Debugger (Engine)
Flush write (Engine)
GND 5 PRSSOL 25 1 1 GND

YC5
2 13 4 26 switch
TBLVOUT1 FDDUCL
3 12 3 27
4 GND EXITCL LED POWERN
11 2 28 3 3
sensor
TBLVOUT2 REGCL
5 10 N.C
Main/Engine PWB (1/2)

GND 1 29 2 2
YC6
6 9 1 1 GND
2
1
+3.3V2F
YC13
YC33
YC32
YC34
7
YC50
8
Temperature
TBLSP
1
2
CIS
7
YC18
GND GND
9 6 20 1
10 TBLCLK GND
5 19 2
TBLLEDANODE
YC1
11 MCTLK
Image scanner unit

4 18 3
sensor
TBLLEDBLUE MCTLM
12 3
9-13
17 4
Humidity
TBL LEDGREEN
LSUMOTA
13
LSUMOTB
2 16 MCTLC 5
TBL LEDRED
USB
YC28
14 MCTLY
dvice
1
Eraser
15 6
LSU
14 T1CTLK 7
YC27
T1CTLMCY 1 2 1
13 8
Ethernet
T2CTL 2 1 2
12 9
11 TREV 10
+3.3V3LED5 DBCTLK
3 3
YC3
Home 1 3 10 11
cleaning motor
GND DBCTLM
position 2 2 2 2 9 12
SCANHP
YC17
1 1 3 1 8 DBCTLC 13
sensor DBCTLY
7 14
ACCTLK
High voltage PWB
6 15
5 ACCTLMCY 16
Paper 3 3 +3.3V1LED3 1 6 4 HVCLKN 17
2 2 GND 2 5 3 +24V5IL2F2 18
detection +24V5IL2F2
sensor 1 1 CASPE 3 4 2 19
1 HVISENS 20
YC16
3 3 +3.3V3LED3 4 3
Registration 4 4 TEMP
2 2 GND 5 2 1 1 DPVOUT0
sensor 3 3 GND 1 GND 1
1 1 REGIST 6 1 2 2
HUMCLK 2 2
DPVOUT1
YC35
2 2 3 3 3
-
HUMDATA GND 3
DP unit
1 1 4 4 4 4
sensor (out)
DPVOUT2
Temperature
5 GND 5
Fuser press 3 3 +3.3V3LED2 1 6 6 6
release 2 2 GND 2 5 7 +3.3V2F
7
DPSP
YC4
sensor 1 1 PRSDIR 3 4 8 8
GND
DPCIS
9 9
DPCLK
YC15
10 10
*M26 model only
11 DPLEDANODE
3 3 +3.3V3LED1 4 3 11
Eject 12 DPLEDBLUE
2 2 GND 5 2 12
sensor 13 DPLEDGREEN 13
1 1 FUSER 6 1 VBUS DPLEDRED
1 1 14 14
- DATA 2 2
+DATA
YC8
3 3
FANRN GND 4 4
Inner fan 2 1 4 4 +24V5F2 2 1 DP paper feed
USB host
+24V5F1 1 1
motor 1 2 3 3 1 2
2 2 clutch
+3.3V3LED9
YC22
3 3 3 3
Eject fan 2 1 EXITFANRN 2 2 GND DP open/close
+24V5F1 4 4 2 2
motor 1 2 1 1 DPCOVER sensor
5 5 1 1
YC13
PWB
Wi-Fi
+3.3V3LED8
6 6 3 3
GND
7 7 2 2 DP origial sensor
*Wi-Fi model only
8 8 DPSET
1 1
YC5
+3.3V3LED7
1
2
3
4
YC12 5
6
7
8
9
3 3
11
10
13
12
9 9 GND DP backside timing

10 10 2 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
sensor
10
13
12
11 11 DPREG1 1 1
HSD
GND
GND
GND
GND
HINT
*M26 model only
RESB
HSAD
+3.3V2
HSCLK
HSCSB
+24V2F
4 1 DPOUTB2 +3.3V3LED6 3 3
4 4 12 12 GND
DP paper 3 2 DPOUTB1 3 3 2 2
13 13 DP timing sensor
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
11
12
10
YC6
feed motor 2 3 DPOUTA1 2 2 14 14 DPREG2 1 1

DPOUTA2
9
8
7
5
4
3
2
1 4
11
12
10
1 1
*FAX model only
+3.3V3LED10 3 3
1 YC4
2
1
15 15 GND DP paper feed

6 FAX
16 16 2 2
17 17 DPREG3 1 1
sensor
PWB
[CONFIDENTIAL]
Installation >
6 DRUMSDA
1
5 GND
2
4 DRUMSCL
3
ADRS1
(Y)
YC1
3 4
YC2
2 ADRS0
5
+3.3V3
Drum PWB
1
Drum unit (Y)

6
DRUMSDA
6
GND 1
5
DRUMSCL 2
4
ADRS1 3
YC1
(C)
3
ADRS0 4
YC3
2
+3.3V3 5
1
Drum PWB
Drum unit (C)

6
DRUMSDA
6 1
GND
5 2
DRUMSCL
4 3
ADRS1
YC4
YC1
3 4
(M)
ADRS0
2 5
+3.3V3
1 6
Drum PWB
Drum unit (M)

6 DRUMSDA
1
5 GND
2 10 10
DRUMSCL UNITTH
Unit relay PWB

4 3 9 9 1 1
ADRS1
(K)
3 TSENSK
YC1
4
YC5
ADRS0 8 8 2 2
2 5 TSENSM
+3.3V3 7 7 3 3
Drum PWB
TSENSC
Drum unit (K)

1 6 6 6 4 4
+3.3V3F3
5 5 5 5
YC7
YC1
UNITSCL
4 4 6 6
GND
TCSDA 3 3 7 7
7 1 UNITSDA
GND 2 2 8 8
6 2 TSENSY
TCSCL 1 1 9 9
5 3
4 ADRS1 4
(Y)
YC1
YC6
3 ADRS0 5
2 +3.3V3 6
DLP unit (Y)

T/C sensor
1 TSENSY 7
TCSDA 1
7
GND 2
6
TCSCL 3
5
ADRS1 4
4
(C)
YC1
YC7
ADRS0 5
3
+3.3V3 6
2
T/C sensor
DLP unit (C)

1 TSENSC 7
TCSDA 1
7
GND 2
6
TCSCL 3
5
ADRS1 4
4
YC8
(M)
YC1
ADRS0 5
3
+3.3V3 6
2
T/C sensor
DLP unit (M)

TSENSM 7
1
TCSDA 1
7
GND 2
6
TCSCL 3
5
ADRS1 4
4
(K)
YC9
YC1
ADRS0 5
3
+3.3V3 6
2
T/C sensor
DLP unit (K)

TSENSK 7
1
9-14
PF SETN
1 1 1 1
(MFP-Low)
+3.3V1LED3 +3.3V1LED3 2 2
PF paper 3 3 1 1 1 1 2 2
Buzzer
Main/Engine PWB (2/2)
GND 2 2 3 3 3 3
Operation panel
detection 2 2 PF PE
*M21 ppm model
YC4
PF PE 3 3 2 2 4 4 4 4
switch 1 1
PF rear 2 2 PFCOVER 5 5 5 5
GND
cover switch 1 1 GND 6 6 6 6 8 1
C2PRST
YC47
PF lift +24V5F1
YC1
1 1 7 2
LC D
+3.3V1F
128*64
solenoid PFSOLN 2 2 GND 6 3

YC3
7 7 7 7 INTENERGYSAVERKEYN
Operation panel PWB
+24V5F1 5 4
3 3 8 8 8 8 C2PSDAT
YC26
4 5
YC1
4 4 PFSOL 9 9 9 9 INTANYKEY
P F PWB
PFFEEDCL 3 6
5 5 10 10 10 10 P2CSDAT
PF paper 1 4 PFCL 2 7
2 2 +24V5F1 6 6 11 11 11 11 +5V1F
PFFEEDCLN 2 3 GND 1 8
feed clutch 1 1 7 7 12 12 12 12
YC2
PF feed 2 2 +24V5F1 3 2
clutch 1 1 PFCLN 4 1
PF unit
29 GND
1
(MFP-High)
28 RXIN0-
RXIN0+ 2
27 3
Operation panel
26 GND
*M26 ppm model
RXIN1- 4
+24V 5F1 25 5
1 1 6 6 24 RXIN1+
GND GND 6
2 2 5 5 23
Main motor MMOT REMN RXIN2- 7
3 3 4 4 22
MMOTCLKN RXIN2+ 8
YC11
(Drum/Developer) 4 4 3 3 21
MMOT RDYN GND 9
5 5 2 2 20
MMOT DIRN 10
Operation panel PWB
6 6 1 1 RXCLKIN - SCAN0
PWB (L)
19 11 5 5
18 RXCLKIN+ SCAN1
GND 12 4 4
17 13 KEY4
RXIN3- 3 3
YC4
YC1
Operation key
16 LED2
YC1
RXIN3+ 14 2 2
15 15 SCAN2
GND 1 1
YC56
14 16
13 LEDATTENTION
LEDMEMORY 17 KEY3
+3.3V1LED1 12 18 18
3 3 1 3 1 7 +3.3V1F 18 GND
MP paper GND 11 17 17
MP unit
2 2 2 6 +3,3V1F 19 BUZZER
2 2 10 16 16
detection sensor MPFPE 3 1 3 5 +3.3V1F 20 ATTENTION
4.3 ’
1 1 9 15 15
LC D
P2CSDIR 21 LED1
PWB (R)
8 14 14
P2CSBSY 22 MEMORY
7 13 13
C2PRST 23 SCAN0
6 12 12
+24V5F1F 24
Operation key
MP paper 1 2 4 4 C2PSDAT 11 PROCESSING 11

MPFDSO LN 5 25
2 1 5 3 C2PSCK 10 KEY2 10
YC9
feed solenoid 4 26 ESAVELED

YC1
P2CSDAT 9 9
YC3
3 27
+5V1F 8 LED0 8
2 28
INT_ENERGYSAVEKEY 7 SCAN4 7
1 29
6 SCAN1 6
5 ESAVEKEY 5
4 KEY1 4
+24V5F1F 1 2 3 SCAN3 3
Color developer 6 2
DLPSOLN SCAN2
Buzzer
2 1 7 1 2 2
stop solenoid KEY0
1 1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
[CONFIDENTIAL]
>
10-1 Installation Guide

(1) PF-5110
PF-5110
安裝手冊
㉘㾌㙼⇨㉐
Руководство по установке
PF-5110 安裝PF-5110 1 2
PF-5110 㻼㻲㻙㻡㻝㻝㻜㉘㾌
㉘㾌
PF-5110 㻼㻲㻙㻡㻝㻝㻜䛾タ⨨
PF-5110
PF-5110 2
Установка PF-5110
1
3 4 5
1 2
1
4
1
Загрузка бумаги 2
1
裝入紙張 3
1
㟝㫴G㤵㣠
3 4 5
10-1
[CONFIDENTIAL]
KYOCERA Document Solutions America, Inc. KYOCERA Document Solutions Asia Limited
Headquarters 13/F., Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road, Tsuenwan,
225 Sand Road, Fairfield, New Jersey 07004-0008, U.S.A. NT, Hong Kong
Phone: +1-973-808-8444 Phone: +852-2496-5678
Fax: +1-973-882-6000 Fax: +852-2610-2063
Latin America KYOCERA Document Solutions

8240 NW 52nd Terrace, Suite 301 (China) Corporation
Miami, Florida 33166, U.S.A. 8F, No. 288 Nanjing Road West, Huangpu District,
Phone: +1-305-421-6640
Shanghai, 200003,China
Phone: +86-21-5301-1777
KYOCERA Document Solutions Fax: +86-21-5302-8300
Canada, Ltd.
6120 Kestrel Rd., Mississauga, ON L5T 1S8, Canada KYOCERA Document Solutions
Phone: +1-905-670-4425 (Thailand) Corp., Ltd.
Fax: +1-905-670-8116 335 Ratchadapisek Road, Wongsawang, Bangsue,
Bangkok 10800, Thailand
KYOCERA Document Solutions Phone: +66-2-586-0333
Mexico, S.A. de C.V. Fax: +66-2-586-0278
Calle Arquimedes No. 130, 4 Piso, Colonia Polanco
Chapultepec, Delegacion Miguel Hidalgo, Ciudad de KYOCERA Document Solutions
Mexico, C.P.11560, Mexico Singapore Pte. Ltd.
Phone: +52-555-383-2741 12 Tai Seng Street #04-01A,Luxasia Building Singapore
Fax: +52-555-383-7804 534118
Phone: +65-6741-8733
KYOCERA Document Solutions Fax: +65-6748-3788
Brazil, Ltda.
Alameda África, 545, Pólo Empresarial Consbrás, KYOCERA Document Solutions
Tamboré, Santana de Parnaíba-SP, CEP 06543-306, Hong Kong Limited
Brazil 16/F.,Mita Centre, 552-566, Castle Peak Road, Tsuen
Phone: +55-11-2424-5353 Wan, NT, Hong Kong
Fax: +55-11-2424-5304 Phone: +852-3582-4000
Fax: +852-3185-1399
KYOCERA Document Solutions
Chile SpA KYOCERA Document Solutions
Jose Ananias 505, Macul. Santiago, Chile Taiwan Corporation
Phone: +56-2-2670-1900 6F., No.37, Sec. 3, Minquan E. Rd., Zhongshan Dist.,
Fax: +56-2-2350-7150 Taipei 104, Taiwan
Phone: +886-2-2507-6709
KYOCERA Document Solutions Fax: +886-2-2507-8432
Australia Pty. Ltd.
Level 3, 6-10 Talavera Road North Ryde NSW, 2113, KYOCERA Document Solutions
Australia Korea Co., Ltd.
Phone: +61-2-9888-9999 #10F Daewoo Foundation Bldg 18, Toegye-ro, Jung-gu,
Fax: +61-2-9888-9588 Seoul, Korea
Phone: +822-6933-4050
KYOCERA Document Solutions Fax: +822-747-0084
New Zealand Ltd.
Ground Floor. 19 Byron Avenue, Takapuna, Auckland, KYOCERA Document Solutions
New Zealand India Private Limited
Phone: +64-9-415-4517 First Floor, Block - A, First India Place, Sushant Lok Phase
Fax: +64-9-415-4597 - 1, M. G. Road, Gurugram - 122002 (Haryana), India
Phone: +91-124-4671000
Fax: +91-124-4671001

Malaysia Sdn. Bhd.
G/F & 2/F, No.71, Jalan SS15/5A, 47500 Subang Jaya,
Selangor Darul Ehsan, Malaysia
Phone: +603-5634 5609
[CONFIDENTIAL]
KYOCERA Document Solutions KYOCERA Document Solutions

Europe B.V. Deutschland GmbH
Bloemlaan 4, 2132 NP Hoofddorp, The Netherlands Otto-Hahn-Strasse 12, 40670 Meerbusch, Germany
Phone: +31(0)20-654-0000 Phone: +49-2159-9180
Fax: +31(0)20-653-1256 Fax: +49-2159-918100

Nederland B.V. Austria GmbH
Beechavenue 25, 1119 RA Schiphol-Rijk, The Netherlands Wienerbergstraße 11, Turm A, 18. OG, 1100 Wien, Austria
Phone: +31-20-5877200 Phone: +43-1-863380
Fax: +31-20-5877260 Fax: +43-1-86338-400

(U.K.) Limited Nordic AB
Eldon Court 75-77 London Road, Reading, Berkshire RG1 Borgarfjordsgatan 11, 164 40 Kista, Sweden
5BS, United Kingdom Phone: +46-8-546-550-00
Phone: +44-118-931-1500 Fax: +46-8-546-550-10
Fax: +44-118-931-1108
KYOCERA Document Solutions Norge Nuf
Italia S.p.A. Olaf Helsetsv. 6, 0619 Oslo, Norway
Via Monfalcone 15, 20132, Milano, Italy Phone: +47-22-62-73-00
Phone: +39-02-921791 Fax: +47-22-62-72-00
Fax: +39-02-92179-600
KYOCERA Document Solutions Danmark A/S
Belgium N.V. Ejby Industrivej 60, DK-2600 Glostrup, Denmark
Sint-Martinusweg 199-201 1930 Zaventem, Belgium Phone: +45-70223880
Phone: +32-2-7209270 Fax: +45-45765850
Fax: +32-2-7208748
KYOCERA Document Solutions Portugal Lda.
France S.A.S. Rua do Centro Cultural, 41 (Alvalade) 1700-106 Lisboa,
Espace Technologique de St Aubin Route de I’Orme Portugal
91195 Gif-sur-Yvette CEDEX, France Phone: +351-21-843-6780
Phone: +33-1-69852600 Fax: +351-21-849-3312
Fax: +33-1-69853409
KYOCERA Document Solutions South Africa (Pty) Ltd.
Espana, S.A. KYOCERA House, Hertford Office Park, 90 Bekker Road
Edificio Kyocera, Avda. de Manacor No.2, 28290 Las (Cnr. Allandale), Midrand, South Africa
Matas (Madrid), Spain Phone: +27-11-540-2600
Phone: +34-91-6318392 Fax: +27-11-466-3050
Fax: +34-91-6318219
KYOCERA Document Solutions Russia LLC
Finland Oy Building 2, 51/4, Schepkina St., 129110, Moscow, Russia
Atomitie 5C, 00370 Helsinki, Finland Phone: +7(495)741-0004
Phone: +358-9-47805200 Fax: +7(495)741-0018
Fax: +358-9-47805212
KYOCERA Document Solutions Middle East
KYOCERA Document Solutions Dubai Internet City, Bldg. 17,
Europe B.V. Amsterdam (NL) Zürich Branch Office 157 P.O. Box 500817, Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Hohlstrasse 614, 8048 Zürich, Switzerland Phone: +971-4-4330412
Phone: +41-44-9084949
Fax: +41-44-9084950 KYOCERA Document Solutions
Czech, s.r.o.
KYOCERA Bilgitas Document Solutions Harfa Office Park, ýeskomoravská 2420/15, Praha 9
Turkey A.S. Czech Republic
Altunizade Mah. Prof. Fahrettin Kerim Gökay Cad. No:45 Phone: +420-222-562-246
34662 ÜSKÜDAR øSTANBUL TURKEY
Phone: +90-216-339-0020 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc.
Fax: +90-216-339-0070 1-2-28 Tamatsukuri Chuo-ku Osaka 540-8585 Japan
Phone: +81-6-6764-3555
© 2021 KYOCERA Document Solutions Inc. https://www.kyoceradocumentsolutions.com
is a trademark of KYOCERA Corporation

MA2100cwx MA2100cwfxENSMR2 ASSC

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MA2100cwx MA2100cwfxENSMR2 ASSC

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CONFIDENTIAL

Published in December 2021

FOR AUTHORIZED KYOCERA ENGINEERS ONLY. DO NOT DISTRIBUTE TO NON-AUTHORIZED PARTIES.

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES

IL Y A UN RISQUE D’EXPLOSION SI LA BATTERIE EST REMPLACEE PAR UN MODELE DE TYPE INCORRECT.

Notation of products in the manual

Product name Print speed 100 V 120 V 220-240 V Australia China

ECOSYS MA2100cfx 21/ 21 sheets/min - x x x -

ECOSYS MA2100cx 21/ 21 sheets/min - - - - x

2.0 2021/11/8 Page 10-1 Correction: PF-5110 Installation procedure

Page 6-28 Addition: U067 (Add the note)

Page 6-32 Addition: U072 (Add the note)

General warning. Warning of risk of electric shock. Warning of high temperature.

General prohibited action. Disassembly prohibited.

2. Precautions for Maintenance

• Always use parts having the correct specifications.

• Remove toner completely from electronic components.

(5-1) Paper feeder............................................................................................................. 3-19

(5) Developer portion .............................................................................................................. 4-22

(3) Chart of image adjustment procedures ............................................................................. 9-10

Printing Method Electrophotography by semiconductor laser

Paper Weight Cassette 60 to 163 g/m²

Multi Purpose 60 to 220 g/m²

Warm-up Time Power on 32 seconds or less

Light source 3-color LED light source

Photoconductor OPC drum (diameter 24mm)

Charging system Contact charger roller method

Transfer system Primary: Transfer belt method

Separation system Diameter separation, separation needle

Cleaning Drum Counter blade

Interface USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)

Wireless LAN support

Operating Temperature 10 to 32.5°C/50 to 90.5°F

Altitude 3,500 m/11,482 ft maximum

Brightness 1,500 lux maximum

Dimension (W × D × H) 16.42" × 16.89" × 19.49" /417 × 429 × 495 mm

Weight (without toner container) Approx. 57.33 lb/Approx. 26 kg

Power Source 230 V Specification Model: 220 to 240 V 50/ 60 Hz 4.5 A

*1 Up to upper limit height line in the cassette.

Letter 22 sheets/min 22 sheets/min

Legal 18 sheets/min 18 sheets/min

A5-R 22 sheets/min 22 sheets/min

16K 22 sheets/min 22 sheets/min

First B/W 10 seconds or less

Continuous Copying 1 to 999 sheets

Resolution 600 × 600 dpi, 9600 dpi equivalent × 600 dpi

Supported Original Types Sheet (maximum original

Original Feed System Fixed

(2) Printer Functions

First Black and 11.0 seconds or less

Interface USB Interface Connector: 1 (Hi-Speed USB)

Page Description Language PRESCRIBE

Emulations PCL6(PCL-XL, PCL5c), KPDL3,PostScript3 compatible, PDF, XPS,

*1 The processing speed will be slower than normal.

(3) Scanner Functions

File Format TIFF (MMR/JPEG compression), JPEG, PDF (MMR/JPEG compression),

Interface Ethernet (10 BASE-T/100 BASE-TX/1000 BASE-T), USB

*1 1-side scan and BW binary image duplex scan support

(4) FAX Functions

Communication Line Subscriber telephone line

Transmission Speed 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200/16800/14400/12000/

Coding Scheme JBIG/MMR/MR/MH

Error Correction ECM